Owners Manual - Subaru Forester MY09

Black plate (1,1)
Foreword
Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owners
Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in
excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control
system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read
this manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and
its operation. For information not found in this Owners Manual,
such as details concerning repairs or adjustments, we recommend
that you contact the dealer from whom you purchased your
SUBARU or the nearest SUBARU dealer.
The information, specifications and illustrations found in this
manual are those in effect at the time of printing. FUJI HEAVY
INDUSTRIES LTD. reserves the right to change specifications and
designs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any
obligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles
previously sold. This Owners Manual applies to all models and
covers all equipment, including factory installed options. Some
explanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in your
vehicle.
Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The
next owner will need the information found herein.
NOTE: SUBARU dealer means an authorized SUBARU dealer
and/or repairer.
FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD., TOKYO, JAPAN
is a registered trademark of FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.
C copyright 2008 FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.
*
This manual uses recycled paper.
Model "A8140GE-A" EDITED: 2007/ 12/ 13
Black plate (2,1)
This manual describes the following vehicle types.*
* The illustrated vehicle is one of the FORESTER series.
Black plate (3,1)
1
Warranties
All warranty information, including details
of coverage and exclusions, is in the
Warranty and Service Booklet. Please
read these warranties carefully.
& Vehicles with HID headlights

optionally equipped
CAUTION
High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlights contain mercury. For that
reason, it is necessary to remove
HID headlights before vehicle disposal. Once removed, please reuse,
recycle or dispose of the HID headlights as hazardous waste.
How to use this Owners

Manual
& Using your Owners Manual
Before you operate your vehicle, carefully
read this manual. To protect yourself and
extend the service life of your vehicle,
follow the instructions in this manual.
Failure to observe these instructions may
result in serious injury and damage to your
vehicle.
This manual is composed of fourteen
chapters. Each chapter begins with a brief
table of contents, so you can usually tell at
a glance if that chapter contains the
information you want.
Chapter 1: Seat, seatbelt and SRS
airbags
This chapter informs you how to use the
seat and seatbelt and contains precautions for the SRS airbags.
Chapter 2: Keys and doors
This chapter informs you how to operate
the keys, locks and windows.
Chapter 3: Instruments and controls
This chapter informs you about the operation of instrument panel indicators and
how to use the instruments and other
switches.
Chapter 4: Climate control

the climate control.
Chapter 5: Audio
your audio system.
Chapter 6: Interior equipment
interior equipment.
Chapter 7: Starting and operating
This chapter informs you how to start and
operate your SUBARU.
Chapter 8: Driving tips
This chapter informs you how to drive your
SUBARU in various conditions and explains some safety tips on driving.
Chapter 9: In case of emergency
This chapter informs you what to do if you
have a problem while driving, such as a
flat tire or engine overheating.
Chapter 10: Appearance care
This chapter informs you how to keep your
SUBARU looking good.
Chapter 11: Maintenance and service
This chapter informs you when you need
to take your SUBARU to the dealer for
scheduled maintenance and informs you
how to keep your SUBARU running
properly.
CONTINUED
Black plate (4,1)
2
Chapter 12: Specifications
This chapter informs you about dimension
and capacities of your SUBARU.
Chapter 13: Supplement
This chapter informs you of supplementary information complied with some
countries requirements.
Chapter 14: Index
This is an alphabetical listing of all thats in
this manual. You can use it to quickly find
something you want to read.
& Safety warnings

You will find a number of WARNINGs,
CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this manual.
These safety warnings alert you to potential hazards that could result in injury to
you or others.
Please read these safety warnings as well
as all other portions of this manual carefully in order to gain a better understanding of how to use your SUBARU vehicle
safely.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation in
which injury or damage to your
vehicle, or both, could result if the
caution is ignored.
NOTE
A NOTE gives information or suggestions how to make better use of your
vehicle.
& Safety symbol
Vehicle symbols
There are some of the symbols you may
see on your vehicle.
Mark
Name
WARNING
CAUTION
Read these instructions carefully
Wear eye protection
Battery fluid contains sulfuric
acid
Keep children away
Keep flames away
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation in
which serious injury or death could
result if the warning is ignored.
Prevent explosions
You will find a circle with a slash through it

in this manual. This symbol means Do
not, Do not do this, or Do not let this
happen, depending upon the context.
Power door lock
Black plate (5,1)
3
Mark
Name
Mark
Name
Mark
Name
Passengers windows lock
Windshield wiper and washer
Fan speed
Fuel
Windshield wiper mist (for

single wipe)
Instrument panel outlets
Front fog lights
Rear window wiper
Instrument panel outlets and

foot outlets
Rear fog lights
Rear window washer
Foot outlets
Hazard warning flasher
Lights
Windshield defroster and foot

outlets
Cigarette lighter
Headlight beam leveler
Windshield defroster
Seat heater
Tail lights, license plate lights

and instrument panel illumination
Rear window defogger/Outside mirror defogger/Windshield wiper deicer
ISOFIX anchor bars
Headlights
Air recirculation
Child restraint top tether anchorages
Turn signal
Engine oil
Horn
Illumination brightness
Washer
Wiper intermittent
Engine hood
Brake fluid
CONTINUED
Black plate (6,1)
4
Mark
Name
Door lock (transmitter)
Door unlock (transmitter)

Rear gate (transmitter)
Safety precautions when

driving
& Seatbelt and SRS airbag
WARNING
. All persons in the vehicle should
fasten their seatbelts BEFORE
the vehicle starts to move. Otherwise, the possibility of serious
injury becomes greater in the
event of a sudden stop or accident.
. To obtain maximum protection in
the event of an accident, the
driver and all passengers in the
vehicle should always wear seatbelts when the vehicle is moving.
The SRS (Supplemental Restraint
System) airbag does not do away
with the need to fasten seatbelts.
In combination with the seatbelts, it offers the best combined
protection in case of a serious
accident.
Not wearing a seatbelt increases
the chance of severe injury or
death in a crash even when the
vehicle has the SRS airbag.
. The SRS airbags deploy with
considerable speed and force.

Occupants who are out of proper
position when the SRS airbag
deploys could suffer very serious
injuries. Because the SRS airbag
needs enough space for deployment, the driver should always
sit upright and well back in the
seat as far from the steering
wheel as practical while still
maintaining full vehicle control
and the front passenger should
move the seat as far back as
possible and sit upright and well
back in the seat.
Carefully read the Seatbelts and *SRS
airbag (Supplemental Restraint System
airbag) sections in chapter 1 for instructions and precautions concerning the
seatbelt system and SRS airbag system.
Black plate (7,1)
5
& Child safety
WARNING
. Never hold a child on your lap or
in your arms while the vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a
collision, because the child will
be caught between the passenger and objects inside the vehicle.
. While riding in the vehicle, infants and small children should
always be placed in the REAR
seat in an infant or a child
restraint system which is appropriate for the childs age, height
and weight. If a child is too big for
a child restraint system, the child
should sit in the REAR seat and
be restrained using the seatbelts.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions. Never allow a child
to stand up or kneel on the seat.
. Put children in the REAR seat
properly restrained at all times in
a child restraint device or in a
seatbelt. The SRS airbag deploys
with considerable speed and

force and can injure or even kill
children, especially if they are
not restrained or improperly restrained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults,
their risk of being injured from
deployment is greater.
. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD
FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE
FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILDS HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
THE SRS AIRBAG.
. Always turn the child safety locks
to the LOCK position when
children sit on the rear seat.
Serious injury could result if a
child accidentally opens the door
and falls out. Refer to the Child
safety locks section in chapter
2.
. Always lock the passengers windows using the lock switch when
children are riding in the vehicle.
Failure to follow this procedure
could result in injury to a child
operating the power window. Refer to the Windows section in
chapter 2.
. Never leave unattended children

in the vehicle. They could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on
hot or sunny days, temperature
in a closed vehicle could quickly
become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries
to them.
Carefully read the Child restraint systems, *SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) and Seatbelts
sections in chapter 1 for instructions and
precautions concerning the child restraint
system, seatbelt system and SRS airbag
system.
& Engine exhaust gas (carbon

monoxide)
WARNING
. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.
Engine exhaust gas contains
carbon monoxide, a colorless
and odorless gas which is dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
. Always properly maintain the engine exhaust system to prevent
engine exhaust gas from enter CONTINUED
Black plate (8,1)
6
ing the vehicle.
. Never run the engine in a closed
space, such as a garage, except
for the brief time needed to drive
the vehicle in or out of it.
. Avoid remaining in a parked
vehicle for a lengthy time while
the engine is running. If that is
unavoidable, then use the ventilation fan to force outside air into
the vehicle.
. Always keep the front ventilator
inlet grille free from snow, leaves
or other obstructions to ensure
that the ventilation system always works properly.
. If at any time you suspect that
exhaust fumes are entering the
vehicle, have t he probl em
checked and corrected as soon
as possible. If you must drive
under these conditions, drive
only with all windows fully open.
. Keep the rear gate closed while
driving to prevent exhaust gas
from entering the vehicle.
& Drinking and driving

WARNING
Drinking and then driving is very
dangerous. Alcohol in the bloodstream delays your reaction and
impairs your perception, judgment
and attentiveness. If you drive after
drinking even if you drink just a
little it will increase the risk of
being involved in a serious or fatal
accident, injuring or killing yourself,
your passengers and others. In
addition, if you are injured in the
accident, alcohol may increase the
severity of that injury.
Please dont drink and drive.
Drunken driving is one of the most
frequent causes of accidents. Since alcohol affects all people differently, you may
have consumed too much alcohol to drive
safely even if the level of alcohol in your
blood is below the legal limit. The safest
thing you can do is never drink and drive.
& Drugs and driving

WARNING
There are some drugs (over the
counter and prescription) that can
delay your reaction time and impair
your perception, judgment and attentiveness. If you drive after taking
them, it may increase your, your
passengers and other persons risk
of being involved in a serious or
fatal accident.
If you are taking any drugs, check with
your doctor or pharmacist or read the
literature that accompanies the medication
to determine if the drug you are taking can
impair your driving ability. Do not drive
after taking any medications that can
make you drowsy or otherwise affect your
ability to safely operate a motor vehicle. If
you have a medical condition that requires
you to take drugs, please consult with
your doctor.
Never drive if you are under the influence
of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your
own health and well-being, we urge you
not to take illegal drugs in the first place
and to seek treatment if you are addicted
to those drugs.
Black plate (9,1)
7
& Driving when tired or sleepy
WARNING
When you are tired or sleepy, your
reaction will be delayed and your
perception, judgment and attentiveness will be impaired. If you drive
when tired or sleepy, your, your
passengers and other persons
chances of being involved in a
serious accident may increase.
Please do not continue to drive but
instead find a safe place to rest if you
are tired or sleepy. On long trips, you
should make periodic rest stops to refresh
yourself before continuing on your journey.
When possible, you should share the
driving with others.
& Modification of your vehicle
& Driving vehicles equipped

with navigation system
CAUTION
Your vehicle should not be modified.
Modification could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may
even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from
modification may not be covered
under warranties.
& Car phone/cell phone and

driving
CAUTION
Do not use a car phone/cell phone
while driving; it may distract your
attention from driving and can lead
to an accident. If you use a car
phone/cell phone, pull off the road
and park in a safe place before
using your phone. In some countries, only hands-free phones may
legally be used while driving.
WARNING
Do not allow the monitor to distract
your attention from driving. Also, do
not operate the controls of the
navigation system while driving.
The loss of attention to driving
could lead to an accident. If you
wish to operate the controls of the
navigation system, first take the
vehicle off the road and stop it in a
safe place.
& Driving with pets

Unrestrained pets can interfere with your
driving and distract your attention from
driving. In a collision or sudden stop,
unrestrained pets or cages can be thrown
around inside the vehicle and hurt you or
your passengers. Besides, the pets can
be hurt under these situations. It is also for
their own safety that pets should be
properly restrained in your vehicle. Restrain a pet with a special traveling
harness which can be secured to the rear
seat with a seatbelt or use a pet carrier
which can be secured to the rear seat by
routing a seatbelt through the carriers
CONTINUED
Black plate (10,1)
8
handle. Never restrain pets or pet carriers
in the front passengers seat. For further
information, consult your veterinarian,
local animal protection society or pet
shop.
& Tire pressures

Check and, if necessary, adjust the
pressure of each tire (including the spare)
at least once a month and before any long
journey.
Check the tire pressure when the tires are
cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the
tire pressures to the values shown on the
tire placard.
Refer to the Tires and wheels section in
chapter 11 for detailed information.
WARNING
Driving at high speeds with excessively low tire pressures can cause
the tires to deform severely and to
rapidly become hot. A sharp increase in temperature could cause
tread separation, and destruction of
the tires. The resulting loss of
vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
Black plate (1,1)
Table of contents
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Keys and doors
Instruments and controls
Climate control
Audio
Interior equipment
Starting and operating
Driving tips
In case of emergency
Appearance care
10
Maintenance and service
11
Specifications
12
Supplement
13
Index
14
Model "A8140GE-A" Edited: 2007/ 12/ 13
Black plate (12,1)
10
Illustrated index
& Exterior
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
Engine hood (page 11-11)

Headlight switch (page 3-33)
Replacing bulbs (page 11-54)
Wiper switch (page 3-41)
Sunroof (page 2-35)
Roof rail (page 8-11)
Door locks (page 2-4)
Tire pressure (page 11-39)
Flat tires (page 9-2)
Tire chains (page 8-10)
Fog light switch (page 3-38)
Tie-down hooks (page 9-10)
Towing hook (page 9-10)
Black plate (13,1)
11
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Rear window defogger button (page 343)

Fuel filler lid and cap (page 7-2)
Child safety locks (page 2-31)
Tie-down hooks (page 9-11)
Rear gate (page 2-34)
Towing hook (page 9-11)
CONTINUED
Black plate (14,1)
12
& Interior
1)
! Passenger compartment area
2)
3)
4)
5)
Anchor bars for ISOFIX child restraint

system (page 1-33)
Seatbelt (page 1-10)
Parking brake lever (page 7-35)
Front seat (page 1-2)
Rear seat (page 1-7)
Black plate (15,1)
13
1)
2)
3)
4)
Center console (page 6-5)

Cup holder (page 6-7)
Ashtray (page 6-12)
Front power supply socket (page 6-9)
Glove box (page 6-4)
CONTINUED
Black plate (16,1)
14
& Instrument panel
! Left-hand drive vehicles
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
18)
19)

Outside mirror switch (page 3-47)
Illumination brightness control
(page 3-35)
Light control lever (page 3-33)
Combination meter (page 3-11)
Wiper control lever (page 3-39)
Hazard warning flasher switch
(page 3-10)
Audio (page 5-1)
Shift lever (MT) (page 7-14)/
Selector lever (AT) (page 7-18)
Climate control (page 4-1)
Cruise control (page 7-38)
Horn (page 3-49)
SRS airbag (page 1-37)
Tilt/telescopic steering (page 3-49)
Audio control buttons (page 5-23)
Fuse box (page 11-51)
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch
(page 7-34)
Hood lock release knob (page 11-11)
Power windows (page 2-32)
Black plate (17,1)
15
! Right-hand drive vehicles
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
18)
19)
20)

Outside mirror switch (page 3-47)
Headlight beam leveler (page 3-36)
Illumination brightness control dial
(page 3-35)
Light control lever (page 3-33) or Wiper
control lever (page 3-39)
Combination meter (page 3-11)
Wiper control lever (page 3-39) or Light
control lever (page 3-33)
Hazard warning flasher switch
(page 3-10)
Audio (page 5-1)
Shift lever (MT) (page 7-14)/
Selector lever (AT) (page 7-18)
Climate control (page 4-1)
Audio control buttons (page 5-23)
Horn (page 3-49)
SRS airbag (page 1-37)
Tilt/telescopic steering (page 3-49)
Cruise control (page 7-38)
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch
(page 7-34)
Hood lock release knob (page 11-11)
Power windows (page 2-32)
CONTINUED
Black plate (18,1)
16
& Light control and wiper control levers/switches
! Except Australia models
1)
2)
3)
4)
Windshield wiper (page 3-41)

Mist (page 3-41)
Windshield washer (page 3-42)
Rear window wiper and washer switch
(page 3-42)
5) Wiper intermittent time control switch
(page 3-41)
6) Wiper control lever (page 3-39)
7) Light control switch (page 3-33)
8) Fog light switch (page 3-38)
9) Headlight ON/OFF (page 3-33)
10) Headlight flasher High/Low beam
change (page 3-34)
11) Turn signal (page 3-34)
Black plate (19,1)
17
! Australia models
1)
2)
Turn signal (page 3-34)

Headlight flasher High/Low beam
change (page 3-34)
3) Headlight ON/OFF (page 3-33)
4) Front fog light switch (page 3-38)
5) Light control switch (page 3-33)
6) Wiper control lever (page 3-39)
7) Wiper intermittent time control switch
(page 3-41)
8) Rear window wiper and washer switch
(page 3-42)
9) Mist (page 3-41)
10) Windshield washer (page 3-42)
11) Windshield wiper (page 3-41)
CONTINUED
Black plate (20,1)
18
& Combination meter
! MT vehicles
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Tachometer (page 3-13)

Speedometer (page 3-12)
Fuel gauge (page 3-13)
Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter
reset knob (page 3-11)
Odometer/Trip meter (page 3-12)
Coolant temperature warning/indicator
light (page 3-18)
Black plate (21,1)
19
! AT vehicles
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
Tachometer (page 3-13)

Speedometer (page 3-12)
Fuel gauge (page 3-13)
Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter
reset knob (page 3-11)
Odometer/Trip meter (page 3-12)
Selector lever and gear position indicator
(page 3-29)
Coolant temperature warning/indicator
light (page 3-18)
CONTINUED
Black plate (22,1)
20
& Warning and indicator lights
Mark
Name
Page
Seatbelt warning light

(if equipped)
3-15
Front passengers seatbelt warning light

(if equipped)
3-15
SRS airbag system

warning light
3-16
Malfunction indicator
lamp (Check Engine
light)
3-17
Coolant temperature low

indicator light/Coolant
temperature high warning light
3-18
Charge warning light
3-18
Oil pressure warning

light
3-18
AT OIL TEMP warning

light (AT vehicles)
3-19
Rear differential oil temperature warning light

(if equipped)
3-19
ABS warning light
3-19
Mark
Name
Page
Mark
Name
Page
Brake system warning

light
3-21
Rear fog light indicator

light (if equipped)
3-30
Door open warning light
3-23
Access key warning light

(if equipped)
3-24
All-Wheel Drive warning

light (AT vehicles)
3-23
Immobilizer indicator
light
3-29
Power steering warning

light (if equipped)
3-23
Headlight indicator light
3-30
Hill start assist warning

light (MT vehicles)
3-22
Cruise control indicator

light (if equipped)
3-30
Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator

light
3-29
Cruise control set indicator light (if equipped)
3-30
Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/Vehicle

Dynamics Control OFF
indicator light
3-20
Low fuel warning light
3-22
Turn signal indicator

lights
SPORT mode indicator

light (AT vehicles)
3-29
3-30
3-29
High beam indicator light
3-30
LO position indicator
light (dual range MT vehicles)
Automatic headlight
beam leveler warning
light (if equipped)
3-23
Front fog light indicator

light (if equipped)
3-30
Black plate (23,1)
21
& Tire changing tools
1)
2)
3)
Jack handle (page 9-2/page 9-16)

Jack (page 9-2/page 9-16)
Spare tire (page 9-2)
Black plate (24,1)
22
Function settings
A SUBARU dealer can change the settings of the functions shown in the following table to meet your personal requirements. We
recommend that you contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for details. If your vehicle is equipped with a genuine SUBARU navigation
system, the settings for some of these functions can be changed using the monitor. For details, please refer to the Owners Manual
supplement for the navigation system.
Item
Function
Possible settings
Default setting
Keyless access*1*2
Automatic locking
Operation/Non-operation
Operation
Automatic locking operation period
Can be set in range from 20s 30s

to 60s
2-14
Door unlock selection function*3
Non-operation
2-13
Automatic locking
Operation
2-25
Automatic locking operation period
Can be set in range from 20s 30s

to 60s.
2-25
Key lock-in prevention*1
Key lock-in prevention
2-7
Rear window defogger
Operation for 15 min./Contin- Operation for 15 min. 3-43

uous operation
Windshield wiper deicer*2
Windshield wiper deicer
Operation for 15 min./Contin- Operation for 15 min. 3-44

uous operation
Dome light
Operation in interlock with remote key- OFF/Short/Normal/Long

less entry system and drivers door
Normal
6-2
Battery drainage prevention function
Battery drainage prevention function
Operation
2-6
Remote keyless entry system*1
Operation
Page
2-14
*1
:
*2
:
*3
Not applicable to models equipped with double locking system

If equipped
: Left-hand drive vehicles only
Black plate (1,1)

Front seats...........................................................
1-2
Manual seat ........................................................

Power seat (drivers seat if equipped) ...............
Head restraint adjustment....................................
Active head restraint ...........................................
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-5
Seat heater (if equipped) ....................................
1-6
Type A seat heater ..............................................

Type B seat heater ..............................................
1-6
1-6
Rear seats............................................................
1-7
Armrest ..............................................................
Head restraint adjustment....................................
Reclining the seatback ........................................
Folding down the rear seatback ...........................
1-7
1-7
1-9
1-9
Seatbelts .............................................................
1-10
Seatbelt safety tips.............................................

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ...................
Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor
(A/ELR) ............................................................
Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................
Fastening the seatbelt ........................................
Seatbelt maintenance .........................................
1-10
1-11
1-12
1-12
1-14
1-20
Front seatbelt pretensioners .............................
1-20
Seatbelt with shoulder belt pretensioner .............

Seatbelt with shoulder belt and lap belt
pretensioners (drivers side Australia models
only) ................................................................
1-20
System monitors ...............................................

System servicing ...............................................
Precautions against vehicle modification ............
1-23
1-24
1-24
Child restraint systems .....................................
1-25
Where to place a child restraint system ..............

Choosing a child restraint system ......................
Child restraint suitability for each seating
position (Europe) .............................................
Installing child restraint systems with A/ELR
seatbelt ...........................................................
Installing a booster seat.....................................
Installation of child restraint systems using
ISOFIX anchor bars..........................................
Top tether anchorages .......................................
1-26
1-27
*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint

System airbag)................................................
Vehicle with SRS airbags and lap/shoulder
restraints for driver, front passenger, and
window-side rear passengers...........................
SRS frontal airbag .............................................
SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag
(if equipped) ....................................................
SRS airbag system monitor................................
SRS airbag system servicing .............................
Precautions against vehicle modification ............
1-28
1-29
1-32
1-33
1-35
1-37
1-37
1-42
1-48
1-54
1-55
1-56
1-22
Black plate (28,1)
1-2
Front seats
WARNING
. Never adjust the seat while driving to avoid the possibility of
loss of vehicle control and of
personal injury.
. Before adjusting the seat, make
sure the hands and feet of rear
seat passengers or luggage are
clear of the adjusting mechanism.
. Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when the occupant sits
well back and upright in the seat.
To reduce the risk of sliding
under the seatbelt in a collision,
the front seatbacks should be
always used in the upright position while the vehicle is running.
If the front seatbacks are not
used in the upright position in a
collision, the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen will
increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death.
WARNING
times.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD
BY PLACING THE CHILDS HEAD
TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. For instructions and precautions concerning child restraint systems, refer to the Child restraint
systems section in this chapter.
Put children in the REAR seat

properly restrained at all times in a
child restraint device or in a seatbelt, whichever is appropriate for
the childs age, height and weight.
The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and can
injure or even kill children, especially if they are not restrained or
improperly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than
adults, their risk of being injured
from deployment is greater.
Secure ALL types of child restraint
devices (including forward facing
child seat) in the REAR seats at all
Black plate (29,1)
& Manual seat
1-3
! Reclining the seatback
! Forward and backward adjustment
Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to

the desired position. Then release the
lever and move the seat back and forth to
make sure that it is securely locked into
place.
Pull the reclining lever up and adjust the

seatback to the desired position. Then
release the lever and make sure the
seatback is securely locked into place.
The seatback placed in a reclined position
can spring back upward with force when
the lever is pulled. While operating the
lever to return the seatback, hold the
seatback lightly so that it may be raised
back gradually.
WARNING
To prevent the passenger from sliding under the seatbelt in the event of
a collision, always put the seatback
in the upright position while the
vehicle is in motion. Also, do not
place objects such as cushions
between the passenger and the
seatback. If you do so, the risk of
sliding under the lap belt and of the
lap belt sliding up over the abdomen
will increase, and both can result in
CONTINUED
Black plate (30,1)
1-4
! Seat height adjustment (drivers

seat)
& Power seat (drivers seat if

equipped)
WARNING
1)
2)
When the lever is pushed down, the seat

is lowered.
When the lever is pulled up, the seat
rises.
1)
The height of the seat can be adjusted by

moving the seat adjustment lever up and
down.
2)
3)
4)
Seat position forward/backward control switch

To adjust the seat forward or backward,
move the control switch forward or
backward. During forward/backward adjustment of the seat, you cannot adjust
the seat cushion angle or seat cushion
height.
Seat cushion angle control switch
To adjust the seat cushion angle, pull up
or push down the front end of the control
switch.
Seatback angle (reclining) control
switch
To adjust the angle of the seatback,
move the control switch.
Seat height control switch
To adjust the seat height, pull up or push
down the rear end of the control switch.
Black plate (31,1)
& Head restraint adjustment
To raise the head restraint, pull it up.

To lower it, push the head restraint down
while pressing the release button on the
top of the seatback.
The head restraint should be adjusted so
that the center of the head restraint is
closest to the top of the occupants ears.
WARNING
& Active head restraint
The front seats of your vehicle are

equipped with active head restraints. They
tilt forward slightly in the event the vehicle
is struck from the rear, decreasing the
amount of rearward head movement and
thus reducing the risk of whiplash. For
maximum effectiveness, the head restraint
should be adjusted so that the center of
the head restraint is closest to the top of
the occupants ears.
1-5
CAUTION
. Each active head restraint is
effective only when its height is
properly adjusted and the driver/
passenger sits in the correct
position on the seat.
. If your vehicle is involved in a
rear-end collision, we recommend that you have an authorized SUBARU dealer inspect the
active head restraints.
. The active head restraints may
not operate in the event the
vehicle experiences only a slight
impact in the rear.
. The active head restraints may be
damaged if they are pushed hard
from behind or subjected to
shock. As a result, they may not
function if the vehicle suffers a
rear impact.
Never drive the vehicle with the

head restraints removed because
they are designed to reduce the risk
of serious neck injury in the event
that the vehicle is struck from the
rear.
Black plate (32,1)
1-6
Seat heater (if equipped)
& Type A seat heater
& Type B seat heater
The seat heater is equipped in the front

seats.
The seat heater operates when the ignition switch is either in the Acc or ON
position.
CAUTION
. There is a possibility that people
with delicate skin may suffer
slight burns even at low temperatures if he/she uses the seat
heater for a long period of time.
When using the heater, always be
sure to warn the persons concerned.
. Do not put anything on the seat
which insulates against heat,
such as a blanket, cushion, or
similar items. This may cause the
seat heater to overheat.
NOTE
Use of the seat heater for a long period
of time while the engine is not running
can cause battery discharge.
1)
2)
A)
B)
HI Rapid heating
LO Normal heating
Left-hand side
Right-hand side
To turn on the seat heater, push the LO

or HI position on the switch, as desired,
depending on the temperature.
Selecting the HI position will cause the
seat to heat up quicker.
The indicator located on the switch illuminates when the seat heater is in operation.
When the vehicles interior is warmed
enough or before you leave the vehicle,
be sure to turn the switch off.
Each seat heater has four levels of

adjustment. To use the heater in the
right-hand seat, turn the R adjustment
dial forward until the mark reaches the
desired position. To activate the heater in
the left-hand seat, turn the L adjustment
dial forward until the mark reaches the
desired position. Each heater warms the
seat most quickly with the mark on the
adjustment dial in the furthest-forward
position. An indicator light on the adjustment dial for each seat heater illuminates
when that seat heater is activated.
When the vehicles interior is warmed
enough or before you leave the vehicle,
always turn the switch off.
Black plate (33,1)
1-7
& Armrest
Rear seats
WARNING
WARNING
Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when the occupant sits well
back and upright in the seat. Do not
put cushions or any other materials
between occupants and seatbacks
or seat cushions. If you do so, the
risk of sliding under the lap belt and
of the lap belt sliding up over the
abdomen will increase, and both can
result in serious internal injury or
death.
Never stack luggage or other cargo

higher than the top of the seatback
because it could tumble forward and
injure passengers in the event of a
sudden stop or accident.
To lower the armrest, pull the top edge of

the armrest down.
WARNING
To avoid the possibility of serious
injury, passengers must never be
allowed to sit on the center armrest
while the vehicle is in motion.
& Head restraint adjustment

WARNING
Never drive the vehicle with the
head restraints removed because
they are designed to reduce the risk
CONTINUED
Black plate (34,1)
1-8
height.
of serious neck injury in the event

that the vehicle is struck from the
rear.
! Rear windows side seating position
CAUTION
The head restraint is not intended to
be used at the lowest position.
Before sitting on the seat, raise the
head restraint to an appropriate
position depending on your sitting
height.
To raise the head restraint, pull it up.

while pressing the release button on the
top of the seatback.
The head restraint should be adjusted so
that the center of the head restraint is
closest to the top of the occupants ears.
When the seats are not occupied, lower
the head restraints to improve rearward
visibility.
! Rear center seating position
A)
B)
When not used (retracted position)

When used (click position)
CAUTION
A)
B)
When not used (retracted position)

When used (click position)
The head restraint is not intended to

be used at the lowest position.
Before sitting on the seat, raise the
head restraint to an appropriate
position depending on your sitting
To raise the head restraint, pull it up while

pressing the release button on the top of
Black plate (35,1)
the seatback.
while pressing the release button.
When the rear-center seating position is
occupied, raise the head restraint to an
appropriate position depending on your
sitting height. When the rear center seating position is not occupied, lower the
head restraint to improve rearward visibility.
& Reclining the seatback

CAUTION
Be careful not to pinch your hand
between the headrest and the cargo
area cover when you recline the rear
seat.
WARNING
Push the switch and adjust the seatback

to the desired position.
1-9
Then release the switch and make sure

the seatback is securely locked into place.
& Folding down the rear seatback

WARNING
. After returning the rear seatback
to its original position, be certain
to place all of the seatbelts and
the tab attached to the seat
cushion above the seat cushion.
And make certain that the
shoulder belts are fully visible.
. Never allow passengers to ride
on the folded rear seatback or in
the cargo area. Doing so may
result in serious injury or death.
. Secure all objects and especially
long items properly to prevent
them from being thrown around
inside the vehicle and causing
serious injury during a sudden
stop, a sudden steering maneuver or a rapid acceleration.
. For vehicles equipped with the
rear seat center table, when folding down the rear seatback, return the rear seat center table to
its original position. If the rear
seat center table is not returned
CONTINUED
Black plate (36,1)
1-10
to its original position, the rear

seat center table could break and
bodily injury could occur.
CAUTION
Vehicles with the reclining function
may automatically fold down
strongly because of its internal
spring. Operate the seatback assisting with your hands.
1. Lower the head restraints.

2. Unlock the seatback by pulling the
release knob and then fold the seatback
down.
To return the seatback to its original
position, raise the seatback until it locks
into place and make sure that it is securely

locked.
Seatbelts
& Seatbelt safety tips
WARNING
. All persons in the vehicle should
fasten their seatbelts BEFORE
the vehicle starts to move. Otherwise, the possibility of serious
injury becomes greater in the
event of a sudden stop or accident.
. All belts should fit snugly in order
to provide full restraint. Loose
fitting belts are not as effective in
preventing or reducing injury.
. Each seatbelt is designed to
support only one person. Never
use a single belt for two or more
persons even children. Otherwise, in an accident, serious
injury or death could result.
. Replace all seatbelt assemblies
including retractors and attaching hardware worn by occupants
of a vehicle that has been in a
serious accident. The entire assembly should be replaced even
if damage is not obvious.
Black plate (37,1)

seatbelt, whichever is appropriate for the childs age, height and
weight. The SRS airbag deploys
Secure ALL types of child restraint devices (including forward facing child seats) in the
REAR seats at all times.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD
THE SRS AIRBAG.
positions than in the front seating positions. For instructions
and precautions concerning the
child restraint system, refer to
the Child restraint systems
section in this chapter.
1-11
! Expectant mothers
! Infants or small children

Use a child restraint system that is
suitable for your vehicle. Refer to the
Child restraint systems section in this
chapter.
! Children
If a child is too big for a child restraint
system, the child should sit in the rear seat
and be restrained using the seatbelts.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front
seating positions. Never allow a child to
stand up or kneel on the seat.
If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses
the face or neck, adjust the shoulder belt
anchor height (window-side seating positions only) and then if necessary move the
child closer to the belt buckle to help
provide a good shoulder belt fit. Care must
be taken to securely place the lap belt as
low as possible on the hips and not on the
childs waist. If the shoulder portion of the
belt cannot be properly positioned, a child
restraint system should be used. Never
place the shoulder belt under the childs
arm or behind the childs back.
Expectant mothers also need to use the

seatbelts. They should consult their doctor
for specific recommendations. The lap belt
should be worn securely and as low as
possible over the hips, not over the waist.
& Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

The drivers seatbelt and front passengers seatbelt have an Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR).
The emergency locking retractor allows
normal body movement but the retractor
locks automatically during a sudden stop,
impact or if you pull the belt very quickly
out of the retractor.
CONTINUED
Black plate (38,1)
1-12
& Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/ELR)
& Seatbelt warning light
Each rear passengers seatbelt has an

Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor
(A/ELR). The Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor normally functions as an
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR). The
A/ELR has an additional locking mode
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode intended to secure a child restraint
system. When the seatbelt is once drawn
out completely and is then retracted even
slightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt in
that position and the seatbelt cannot be
extended. As the belt is rewinding, clicks
will be heard which indicate the retractor
functions as an ALR. When the seatbelt is
retracted fully, the ALR mode is canceled.
NOTE
When securing a child restraint system on

the rear seats by the use of the seatbelt,
the seatbelt must be changed over to the
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.
When the child restraint system is removed, make sure that the seatbelt
retracts fully and the retractor returned to
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
mode.
For instructions on how to convert the
retractor to the ALR mode and restore it to
the ELR mode, refer to the Child restraint
systems section in this chapter.
and chime
If your seatbelt warning device does

not operate as described below, it may
be out of order. We recommend that
you have the device inspected and, if
necessary, repaired by the nearest
SUBARU dealer.
! Australia models
Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt
warning device at the drivers and front
passengers seat.
With the ignition switch turned to the ON
position, this device reminds the driver
and front passenger to put on their
seatbelts by turning on warning lights in
the following locations.
Drivers warning light
Front passengers warning light
If the vehicle is driven at a speed no

higher than approximately 20 km/h (12.5
mph) with the drivers seatbelt and/or
passengers seatbelt not fastened, the
Black plate (39,1)
warning light(s) corresponding to the unfastened seatbelt(s) will illuminate and

stays on continuously.
If the vehicle subsequently reaches a
speed of approximately 20 km/h (12.5
warning light(s) will start a repeated cycle
consisting of 5 seconds of flashing followed by 1 second of continuous illumination. At the same time, a buzzer will start a
repeated cycle consisting of 5 seconds of
sounding followed by a 1-second pause. If
either of the unfastened seatbelts is
fastened at this time, the warning light
corresponding to that seatbelt will immediately turn off but the buzzer will continue
operating unless the remaining seatbelt is
fastened. This condition (continued operation of the buzzer unless the remaining
seatbelt is fastened) will continue for
approximately 108 seconds.
NOTE
. If the drivers and passengers seatbelts are not fastened simultaneously
(if one seatbelt is fastened significantly
earlier or later than the other), the
buzzer may sound longer (10 seconds
maximum).
. The occupant detection system of
the front passengers seat detects the
passenger by the weight on the seat.
Therefore, if there is a heavy object on
the seat, the warning system to fasten
the seatbelt is activated.
. If you use a cushion on a passengers seat, there is the possibility that
the occupant detection system cannot
detect the passenger.
If the drivers seatbelt and/or the passengers seatbelt is still not fastened when the
108-second period has elapsed, the warning light(s) will stop flashing and the
buzzer will stop sounding. The warning
light(s), however, will stay on continuously
unless the corresponding seatbelt(s) is
fastened.
1-13
! All models except Australia models

warning device at the drivers seat.
This device causes the seatbelt warning

light on the combination meter to illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to
ON to remind the driver to wear the
seatbelt.
mph) with the drivers seatbelt not fastened, the warning light will illuminate and
mph) with the drivers seatbelt not fastened, the warning light will start a
CONTINUED
Black plate (40,1)
1-14
repeated cycle consisting of 5 seconds of

flashing followed by 1 second of steady
illumination. At the same time, a buzzer
will start a repeated cycle consisting of 5
seconds of sounding followed by a 1second pause. If the seatbelt is fastened
at this time, the warning light will turn off
and the buzzer will stop sounding immediately.
If the drivers seatbelt is still not fastened
when the 108-second period has elapsed,
the warning light will stop flashing and the
light, however, will stay on continuously
unless the seatbelt is fastened.
& Fastening the seatbelt

WARNING
. Never use a belt that is twisted or
reversed. In an accident, this can
increase the risk or severity of
injury.
. Keep the lap belt as low as
possible on your hips. In a collision, this spreads the force of the
lap belt over stronger hip bones
instead of across the weaker
abdomen.
. Seatbelts provide maximum re-
straint when the occupant sits

well back and upright in the seat.
To reduce the risk of sliding
under the seatbelt in a collision,
the front seatbacks should be
always used in the upright position while the vehicle is running.
If the front seatbacks are not
used in the upright position in a
collision, the risk of sliding under
sliding up over the abdomen will
increase, and both can result in
. Do not put cushions or any other
materials between occupants
and seatbacks or seat cushions.
If you do so, the risk of sliding
under the lap belt and of the lap
belt sliding up over the abdomen
will increase, and both can result
in serious internal injury or
death.
WARNING
Never place the shoulder belt under
the arm or behind the back. If an
accident occurs, this can increase
the risk or severity of injury.
CAUTION
Metallic parts of the seatbelt can
become very hot in a vehicle that
has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn an occupant. Do
not touch such hot parts until they
cool.
Black plate (41,1)
! Front seatbelts
until you hear a click.
1. Adjust the seat position:

Drivers seat: Adjust the seatback to the
upright position. Move the seatback as far
from the steering wheel as practical while
still maintaining full vehicle control.
Front passengers seat: Adjust the seatback to the upright position. Move the seat
as far back as possible.
2. Sit well back in the seat.
3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If
the belt stops before reaching the buckle,
return the belt slightly and pull it out more
slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,
let the belt retract slightly after giving it a
strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on

the shoulder belt.
6. Place the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips, not on your waist.
1-15
! Adjusting the front seat shoulder

belt anchor height
The shoulder belt anchor height should be

adjusted to the position best suited for the
driver/front passenger.
To lower the anchor height, pull the
release knob and slide the anchor down.
To raise the anchor height, slide the
anchor up. Pull down on the anchor to
make sure that it is locked in place.
Always adjust the anchor height so that
the shoulder belt passes over the middle
of the shoulder without touching the neck.
4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

CONTINUED
Black plate (42,1)
1-16
WARNING
When wearing the seatbelts, make
sure the shoulder portion of the
webbing does not pass over your
neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt
anchor to a lower position. Placing
the shoulder belt over the neck may
result in neck injury during sudden
braking or in a collision.
! Unfastening the seatbelt
! Rear seatbelts (except rear center

seatbelt)
1. Sit well back in the seat.
2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If
the belt stops before reaching the buckle,
return the belt slightly and pull it out more
slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,
let the belt retract slightly after giving a
strong pull on it, then pull it out slowly
again.
the shoulder belt.
Push the button on the buckle.

Before closing the door, make sure that
the belts are retracted properly to avoid
catching the belt webbing in the door.

Black plate (43,1)
1-17
1
Push the button on the buckle.

Before closing the door, make sure that
the belts are retracted properly to avoid
catching the belt webbing in the door.
! Rear center seatbelt
WARNING
1)
2)
3)
4)
Center seatbelt tongue plate

Connector (tongue)
Connector (buckle)
Center seatbelt buckle
Fastening the seatbelt with the webbing twisted can increase the risk or
severity of injury in an accident.
When fastening the belt after it is
pulled out from the retractor, especially when inserting the connectors tongue plate into the mating
buckle (on right-hand side), always
check that the webbing is not
twisted.
WARNING
Be sure to fasten both tongue plates
to the respective buckles. If the
seatbelt is used only as a shoulder
belt (with the connectors tongue
plate not fastened to the connectors buckle on the right-hand side),
it cannot properly restrain the wearer in position in an accident, possibly resulting in serious injury or
death.
CONTINUED
Black plate (44,1)
1-18
is heard.
If the belt stops before reaching the
buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it
out more slowly. If the belt still cannot be
unlocked, let the belt retract slightly after
giving it a strong pull, then pull it out slowly
again.
The rear center seat belt is stowed in a

recessed compartment located in the
ceiling above the cargo area.
2. After drawing out the seatbelt, pass it

through the belt guide.
1. Remove the tongue plate from the slot

in the recessed compartment by pulling
the tongue plate rearward and pull out the
seatbelt slowly.
4. Insert the center seatbelt tongue plate

in the center seatbelt buckle marked
CENTER on the left-hand side until it
clicks.
3. After confirming that the webbing is not

twisted, insert the connector (tongue)
attached at the webbing end into the
buckle on the right-hand side until a click
Black plate (45,1)
1-19
1
Push the release button of the center

seatbelt buckle (on the left-hand side) to
unfasten the seatbelt.
NOTE
When the seatback is folded down for
greater cargo area, it is necessary to
disconnect the connector.

the shoulder belt.
2. Allow the retractor to roll up the belt.

You should hold the webbing end and
guide it back into the retractor while it is
rolling up. Neatly store the tongue plate in
the recessed compartment and then insert
the connector (tongue) plate into the slot.

1. Insert a key or other hard pointed
object into the slot in the connector
(buckle) on the right-hand side and push
it in, and the connector (tongue) plate will
disconnect from the buckle.
CONTINUED
Black plate (46,1)
1-20
CAUTION
. Do not allow the retractor to roll
up the seatbelt too quickly.
Otherwise, the metal tongue
plates may hit against the trim,
resulting in damaged trim.
. Have the seatbelt fully rolled up
so that the tongue plates are
neatly stored. A hanging tongue
plate can swing and hit against
the trim during driving, causing
damage to the trim.
CAUTION
. Keep the belts free of polishes,
oils, chemicals and particularly
battery acid.
. Never attempt to make modifications or changes that will prevent
the seatbelt from operating properly.
Front seatbelt pretensioners

The drivers and front passengers seatbelts have a seatbelt pretensioner. The
seatbelt pretensioners are designed to be
activated in the event of an accident
involving a moderate to severe frontal
collision.
& Seatbelt with shoulder belt

pretensioner
& Seatbelt maintenance

To clean the seatbelts, use a mild soap
and lukewarm water. Never bleach or dye
the belts because this could seriously
affect their strength.
Inspect the seatbelts and attachments
including the webbing and all hardware
periodically for cracks, cuts, gashes,
tears, damage, loose bolts or worn areas.
Replace the seatbelts even if only minor
damage is found.
The pretensioner sensor also serves as

the frontal SRS airbag sensor. If the
sensor detects a certain predetermined
amount of force during a frontal collision,
the front seatbelt is quickly drawn back in
by the pretensioner to take up the slack so
that the belt more effectively restrains the
front seat occupant.
Black plate (47,1)
When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated,

an operating noise will be heard and a
small amount of smoke will be released.
These occurrences are normal and not
harmful. This smoke does not indicate a
fire in the vehicle.
Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been
activated, the seatbelt retractor remains
locked. Consequently, the seatbelt cannot
be pulled out and retracted and therefore
must be replaced.
NOTE
. Seatbelt pretensioners are not designed to be activated in minor frontal
impacts, in side or rear impacts or in
roll-over accidents.
. The drivers and passengers seatbelt pretensioners and frontal SRS airbag operate simultaneously.
. Pretensioners are designed to function on a one-time-only basis. In the
event that a pretensioner is activated,
we recommend that you have both the
drivers and front passengers seatbelt
retractor assemblies replaced with
genuine SUBARU parts by your authorized SUBARU dealer.
. If either front seatbelt does not
retract or cannot be pulled out due to
a malfunction or activation of the
pretensioner, we recommend that you
contact your SUBARU dealer as soon

as possible.
. If the front seatbelt retractor assembly or surrounding area has been
damaged, we recommend that you
as possible.
. When you sell your vehicle, we urge
you to explain to the buyer that it has
seatbelt pretensioners by alerting him
to the contents of this section.
1-21
sioners, we recommend that you

consult your nearest SUBARU
dealer.
. When discarding front seatbelt
retractor assemblies or scrapping the entire vehicle due to
collision damage or for other
reasons, we recommend that
you consult your SUBARU dealer.
WARNING
. To obtain maximum protection,
the occupants should sit in an
upright position with their seatbelts properly fastened. Refer to
the Seatbelts section in this
chapter.
. Do not modify, remove or strike
the front seatbelt retractor assemblies or surrounding area.
This could result in accidental
activation of the seatbelt pretensioners or could make the system inoperative, possibly resulting in serious injury. Seatbelt
pretensioners have no user-serviceable parts. For required servicing of front seatbelt retractors
equipped with seatbelt preten CONTINUED
Black plate (48,1)
1-22
& Seatbelt with shoulder belt

and lap belt pretensioners
(drivers side Australia
models only)
small amount of smoke will be released.

These occurrences are normal and not
harmful. This smoke does not indicate a
fire in the vehicle.
Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been
activated, the seatbelt pretensioner remains locked. Consequently, the seatbelt
can not be pulled out and retracted and
therefore must be replaced.
NOTE
1)
2)
Seatbelt retractor assembly (shoulder

belt pretensioner)
Lap belt pretensioner
On the drivers side, the shoulder belt

pretensioner is supplemented by a lap belt
pretensioner, which is located at the base
of the center pillar. Like the shoulder belt
pretensioner, the lap belt pretensioner
instantaneously pulls in the belt to eliminate slackness if a certain level of frontal
collision force is detected. As a result, the
belt restrains the driver more effectively.
When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated,
an operating noise will be heard and a
. Seatbelt pretensioners are not designed to activate in minor frontal

impacts, in side or rear impacts or in
roll-over accidents.
. The drivers and passengers seatbelt pretensioners and frontal SRS airbag operate simultaneously.
. Pretensioners are designed to function on a one-time-only basis. In the
event that a pretensioner is activated,
we recommend that you have both the
drivers and front passengers seatbelt
retractor assemblies replaced with
genuine SUBARU parts by your authorized SUBARU dealer.
. If either front seatbelt does not
retract or cannot be pulled out due to
a malfunction or activation of the
pretensioner, we recommend that you
as possible.
. If the front seatbelt assembly or

surrounding area has been damaged,
we recommend that you contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
. When you sell your vehicle, we urge
you to explain to the buyer that it has
seatbelt pretensioners by alerting him
to the contents of this section.
WARNING
. To obtain maximum protection,
the occupants should sit in an
upright position with their seatbelts properly fastened. Refer to
the Seatbelts section in this
chapter.
. Do not modify, remove or strike
the front seatbelt assemblies or
surrounding area. This could
result in accidental activation of
the seatbelt pretensioners or
could make the system inoperative, possibly resulting in serious
injury. Seatbelt pretensioners
have no user-serviceable parts.
For required servicing of front
seatbelt assembly equipped with
lap belt pretensioners, we recommend that you consult your
nearest SUBARU dealer.
. When discarding front seatbelt
Black plate (49,1)
retractor assemblies or scrapping the entire vehicle due to

collision damage or for other
reasons, we recommend that
& System monitors
SRS airbag system warning light
A diagnostic system continually monitors

the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner
while the vehicle is being driven. The
seatbelt pretensioners share the control
module with the SRS airbag system.
Therefore, if any malfunction occurs in a
seatbelt pretensioner, the SRS airbag
system warning light will illuminate. The
SRS airbag system warning light will show
normal system operation by lighting for

approximately 6 seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.
The following components are monitored
by the indicator:
. Front sub sensor (right-hand side)
. Front sub sensor (left-hand side)
. Airbag control module (including impact sensors)
. Frontal airbag module (drivers side)
. Frontal airbag module (front passengers side)
. Side airbag sensor (center pillar righthand side if equipped)
. Side airbag sensor (center pillar lefthand side if equipped)
. Side airbag module (drivers side if
equipped)
. Side airbag module (front passengers
side if equipped)
. Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel
house right-hand side if equipped)
house left-hand side if equipped)
. Curtain airbag module (right-hand side
if equipped)
. Curtain airbag module (left-hand side
if equipped)
. Satellite safing sensor (under the rear
center seat if equipped)
1-23
. Seatbelt pretensioner (drivers side)

. Lap belt pretensioner (drivers side
Australia models only)
. Seatbelt pretensioner (front passengers side)
. All related wiring
WARNING
If the warning light exhibits any of
the following conditions, there may
be a malfunction in the seatbelt
pretensioners and/or SRS airbag
system. We recommend that you
have the system checked immediately by your nearest SUBARU dealer. Unless checked and properly
repaired, the seatbelt pretensioners
and/or SRS airbags will operate
improperly (e.g. SRS airbags may
inflate in a very minor collision or
not inflate in a severe collision),
which may increase the risk of
injury.
. Flashing or flickering of the warning light
. No illumination of the warning
light when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON position
. Continuous illumination of the
warning light
CONTINUED
Black plate (50,1)
1-24
. Illumination of the warning light

while driving
& System servicing

WARNING
. When discarding a seatbelt retractor assembly or scrapping
the entire vehicle damaged by a
collision, we recommend that
. Tampering with or disconnecting
the systems wiring could result
in accidental activation of the
seatbelt pretensioner and/or
SRS airbag or could make the
system inoperative, which may
result in serious injury. Do not
use electrical test equipment on
any circuit related to the seatbelt
pretensioner and SRS airbag
systems. For required servicing
of the seatbelt pretensioner, we
recommend that you consult
your nearest SUBARU dealer.
CAUTION
The front sub sensors are located
on both the right and left sides at the
front of the vehicle, and the SRS
airbag control module including the
impact sensors is located under the
center console. If you need service
or repair in those areas or near the
front seatbelt pretensioner, we recommend that you have the work
performed by your authorized
SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
If the front part of the vehicle is
damaged in an accident to the extent
that the seatbelt pretensioner does not
operate, we recommend that you contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as
possible.
& Precautions against vehicle

modification
CAUTION
Do not perform any of the following
modifications. Such modifications
can interfere with proper operation
of the seatbelt pretensioners.
. Attachment of any equipment
(bush bar, bullbar, winches, snow
plow, skid/sump plate, etc.) to the
front end other than genuine
SUBARU accessory parts or
parts that match the quality of
genuine SUBARU accessory
parts.
. Modification of the suspension
system or front end structure.
. Installation of a tire of different
size and construction from the
tires specified on the vehicle
placard attached to the drivers
door pillar or specified for individual vehicle models in this Owners Manual.
We recommend that you consult your

SUBARU dealer if you want to install any
accessory parts to your vehicle.
Black plate (51,1)
Child restraint systems

NOTE
For Australia models:
Refer to the Owners Manual supplement for the instructions of the Child
Restraint system.
1-25
1
properly secured in the vehicle. When

installing the child restraint system, carefully follow the manufacturers instructions.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front
seating positions.
WARNING
Infants and small children should always

be placed in an infant or child restraint
system while riding in the vehicle. You
should use an infant or child restraint
system that is appropriate for the childs
age and size. All child restraint systems
are designed to be secured in the vehicle
seats.
Children could be endangered in an
accident if their child restraints are not
WARNING
Never let a passenger hold a child
on his or her lap or in his or her
arms while the vehicle is moving.
The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a collision,
because the child will be caught
between the passenger and objects
inside the vehicle.
. Children should be properly restrained at all times. Never allow

a child to stand up, or to kneel on
any seat. Unrestrained children
will be thrown forward during
sudden stop or in an accident
and can be injured seriously.
. Never allow a child to stand up,
or to kneel on the front passengers seat, or never hold a child
on your lap or in your arms. The
SRS airbag deploys with considerable force and can injure or
even kill the child.
CONTINUED
Black plate (52,1)
1-26
& Where to place a child restraint system
of the seat cushion.

In this seating position, you should use
only a child restraint system that has a
bottom base that fits snugly against the
contours of the seat cushion and can be
securely retained using the seatbelt.
The following are SUBARUs recommendations on where to place a child restraint

system in your vehicle.
C: Rear seat, center seating position

Do not install a child restraint system
(including a booster seat).
Right-hand drive vehicles
Left-hand drive vehicles
A: Front passengers seat

Do not install a child restraint system
(including a booster seat) due to the
hazard to children posed by the passengers airbag.
B: Rear seat, window-side seating
positions
Recommended positions for all types of
child restraint systems.
In these positions, Automatic/Emergency
Locking Retractor (A/ELR) seatbelts and
ISOFIX anchor bars are provided for
installing a child restraint system.
Top tether anchorages are also provided
for these positions.
Some types of child restraints might not be
able to be secured firmly due to projection
WARNING
. Secure ALL types of child restraint devices (including forward facing child seats) in the
REAR seats at all times. The SRS
airbag deploys with considerable
speed and force and can injure or
even kill children, especially if
Black plate (53,1)
they are not restrained or improperly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than
adults, their risk of being injured
from deployment is greater. According to accident statistics,
positions than in the front seating positions.
FRONT PASSENGERS SEAT.
DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD
! Warning label
A warning label as shown above is

attached to the sun visor.
Extreme
This warning label means
Hazard! Do not use a rearward-facing
child restraint on a seat protected by an
airbag in front of it!.
1-27
& Choosing a child restraint

system
Choose a child restraint system that is

appropriate for the childs size and age to
provide the child with proper protection.
Also it is important that the child restraint
system meets safety standards applicable
to your country.
In most European countries, child restraint
systems must meet the requirement of
ECE regulation No. 44. It can be identified
by looking for the approval label on the
child restraint system or the manufacturers statement of compliance on the box
and the system.
According to the ECE regulation No. 44,
child restraint systems are classified into
the following five mass groups:
CONTINUED
Black plate (54,1)
1-28
Group 0: for children of a mass less than

10 kg
Group 0+: for children of a mass less than
13 kg
Group I: for children of mass from 9 to 18
kg
Group II: for children of mass from 15 to
25 kg
Group III: for children of mass from 22 to
36 kg
For European countries, refer to the
following table for the recommended child
restraint system.
& Child restraint suitability for each seating position (Europe)

Mass group
Group
according to
ECE 44
Front seating
position
Passenger
Window-side
0, 0+
L1, L2*
9 to 18 kg (8 to 48 months)
L3*
15 to 36 kg (3 to 12 years)
II, III
L4, L5*
Up to 13 kg (0 to 15 months)
Rear seating position

Center
L1: Suitable for SUBARU Baby-safe plus that is approved for the use in this mass group.
L2: Suitable for SUBARU Baby-safe ISOFIX plus that is approved for the use in this mass group.
(* : With ISOFIX fastening only)
L3: Recommended for SUBARU Duo plus that is approved for the use in this mass group.
L4: Suitable for SUBARU KID plus that is approved for the use in this mass group.
L5: Suitable for SUBARU KIDFIX that is approved for the use in this mass group.
6: Not suitable for child restraint system.
Black plate (55,1)
Mass group
Carry-cot
0 up to 10 kg
0+ up to 13 kg
I 9 to 18 kg
Size class
Fixture
Vehicle ISOFIX positions

Front
Passenger
Rear
Outboard
Rear
Center
ISO/L1
NA
NA
ISO/L2
NA
NA
ISO/R1
NA
IL1
NA
ISO/R1
NA
IL1
NA
ISO/R2
NA
IL1
NA
ISO/R3
NA
IL1
NA
ISO/R2
NA
IL1
NA
ISO/R3
NA
IL1
NA
ISO/F2
NA
IUF
NA
B1
ISO/F2X
NA
IUF
NA
ISO/F3
NA
IUF
NA
II 15 to 25 kg
NA
IL2
NA
III 22 to 36 kg
NA
IL2
NA
IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraints systems of universal category approved for use in
the mass group.
IL: Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRS) that are given in the attached list.
These ISOFIX CRS are those of the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories.
6: ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in this mass group and/or this
size class.
IL1: SUBARU BABY-SAFE ISOFIX Plus
IL2: SUBARU KIDFIX
1-29
& Installing child restraint systems with A/ELR seatbelt

WARNING
. Child restraint systems and seatbelts can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny
weather; they could burn a small
child. Check the child restraint
system before you place a child
in it.
. Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint system in your vehicle.
Unsecured child restraint systems can be thrown around inside of the vehicle in a sudden
stop, turn or accident; they can
strike and injure vehicle occupants as well as result in serious
injuries or death to the child.
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufacturers
instructions supplied with it. After
installing the child restraint system,
check to ensure that it is held
securely in position. If it is not held
tight and secure, the danger of your
CONTINUED
Black plate (56,1)
1-30
buckle.
child suffering personal injury in the

event of an accident may be increased.
WARNING
! Installing a rearward facing child

restraint

PASSENGERS SEAT. DOING SO
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH
TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILDS HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE
SRS AIRBAG.
4. Take up the slack in the lap belt.
NOTE
When the child restraint system is no
longer in use, remove it and confirm
that the seatbelt is in the ELR mode.
1. Place the child restraint system in the

rear seating position.
2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the child restraint system
following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer.
5. Push and pull the child restraint

system forward and from side to side to
check if it is firmly secured.
6. To remove the child restraint system,
press the release button on the seatbelt
Black plate (57,1)
1-31
! Installing forward facing child restraint
1. Place the child restraint system in the

rear seating position.
or around the child restraint system
manufacturer.
4. Take up the slack in the lap belt.

5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the
retractor to change the retractor over from
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
function. Then, allow the belt to rewind
into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding,
clicks will be heard which indicate the
retractor functions as ALR.
6. Before having a child sit in the child

restraint system, move it back and forth
and right and left to check if it is firmly
secured. Sometimes a child restraint can
be more firmly secured by pushing it down
into the seat cushion and then tightening
the seatbelt.
7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt
to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR
properly functioning).
CONTINUED
Black plate (58,1)
1-32
9. To remove the child restraint system,

press the release button on the seatbelt
buckle and allow the belt to retract
completely. The belt will return to the
ELR mode.
NOTE
When the child restraint system is no
longer in use, remove it and restore the
ELR function of the retractor. That
function is restored by allowing the
seatbelt to retract fully.
8. If the child restraint system requires a
top tether, latch the hook onto the top
tether anchorage and tighten the top
tether. Refer to the Top tether anchorages section for additional instructions.

or around the booster seat and the child
manufacturer.
until you hear a click. Take care not to
twist the seatbelt.
Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the center of childs shoulder and
that the lap belt is positioned as low as
possible on the childs hips.
& Installing a booster seat
4. To remove the booster seat, press the

release button on the seatbelt buckle and
allow the belt to retract.
1. Place the booster seat in the rear
seating position and sit the child on it. The
child should sit well back on the booster
seat.
Black plate (59,1)
WARNING
. Never use a belt that is twisted or
reversed. In an accident, this can
increase the risk or severity of
injury to the child.
. Never place the shoulder belt
under the childs arm or behind
the childs back. If an accident
occurs, this can increase the risk
or severity of injury to the child.
. The seatbelt should fit snugly in
order to provide full restraint.
Loose fitting belts are not as
effective in preventing or reducing injury.
. Place the lap belt as low as
possible on the childs hips.
High-positioned lap belt will increase the risk of sliding under
sliding up over the abdomen, and
both can result in serious internal injury or death.
. Make sure the shoulder belt is
positioned across the center of
childs shoulder. Placing the
shoulder belt over the neck may
result in neck injury during sudden braking or in a collision.
1-33
& Installation of child restraint

systems using ISOFIX anchor bars
Your vehicle is equipped with ISOFIX

anchor bars that allow an approved
ISOFIX child restraint system to be installed on the rear seat without use of a
seatbelt.
The ISOFIX anchor bars allow you to

install a child restraint system only on the
rear seat window-side seating positions.
For each window-side seating position,
two anchor bars are provided.
1)
Cover
CONTINUED
Black plate (60,1)
1-34
You will find the marks on the cover at

the bottom of the rear seat seatbacks.
These marks indicate the positions of the
ISOFIX anchor bars.
Each anchor bar is located where the seat

cushion meets the seatback.
1. Use the marks to locate the two
anchor bars for the position where you
want to install the child restraint system.
2. While following the instructions supplied by the child restraint system manufacturer, connect the connectors of the
child restraint system to the anchor bars.
When the connectors are fastened, make
sure that the adjacent seatbelts are not
caught.
3. Before seating a child in the child

restraint system, try to move it back and
forth and right and left to verify that it is
held securely in position.
If the child restraint system requires a top
Black plate (61,1)
tether, latch the hook onto the top tether

anchorage and tighten the top tether.
Refer to the Top tether anchorages
section for additional instructions.
For further information, refer to the instruction manual supplied by the child
restraint system manufacturer.
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufacturers
instructions supplied with it. After
installing the child restraint system,
check to ensure that it is held
securely in position. If it is not held
tight and secure, the danger of your
child suffering personal injury in the
event of an accident may be increased.
& Top tether anchorages
1-35
! Anchorage location
Your vehicle is provided with two top

tether anchorages so that a child restraint
system having a top tether can be
installed in the rear seat. When installing
a child restraint system using top tether,
proceed as follows, while observing the
instructions by the child restraint system
manufacturer.
Since a top tether can provide additional
stability by offering another connection
between a child restraint system and the
vehicle, we recommend that you use a top
tether whenever one is required or available.
NOTE
Before installing a child restraint system, ask the manufacturer of the system to confirm that it is one approved
for your vehicle.
1)
2)
For left seat

For right seat
There are two anchorages for each seating position on the rear wall of the cargo
area.
CONTINUED
Black plate (62,1)
1-36
! To hook the top tether
turn.
CAUTION
Always remove the head restraint
when mounting a child restraint
system with a top tether. Otherwise,
it may happen that the top tether
cannot be fastened tightly.
We recommend that you contact your

SUBARU dealer if you have any question
regarding the installation of a child restraint system.
2. Remove the cover for the appropriate

upper anchorage.
1. Remove the head restraint at the

seating position where the child restraint
system has been installed with the ISOFIX
anchor bars or seatbelt; lift up the head
restraint while pressing the release button.
Store the head restraint in the cargo area.
Avoid placing the head restraint in the
passenger compartment to prevent it from
being thrown around in the passenger
compartment in a sudden stop or a sharp
3. Attach the child restraint top tether

hook to the appropriate upper anchorage.
4. Tighten the top tether securely.
Black plate (63,1)
*SRS airbag (Supplemental

Restraint System airbag)
*SRS: This stands for supplemental restraint system. This name is used because the airbag system supplements the
vehicles seatbelts.
& Vehicle with SRS airbags and

lap/shoulder restraints for
driver, front passenger, and
window-side rear passengers
Your vehicle is equipped with a supplemental restraint system in addition to a
lap/shoulder belt at each front seating
position and each rear window-side seating positions.
The supplemental restraint system (SRS)
consists of two or six airbags. The configurations are as follows:
Two airbags
Drivers and front passengers frontal
airbags
Six airbags
. Drivers and front passengers frontal
airbags
. Drivers and front passengers side
airbags (if equipped)
. Curtain airbags (for driver, front passenger, and window-side rear passen-
gers) (if equipped)

These SRS airbags are designed only
as a supplement to the primary protection provided by the seatbelt.
The system also controls front seatbelt
pretensioners. For operation instructions
and precautions concerning the seatbelt
pretensioner, refer to the Front seatbelt
pretensioners section in this chapter.
WARNING
. To obtain maximum protection in
driver and all passengers in the
vehicle should always wear seatbelts when the vehicle is moving.
The SRS airbag is designed only
as a supplement to the primary
protection provided by the seatbelt. It does not do away with the
need to fasten seatbelts. In combination with the seatbelts, it
offers the best combined protection in case of a serious accident.
Not wearing a seatbelt increases
the chance of severe injury or
death in a crash even when the
vehicle has the SRS airbag.
For instructions and precautions
concerning the seatbelt system,
1-37
refer to the Seatbelts section in

this chapter.
. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily
close to the SRS airbag. Because
the SRS airbag deploys with
considerable speed faster than
the blink of an eye and force to
protect in high speed collisions,
the force of an airbag can injure
an occupant whose body is too
close to SRS airbag.
It is also important to wear your
seatbelt to help avoid injuries
that can result when the SRS
airbag contacts an occupant not
in proper position such as one
thrown forward during pre-accident braking.
Even when properly positioned,
there remains a possibility that
an occupant may suffer minor
injury such as abrasions and
bruises to the face or arms
because of the SRS airbag deployment force.
. The SRS airbags deploy with
considerable speed and force.
Occupants who are out of proper
position when the SRS airbag
deploys could suffer very serious
injuries. Because the SRS airbag
CONTINUED
Black plate (64,1)
1-38
needs enough space for deployment, the driver should always

sit upright and well back in the
seat as far from the steering
wheel as practical while still
maintaining full vehicle control
back in the seat.
. Do not place any objects over or
near the SRS airbag cover or
between you and the SRS airbag.
If the SRS airbag deploys, those
objects could interfere with its
proper operation and could be
propelled inside the vehicle and
cause injury.
WARNING
seatbelt, whichever is appropriate for the childs age, height and
weight. The SRS airbag deploys
Secure ALL types of child restraint devices (including forward facing child seats) in the
REAR seats at all times.
positions than in the front seating positions.
For instructions and precautions
concerning the child restraint
system, refer to the Child restraint systems section in this
chapter.

THE SRS AIRBAG.
. Never allow a child to stand up,
or to kneel on the front passengers seat, or never hold a child
on your lap or in your arms. The
SRS airbag deploys with considerable force and can injure or
CAUTION
. When the SRS airbag deploys,
some smoke will be released.
This smoke could cause breathing problems for people with a
history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. If you or your
passengers have breathing problems after SRS airbag deploys,
get fresh air promptly.
. A deploying SRS airbag releases
hot gas. Occupants could get
burned if they come into direct
contact with the hot gas.
Black plate (65,1)
1-39
NOTE
When you sell your vehicle, we urge

you to explain to the buyer that it is
equipped with SRS airbags by alerting
him or her to the applicable section in
this Owners Manual.
CONTINUED
Black plate (66,1)
1-40

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
Airbag control module (including impact

sensors)
Frontal airbag module (drivers side)
Frontal airbag module (front passengers
side)
Front sub sensor (left-hand side)
Front sub sensor (right-hand side)
Side airbag module (drivers side if
equipped)
Side airbag module (front passengers
side if equipped)
Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-hand
side if equipped)
Side airbag sensor (center pillar righthand side if equipped)
Airbag wiring
Seatbelt pretensioner (drivers side)
Seatbelt pretensioner (front passengers
side)
Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house
right-hand side if equipped)
left-hand side if equipped)
Curtain airbag module (right-hand side
if equipped)
Curtain airbag module (left-hand side if
equipped)
Satellite safing sensor (under the rear
Black plate (67,1)

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
18)
1-41
Airbag control module (including impact

sensors)
Frontal airbag module (drivers side)
Frontal airbag module (front passengers
side)
Front sub sensor (right-hand side)
Front sub sensor (left-hand side)
Side airbag module (drivers side if
equipped)
Side airbag module (front passengers
side if equipped)
Side airbag sensor (center pillar righthand side if equipped)
Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-hand
side if equipped)
Airbag wiring
Seatbelt pretensioner (drivers side)
Seatbelt pretensioner (front passengers
side)
left-hand side if equipped)
right-hand side if equipped)
Curtain airbag module (left-hand side if
equipped)
Curtain airbag module (right-hand side
if equipped)
Lap belt pretensioner (drivers side
Satellite safing sensor (under the rear
CONTINUED
Black plate (68,1)
1-42
& SRS frontal airbag

The drivers SRS frontal airbag is stowed
in the center portion of the steering wheel.
The passengers SRS frontal airbag is
stowed near the top of the dashboard
under an SRS AIRBAG mark.

In a moderate to severe frontal collision,

the drivers and front passengers SRS
frontal airbags deploy and supplement the
seatbelts by reducing the impact on the
drivers and front passengers head and
chest.
WARNING
A warning label as shown above is
attached to the sun visor.
Extreme
This warning label means
Hazard! Do not use a rearward-facing
child restraint on a seat protected by an
airbag in front of it!.
Never allow a child to stand up, or to

kneel on the front passengers seat.
The SRS airbag deploys with considerable force and can injure or
WARNING
SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD
Black plate (69,1)
1-43
seatbelt to help avoid injuries that

can result when the SRS airbag
contacts an occupant not in proper
position such as one thrown toward
the front of the vehicle during preaccident braking.
WARNING
Never hold a child on your lap or in
your arms. The SRS airbag deploys
with considerable force and can
injure or even kill the child.
WARNING
The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force. Occupants who are out of proper position
when the SRS airbag deploys could
suffer very serious injuries. Because the SRS airbag needs enough
space for deployment, the driver
should always sit upright and well
back in the seat as far from the
steering wheel as practical while
still maintaining full vehicle control
back in the seat.
It is also important to wear your
WARNING
Do not put any objects over the
steering wheel pad and dashboard.
If the SRS frontal airbag deploys,
those objects could interfere with its
proper operation and could be propelled inside the vehicle and cause
injury.
CONTINUED
Black plate (70,1)
1-44
! Operation
WARNING
Do not attach accessories to the
windshield, or fit an extra-wide mirror over the rear view mirror. If the
SRS airbag deploys, those objects
could become projectiles that could
seriously injure vehicle occupants.
A)
B)
1)
2)
Drivers side
Passengers side
SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a collision occurs.
After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start to deflate immediately so that the drivers vision is not
obstructed.
Black plate (71,1)
The SRS airbag can function only when

the ignition switch is in the ON position.
If the front sub sensors located on both the
right and left sides at the front of the
vehicle and the impact sensors in the
airbag control module detect a certain
predetermined amount of force during a
frontal collision, the control module sends
signals to the frontal airbag modules
instructing them to inflate the SRS frontal
airbags. Then both airbag modules produce gas, which instantly inflates drivers
and passengers SRS frontal airbags.
After deployment, the SRS airbags immediately start to deflate so that the
drivers vision is not obstructed. The time
required from detecting impact to the
deflation of the SRS airbag after deployment is shorter than the blink of an eye.
The front passengers SRS frontal airbag
deploys together with drivers SRS frontal
airbag even when no one occupies the
front passengers seat.
Although it is highly unlikely that the SRS
airbag would activate in a non-accident
situation, should it occur, the SRS airbag
will deflate quickly, not obscuring vision
and will not interfere with the drivers
ability to maintain control of the vehicle.
When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden,
fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and

some smoke will be released. These
occurrences are normal result of the
deployment. This smoke does not indicate
a fire in the vehicle.
CAUTION
1-45
level differs from one type of collision to

another, and it may have no bearing on
the visible damage done to the vehicle
itself.
! When will the SRS frontal airbag
most likely deploy?
Do not touch the SRS airbag system

components around the steering
wheel and dashboard with bare
hands right after deployment. Doing
so can cause burns because the
components can be very hot as a
result of deployment.
The SRS frontal airbag is designed to
deploy in the event of an accident involving a moderate to severe frontal collision.
It is basically not designed to deploy in
lesser frontal impacts because the necessary protection can be achieved by the
seatbelt alone. Also, it is basically not
designed to deploy in side or rear impacts
or in roll-over accidents because deployment of the SRS frontal airbag would not
help the occupant in those situations. The
SRS airbag is designed to function on a
one-time-only basis.
A head-on collision against a thick concrete wall at a vehicle speed of 20 to 30

km/h (12 to 19 mph) or higher activates
the SRS frontal airbag. The SRS frontal
airbag will also be activated when the
vehicle is exposed to a frontal impact
similar in fashion and magnitude to the
collision described above.
SRS airbag deployment depends on the

level of force experienced in the passenger compartment during a collision. That
CONTINUED
Black plate (72,1)
1-46
! At what other times might the SRS

frontal airbag deploy?
plunges into a deep ditch, is severely

impacted or knocked hard against an
obstacle on the road such as a curb).
The SRS frontal airbag may be activated

when the vehicle sustains a hard impact in
the undercarriage area from the road
surface (such as when the vehicle
Black plate (73,1)
! When is the SRS frontal airbag unlikely to deploy?
1)
2)
3)
4)
1-47
The vehicle strikes an object, such as a

telephone pole or sign pole.
The vehicle slides under the load bed of
a truck.
The vehicle sustains an oblique offset
frontal impact.
The vehicle sustains an offset side
collision.
There are many types of collisions which

might not necessarily require SRS frontal
airbag deployment. In the event of accidents like those illustrated, the SRS frontal
airbag may not deploy depending on the
level of accident forces involved.
CONTINUED
Black plate (74,1)
1-48
! When will the SRS frontal airbag not

deploy?
low-speed frontal collision.
1)
2)
First impact
Second impact
In an accident where the vehicle is

impacted more than once, the SRS frontal
airbag deploys only once on the first
impact.
Example: In the case of a double collision,
first with another vehicle, then against a
concrete wall in immediate succession,
once the SRS frontal airbag is activated
on the first impact, it will not be activated
on the second.
The SRS frontal airbag is basically not
designed to deploy if the vehicle is struck
from the side or from behind, or if it rolls
onto its side or roof, or if it is involved in a
& SRS side airbag and SRS

curtain airbag (if equipped)
The SRS side airbag is stored in the door
side of each front seat seatback, which
bears an SRS AIRBAG label.
In a moderate to severe side impact
collision, the SRS side airbag on the
impacted side of the vehicle deploys
between the occupant and the door panel
and supplements the seatbelt by reducing
the impact on the occupants chest.
The curtain airbag on each side of the
cabin is stored in the roof side (between
the front pillar and a point over the rear
seat). An SRS AIRBAG mark is located
at the top of each center pillar.
In a moderate to severe side impact
collision, the SRS curtain airbag on the
impacted side of the vehicle deploys
between the occupant and the side
window and supplements the seatbelt by
reducing the impact on the occupants
head.
WARNING
The SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag are designed as only
a supplement to the primary protection provided by the seatbelt. They
do not do away with the need to
fasten seatbelts. It is also important
Black plate (75,1)
to wear your seatbelt to help avoid

injuries that can result when an
occupant is not seated in a proper
upright position.
side airbag.
. Since your vehicle is equipped
with SRS curtain airbags, do not
sit or lean unnecessarily close to
the front or rear door on either
side. The curtain airbag on each
side of the cabin is stored in the
roof side (between the front pillar
and a point over the rear seat),
and it provides protection by
deploying rapidly (faster than
the blink of an eye) in the event
of a side impact. However, the
force of its deployment may
cause injuries if your head is
too close to it.
1-49
WARNING
Do not rest your arm on either front
door or its internal trim. It could be
injured in the event of SRS side
airbag deployment.
WARNING
. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily
close to either front door. The
SRS side airbag is stored in both
front seat seatbacks next to the
door, and it provides protection
by deploying rapidly (faster than
the blink of an eye) in the event of
a side impact collision. However,
the force of SRS side airbag
deployment may cause injuries
if your head or other parts of the
body are too close to the SRS
CONTINUED
Black plate (76,1)
1-50
deployment could injure the child

seriously because his/her head is
close to the SRS curtain airbag.
WARNING
. Never allow a child to kneel on
the front passengers seat facing
the side window or to wrap his/
her arms around the front seatback. In the event of an accident,
the force of the SRS side airbag
deployment could injure the child
seriously because his/her head
or arms or other parts of the
body are too close to the SRS
side airbag.
. Never allow a child to kneel on
the front and rear passengers
seat facing the side window. In
force of the SRS curtain airbag
WARNING
. Do not attach accessories to the
door trim or near either SRS side
airbags and do not place objects
near the SRS side airbags. In the
event of the SRS side airbag
deployment, they could be propelled dangerously toward the
vehicles occupants and cause
injuries.
. Do not attach a hands-free microphone or any other accessory to
a front pillar, a center pillar, a rear
pillar, the windshield, a side window, an assist grip, or any other

cabin surface that would be near
a deploying SRS curtain airbag.
A hands-free microphone or
other accessory in such a location could be propelled through
the cabin with great force by the
curtain airbag, or it could prevent
correct deployment of the curtain
airbag. In either case, the result
could be serious injuries.
. Never hang or place coat hangers
or other hard or pointed objects
near the side windows. If such
items are present when the SRS
curtain airbags deploy, they
could be thrown through the
passenger compartment and
cause serious injuries. They
could also prevent proper operation of the SRS curtain airbags.
Black plate (77,1)
! Operation
WARNING
Do not put any kind of cover or
clothes or other objects over either
front seatback and do not attach
labels or stickers to the front seat
surface on or near the SRS side
airbag. They could prevent proper
deployment of the SRS side airbag,
reducing protection available to the
front seats occupant.
1-51
The drivers and front passengers SRS

side airbags and SRS curtain airbags
deploy independently of each other since
each has its own impact sensor. Therefore, they may not both deploy in the same
accident. Also, the SRS side airbag and
SRS curtain airbag deploy independently
of the drivers and front passengers SRS
frontal airbags in the steering wheel and
instrument panel.
right center pillars and rear wheel houses.

Another impact sensor, which also senses
impact force, is located under the rear
center seat.
If one of the center pillar impact sensors
and the impact sensor that is located
under the rear center seat together sense
an impact force above a predetermined
level in a side collision, the control module
causes both the SRS side airbag and
curtain airbag on the impacted side to
inflate regardless of whether the rear
wheel house impact sensor on the same
side senses an impact.
If one of the rear wheel house impact
sensors and the impact sensor that is
located under the rear center seat together sense an impact force above a
predetermined level in a side collision, the
control module causes only the SRS
curtain airbag on the impacted side to
inflate.
After the deployment, the SRS side airbag
immediately starts to deflate. The time
required from detection of an impact to
deflation of an SRS side airbag after
deployment is shorter than the blink of
an eye. The SRS curtain airbag remains
inflated for a while following deployment
then slowly deflates.
An impact sensor, which senses impact

force, is located in each of the left and
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain

airbag deploy even when no one occupies
Vehicle with SRS side airbags and SRS

curtain airbags

airbag can function only when the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
CONTINUED
Black plate (78,1)
1-52
the seat on the side on which an impact is

applied.
When the SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag deploy, a sudden, fairly loud
inflation noise will be heard and some
smoke will be released. These occurrences are a normal result of the deployment. This smoke does not indicate a fire
in the vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not touch the SRS side airbag
system components around the
front seat seatback with bare hands
right after deployment. Doing so can
cause burns because the components can be very hot as a result of
deployment.
After deployment, do not touch any
part of the SRS curtain airbag
system (from the front pillar to the
part of the roof side over the rear
seat). Doing so can cause burns
because the components can be
very hot as a result of deployment.
impact. Also, it is basically not designed to

deploy in frontal or rear impacts because
deployment would not help the occupant
in those situations.
Each SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag are designed to function on a onetime-only basis.
! When will the SRS side airbag and

SRS curtain airbag most likely deploy?

deployment depend on the level of force
experienced in the passenger compartment during a side impact collision. That
level differs from one type of collision to
another, and it may have no bearing on
the visible damage done to the vehicle
itself.
A severe side impact near the front seat
activates the SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag.

airbag are designed to deploy in the event
of an accident involving a moderate to
severe side impact collision. It is basically
not designed to deploy in a lesser side
Black plate (79,1)
! When are the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag unlikely to deploy?
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
1-53
The vehicle is involved in an oblique

side-on impact.
The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
the passenger compartment.
The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
The vehicle rolls onto its side or roof.
There are many types of collisions which

might not necessarily require SRS side
airbag and SRS curtain airbag deployment. In the event of accidents like those
illustrated, the SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag may not deploy depending
on the level of accident forces involved.
CONTINUED
Black plate (80,1)
1-54
! When will the SRS side airbag and

SRS curtain airbag not deploy?

airbag are basically not designed to
deploy if the vehicle is involved in a frontal
collision or is struck from behind. Examples of such accidents are illustrated.
1)
2)
A)
B)
1)
2)
The vehicle is involved in frontal collision

with another vehicle (moving or stationary).
The vehicle is struck from behind.
First impact
Second impact
SRS curtain airbag
SRS side airbag
In an accident where the vehicle is struck

from the side more than once, the SRS
side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy
only once on the first impact.
Example: In the case of a double side
impact collision, first with one vehicle and
immediately followed by another from the
same direction, once the SRS side airbag
and SRS curtain airbag are activated on
the first impact, they will not be activated
on the second.
& SRS airbag system monitor
A diagnostic system continually monitors

the readiness of the SRS airbag system
(including front seatbelt pretensioners)
while the vehicle is being driven. The
SRS airbag system warning light AIRBAG will show normal system operation
by illuminating for approximately 6 seconds when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position.
The following components are monitored
by the indicator.
. Front sub sensor (right-hand side)
. Front sub sensor (left-hand side)
. Airbag control module (including impact sensors)
Black plate (81,1)
. Frontal airbag module (drivers side)

. Frontal airbag module (front passengers side)
. Side airbag sensor (center pillar righthand side if equipped)
. Side airbag sensor (center pillar lefthand side if equipped)
. Side airbag module (drivers side if
equipped)
. Side airbag module (front passengers
side if equipped)
house right-hand side if equipped)
house left-hand side if equipped)
. Curtain airbag module (right-hand side
if equipped)
. Curtain airbag module (left-hand side
if equipped)
. Satellite safing sensor (under the rear
. Seatbelt pretensioner (drivers side)
. Lap belt pretensioner (drivers side
. Seatbelt pretensioner (front passengers side)
. All related wiring
WARNING
have the system checked immediately by your nearest SUBARU dealer. Unless checked and properly
injury.
warning light
while driving
1-55
& SRS airbag system servicing

WARNING
. When discarding an airbag module or scrapping the entire vehicle damaged by a collision, we
recommend that you consult
your SUBARU dealer.
. The SRS airbag has no userserviceable parts. Do not use
electrical test equipment on any
circuit related to the SRS airbag
system. For required servicing of
the SRS airbag, we recommend
that you consult your nearest
SUBARU dealer. Tampering with
or disconnecting the systems
wiring could result in accidental
inflation of the SRS airbag or
could make the system inoperative, which may result in serious
injury.
CAUTION
If you need service or repair in areas
listed as follows, we recommend
that you have the work performed
by an authorized SUBARU dealer.
The SRS airbag control module,
impact sensors and airbag modules
CONTINUED
Black plate (82,1)
1-56
are stored in the following areas.

. Under the center console
. On both the right and left sides at
the front of the vehicle
. Steering wheel and column and
nearby areas
. Top of the dashboard on front
passengers side and nearby
areas
. Each front seat and nearby area
(only for vehicles with SRS side
airbags)
. Inside each center pillar
. In each roof side (from the front
pillar to a point over the rear seat)
(only for vehicles with SRS curtain airbags)
. Between the rear seat cushion
and rear wheel house on each
side
. Under the rear center seat (for
vehicles with SRS side airbags
and SRS curtain airbags)
In the event that the SRS airbag system
is deployed, we recommend that you
have the system replaced with genuine
SUBARU parts at an authorized
SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
In the following cases, we recommend
that you contact your SUBARU dealer
as soon as possible.
. The front part of the vehicle was
involved in an accident in which the
SRS frontal airbags did not deploy.
. The pad of the steering wheel, the
cover over the front passengers frontal airbag, or either roof side (from the
front pillar to a point over the rear seat)
is scratched, cracked, or otherwise
damaged.
In addition, if your vehicle is equipped
with SRS side airbags and SRS curtain
airbags, we recommend that you contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as
possible in the following cases.
. Center pillar, rear wheel house or
rear sub frame, or an area near these
parts, was involved in an accident in
which the SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag did not deploy.
. The fabric or leather of either front
seatback is cut, frayed, or otherwise
damaged.
. The rear part of the vehicle was
involved in an accident.
& Precautions against vehicle

modification
WARNING
To avoid accidental activation of the
system or rendering the system
inoperative, which may result in
serious injury, no modifications
should be made to any components
or wiring of the SRS airbag system.
This includes following modifications:
. Installation of custom steering
wheels
. Attachment of additional trim
materials to the dashboard
. Installation of custom seats (only
for vehicles with SRS side airbags)
. Replacement of seat fabric or
leather (only for vehicles with
SRS side airbags)
. Installation of additional fabric or
leather on the front seat (only for
vehicles with SRS side airbags)
. Attachment of a hands-free microphone or any other accessory
to a front pillar, a center pillar, a
rear pillar, the windshield, a side
Black plate (83,1)
window, an assist grip, or any

other cabin surface that would be
near a deploying SRS curtain
airbag.
. Installation of additional electrical/electronic equipment such as
a mobile two-way radio on or
near the SRS airbag system
components and/or wiring is not
advisable. This could interfere
with proper operation of the
SRS airbag system.
CAUTION
Do not perform any of the following
modifications. Such modifications
can interfere with proper operation
of the SRS airbag system.
(bush bar, bullbar, winches, snow
plow, skid/sump plate, etc.) to the
front end other than genuine
SUBARU accessory parts or
parts that match the quality of
parts.
. Modification of the suspension
system or front end structure.
. Installation of a tire of different
size and construction from the
1-57
1
tires specified on the vehicle

placard attached to the drivers
door pillar or specified for individual vehicle models in this Owners Manual.
(side steps or side sill protectors,
etc.) to the side body other than
parts specially designed for
SRS side airbags, or parts that
match the quality of genuine
SUBARU accessory parts specially designed for SRS side airbags (only for vehicles with side
airbags).
We recommend that you always consult
your SUBARU dealer if you want to install
any accessory parts on your vehicle.
Black plate (3,1)
Keys and doors

Keys .....................................................................
2-2
Replacing battery of access key.........................
2-23
Key number plate ................................................
2-2
Immobilizer ..........................................................
2-3
Remote keyless entry system

(if equipped) ....................................................
2-24
Security ID plate..................................................
Immobilizer indicator light ...................................
Key replacement .................................................
2-3
2-4
2-4
Door locks ...........................................................
2-4
Locking and unlocking doors .............................

Unlocking rear gate ...........................................
Interior light interlock function ...........................
Replacing battery...............................................
2-25
2-26
2-26
2-26
Locking and unlocking from the outside with

key ...................................................................
Locking from the outside without key ..................
Locking and unlocking from the inside ................
Battery drainage prevention function ...................
Double locking system (if equipped) ...............
2-29
2-4
2-5
2-5
2-6
Power door locking switch.................................
2-6
To set double locking system.............................

To cancel double locking system .......................
In an emergency ................................................
If a battery goes dead ........................................
To reset double locking system..........................
2-29
2-30
2-30
2-30
2-30
Key lock-in prevention function (except vehicles

with double locking system) ..............................
2-7
Keyless access with push-button start

system (if equipped) ........................................
2-7
Function disabling unlocking with the

power door locking switch (Australia
models without double locking system) .......
Child safety locks ..............................................
Windows.............................................................
2-31
2-31
2-32
Locking and unlocking with keyless access

entry function...................................................
Locking and unlocking doors by remote keyless
entry system (locking and unlocking by
buttons) ...........................................................
Unlocking rear gate by remote keyless entry
system (unlocking by buttons)..........................
Warning chimes and warning light ......................
Disabling keyless access function ......................
When access key does not operate properly .......
2-10
2-14
2-16
2-16
2-22
2-22
Power windows .................................................
2-32
Rear gate ............................................................

Sunroof (if equipped) ........................................
2-34
2-35
To open the sunroof ..........................................

To close the sunroof ..........................................
Anti-entrapment function....................................
Sun shade .........................................................
2-36
2-36
2-36
2-36
Black plate (86,1)
2-2
Keys and doors
Keys
All keys provided for your vehicle fit all

locks on your vehicle.
. Ignition switch
. Drivers door
CAUTION
Do not attach a large key holder or
key case to either key. If it bangs
against your knees while you are
driving, it could turn the ignition
switch from the ON position to the
Acc or OFF position, thereby
stopping the engine.
Type A
The key number is stamped on the key

number plate attached to the key set.
Write down the key number and keep it in
another safe place, not in the vehicle. This
number is needed to make a replacement
key if you lose your key or lock it inside the
vehicle.
For information on making replacement
keys for vehicles with the immobilizer
system, refer to the Immobilizer section
in this chapter.
& Key number plate
Type B
Your vehicle has two or three keys, a key

number plate and a security ID plate.
1)
2)
Key number plate

Security ID plate
Black plate (87,1)
Keys and doors
Immobilizer
The immobilizer system is designed to
prevent an unauthorized person from
starting the engine. Only keys registered
with your vehicles immobilizer system can
be used to operate your vehicle. Even if
an unregistered key fits into the ignition
switch and can be turned to the START
position, the engine will automatically stop
after several seconds.
Each immobilizer key contains a transponder in which the keys ID code is
stored. When a key is inserted into the
ignition switch and turned to the ON
position, the transponder transmits the
keys ID code to the immobilizer systems
receiver. If the transmitted ID code
matches the ID code registered in the
immobilizer system, the system allows the
engine to be started. Since the ID code is
transmitted and acted upon almost instantly, the immobilizer system does not
impede normal starting of the engine.
If the engine fails to start, pull out the key
once before trying again. Refer to the
Ignition switch (vehicle without pushbutton start system) section in chapter 3.
munication Terminal Equipment Directive

1999/5/EC. A copy of the original Declaration of Conformity and the CE marking are
found in the chapter 13.
2-3
& Security ID plate
NOTE
To protect your vehicle from theft,
please pay close attention to the following security precautions:
. Never leave your vehicle unattended
with its keys inside.
. Before leaving your vehicle, close all
windows and lock the doors and rear
gate.
. Do not leave spare keys or any
record of your key number in the
vehicle.
CAUTION
. Do not place the key under direct
sunlight or anywhere it may
become hot.
. Do not get the key wet. If the key
gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth
immediately.
1)
2)
Key number plate

Security ID plate
The security ID is stamped on the security

ID plate attached to the key set. Write
down the security ID and keep it in
another safe place, not in the vehicle.
This number is needed to make a replacement key if you lose your key or lock it
inside the vehicle.
This number is also needed for replacement or repair of the engine control
module and immobilizer control module.
For Europe:
This device complies with the essential
requirements of the Radio and Telecom CONTINUED
Black plate (88,1)
2-4
Keys and doors
& Immobilizer indicator

light
The immobilizer indicator light deters

potential thieves by indicating that the
vehicle is equipped with an immobilizer
system. It begins flashing approximately
60 seconds after the ignition switch is
turned from the ON position to the Acc
or LOCK position or immediately after
the key is pulled out.
If the immobilizer indicator light does not
flash, the immobilizer system may be
faulty. If this occurs, we recommend that
you contact your SUBARU dealer as soon
as possible.
In case an unauthorized key is used (e.g.
an imitation key), the immobilizer indicator
light illuminates.
NOTE
Even if the immobilizer indicator light
flashes irregularly or its fuse blows (the
light does not flash if its fuse is blown),
the immobilizer system will function
normally.
& Key replacement
Door locks
Your key number plate and security ID

plate will be required if you ever need a
replacement key made. Any new key must
be registered for use with your vehicles
immobilizer system before it can be used.
Up to four keys can be registered for use
with one vehicle.
For security, all the keys registered with
your vehicles immobilizer system will
have their ID codes erased and reregistered when a new key is made.
Therefore, all of your vehicles keys must
be presented when a new key is registered. Any key that is not re-registered
when a new key is made cannot be used
after the other keys are re-registered. For
information on replacement keys and on
the registration of keys with your immobilizer system, we recommend that you
contact your SUBARU dealer.
& Locking and unlocking from

the outside with key
To lock the door from the outside with the

key, turn the key toward the rear. To
unlock the door, turn the key toward the
front.
Pull the outside door handle to open an
unlocked door.
Black plate (89,1)
Keys and doors
& Locking from the outside

without key
! Vehicle without double locking
system
2-5
NOTE
NOTE
Make sure that you do not leave the key

inside the vehicle when locking the
doors from the outside without the key.
With a vehicle that has a double locking

system, it is not possible to place the
lock lever on the drivers door in the
locking position while the drivers door
is open. The door lock levers function
only when all the doors are securely
closed and the double locking system
is not set.
! Vehicle with double locking system
& Locking and unlocking from

the inside
1)
2)
Rotate the lock lever rearward.

Close the door while holding the handle
pulled.
To lock the front door from the outside

without the key, rotate the lock lever
rearward and hold the outside door handle
pulled while closing the door.
To lock the rear door from the outside
rearward and close the door.
Always make sure that all doors and the
rear gate are locked before leaving your
vehicle.
1)
2)
Rotate the lock lever rearward.

Close the door.
To lock the front door from the outside

To lock the rear door from the outside
rear gate are locked before leaving your
vehicle.
1)
2)
Lock
Unlock
To lock the door from the inside, rotate the

lock lever rearward. To unlock the door
from the inside, rotate the lock lever
forward.
CONTINUED
Black plate (90,1)
2-6
Keys and doors
The red mark on the lock lever appears

when the door is unlocked.
Pull the inside door handle to open an
unlocked door.
rear gate are closed before starting to
drive.
NOTE
NOTE
. The default setting for this function
is operational.
. When leaving the vehicle, please
make sure that all doors and the rear
gate are completely closed.
. The battery drainage prevention
function does not operate while the
key is in the ignition switch.
Power door locking switch
If your vehicle is equipped with a

double locking system and it is activated, the door will not be unlocked
even when you move the door lock
lever forward.
& Battery drainage prevention

function
If a door or the rear gate is not completely
closed, the dome light, map light, ignition
switch light and door open warning light on
the combination meter will remain illuminated as a result. However these lights
are automatically turned off by the battery
drainage prevention function after 30
minutes of illumination to prevent the
battery from discharging. The operational/non-operational setting of this function can be changed by a SUBARU
dealer. We recommend that you contact
the nearest SUBARU dealer if you would
like to change the setting.
1)
2)
Lock
Unlock
All doors and the rear gate can be locked

and unlocked by the power door locking
switch located at the drivers side door.
To lock the doors including the rear gate,
push the front side of the switch.
To unlock the doors including the rear
gate, push the rear side of the switch.
NOTE
. With a vehicle that has a double
locking system, turning the power door
locking switch to the unlocking position has no effect when the double
locking system is activated.
Black plate (91,1)
Keys and doors
. If your vehicle is an Australia model,

after locking all doors and the rear gate
using the remote transmitter, turning
the power door locking switch to the
unlock position has no effect.
& Key lock-in prevention function (except vehicles with

double locking system)
This function prevents the doors from
being locked with the key still in the
ignition switch.
! Behavior with key lock-in prevention function operational
With the drivers door open, the doors are
automatically kept unlocked even if the
door locking switch is pushed to the front
(LOCK) position.
! Behavior with key lock-in prevention function non-operational
. If the lock lever is turned to the rear
(LOCK) position with the drivers door
open and the drivers door is then closed,
the drivers door is locked.
. If the spare key is used to lock the
drivers door from the outside of the
vehicle, the door is locked.
This functions operational/non-operational setting can be changed.
Vehicle with genuine SUBARU navigation system:

The operational/non-operational setting
can be changed using the monitor. For
details, please refer to the Owners Manual supplement for the navigation system.
The setting can also be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. We recommend that you
contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for
details.
Vehicle without genuine SUBARU navigation system:
The setting can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. We recommend that
you contact a SUBARU dealer for details.
2-7
Keyless access with pushbutton start system (if

equipped)
NOTE
When leaving the vehicle, make sure
that you are holding the key before
locking the doors.
1)
2)
3)
4)
Access key (main)

Access key (sub)
Key number plate
Security ID plate
The keyless access with push-button start

system allows locking and unlocking of all
doors and the rear gate and starting and
stopping the engine by carrying the
access key. Locking and unlocking by
the remote keyless entry system can also
be controlled with the buttons on the
access key. Refer to the Starting and
Stopping engine (vehicle with push-button
start system) section in chapter 7 for
CONTINUED
Black plate (92,1)
2-8
Keys and doors
details of the engine starting procedure.

For Europe:
. This device complies with the essential
requirements of the Radio and Telecommunication Terminal Equipment Directive
found in chapter 13.
. Hereby, DENSO CORPORATION declares that this 14ACA/13BZZ is in compliance with the essential requirements
and other relevant provisions of Directive
1999/5/EC.
WARNING
If you wear an implanted pacemaker
or an implanted defibrillator, stay at
least 22 cm (8.7 in) away from the
transmitting antennas installed on
the vehicle.
The radio waves from the transmitting antennas on the vehicle could
adversely affect the operation of
implanted pacemakers and implanted defibrillators.
If you wear electric medical equipment other than an implanted pacemaker or an implanted defibrillator,
before using the keyless access
function, refer to Radio waves used
for the keyless access with pushbutton start system mentioned later, and contact the electric medical
equipment manufacturer for more
information. The radio waves from
the transmitting antennas on the
vehicle could adversely affect the
operation of the electric medical
equipment.
. The operational/non-operational
setting for the keyless access
function can be changed. For
the setting procedure, refer to
the Disabling keyless access
function section in this chapter.
The setting can also be changed
by a SUBARU dealer. For more
details, we recommend that you
contact a SUBARU dealer.
Radio waves used for the keyless
access with push-button start system
. The keyless access with pushbutton start system use radio
waves of the following frequency* in addition to the radio
waves used for the remote keyless entry system functions. The
radio waves are periodically output from the antennas installed
on the vehicle as shown in the
following illustrations.
* Radio frequency: 134 kHz
1)
Antenna
Black plate (93,1)
Keys and doors
CAUTION
. The keyless access with pushbutton start system uses weak
radio waves. The status of the
access key and the environmental conditions may interfere with
the communication between the
access key and the vehicle under
the following conditions, and it
may not be possible to lock or
unlock the doors or start the
engine.
. When operating near a facility
where strong radio waves are
transmitted, such as a broadcast station and power transmission lines
. When products that transmit
radio waves are used, such as
an access key or a remote
transmitter key of another vehicle
. When carrying more than one
access key
. When the access key is placed
near wireless communication
equipment such as a cell
phone
. When the access key is placed
near a metallic object
. When metallic accessories are

attached to the access key
. When carrying the access key
with electronic appliances
such as a laptop computer
. When the battery of the access key is discharged
. Never leave or store the access
key inside the vehicle (e.g., on
the instrumental panel, inside the
glove box, on the seat, in the
corner of the cargo area or inside
the door trim) or within 2 m (6.6
ft) around the vehicle (e.g., in the
garage).
The access key may be locked
inside the vehicle, or the battery
may discharge rapidly. Note that
the power may not turn on in some
cases depending on the location of
the access key.
. When the vehicle is not going to
be used for an extended period of
time, when the keyless access
functions are not going to be
used or when the access key
needs to be stored inside or
around the vehicle for some uncontrollable reason, the keyless
access functions can be disabled. For the setting procedure,
2-9
refer to the Disabling keyless

access function section in this
chapter. The setting can also be
changed by a SUBARU dealer.
For more details, we recommend
that you contact a SUBARU dealer.
. The access key contains electronic components. Observe the
following points to prevent malfunctions.
. Although you can replace the
battery of the access key
yourself, it is recommended
that the battery be replaced by
a SUBARU dealer to avoid the
risk of damage at the time of
replacement.
. Do not get the access key wet.
If the access key gets wet,
wipe it immediately and let it
dry completely.
. Do not apply strong impacts
to the access key.
. Keep the access key away
from magnetic sources.
. Never leave the access key in
direct sunlight or anywhere
that may become hot, such
as on the dashboard. It may
CONTINUED
Black plate (94,1)
2-10
Keys and doors
damage the battery or cause

circuit malfunctions.
. Do not wash the access key in
an ultrasonic washer.
. Do not leave the access key in
humid or dusty locations.
Doing so may cause malfunctions.
. Do not leave the access key
near personal computers or
home electric appliances.
Doing so may cause the access key to malfunction, resulting in battery discharge.
. The access key is always communicating with the vehicle;
thus, it is continuously using
the battery. Although the life of
the battery varies depending on
the operating conditions, it is
approximately 1 to 2 years. If
the battery becomes fully discharged, replace it with a new
one.
. If the access key is dropped, the
integrated mechanical key inside
may become loose. Be careful
not to lose the mechanical key.
NOTE
. If an access key is lost, it is
recommended that the access key be
reregistered. For reregistration of an
access key, we recommend that you
. For a spare access key, we recommend that you contact a SUBARU
dealer.
. Up to 7 access keys can be registered for one vehicle.
. Carefully store the key number plate
and security ID plate supplied with the
access key. They are necessary for
vehicle repair and additional registration of access keys.
. Do not leave the access key in the
storage spaces inside the vehicle, such
as the door pocket, dashboard and
corner of the cargo area. Vibrations
may damage the key or turn on the
switch, possibly resulting in a lockout.
& Locking and unlocking with

keyless access entry function
! Operating ranges of doors and rear
gate locking/unlocking functions
Black plate (95,1)
Keys and doors

1)
2)
Antenna
Operating range
The operating ranges of the door and rear

gate locking/unlocking functions are approximately 40 to 80 cm (16 to 32 in) from
the respective door handles and the rear
gate ornament.
1)
LED indicator
When the access key is within either of the

operating ranges of the front doors, the
LED indicator on the access key flashes.
When the keyless access functions are
disabled, the LED indicator does not flash
unless a button on the access key is
pressed.
NOTE
. After the push-button ignition switch
is turned off, perform the operation of
locking the doors and rear gate. It is not

possible to lock the doors and rear
gate using the door lock/unlock button,
rear lock button or access key button
when the push-button ignition switch is
on the Acc or ON position.
. Locking and unlocking can be operated only by the door lock/unlock
button in the operating range in which
the access key is detected.
. Locking and unlocking by the door
lock/unlock button cannot be operated
for a limited time period (approximately
less than 1 second) after locking or
unlocking to prevent malfunctions.
. When the operation was performed
too quickly, locking and unlocking may
not have been completed. After locking
the doors, it is recommended to pull
the door handles to confirm that the
doors have been locked.
. If the access key is placed too close
to the vehicle body, the keyless access
functions may not operate properly. If
they do not operate properly, restart
the operation from further away.
. If the access key is placed near the
ground or in an elevated location from
the ground, even if it is in the indicated
operating range, the keyless access
functions may not operate properly.
. When the access key is within the
operating range, it is possible for any-
2-11
one, even someone who is not carrying

the access key, to operate the keyless
access function. Note that locking and
unlocking can be operated only by the
door lock/unlock button, rear gate
opener button or rear lock button in
the operating range in which the access key is detected.
. The keyless access functions may
not operate properly depending on the
status of the access key and the radio
wave conditions around the vehicle. In
such a case, perform the procedure
described in When access key does
not operate properly.
. It is not possible to lock the doors
and rear gate when the access key is
inside the vehicle. However, depending
on the status of the access key and the
environmental conditions, the access
key may be locked inside the vehicle.
Before locking, make sure that you
have the access key.
. When the battery of the access key
is discharged, or when operating it in a
location with strong radio waves or
noise (e.g., near a radio tower, power
plant, broadcast station or an area
where wireless equipment is used), or
while talking on a cell phone, the
operating ranges may be reduced, or
the keyless access functions may not
operate.
CONTINUED
Black plate (96,1)
2-12
Keys and doors
! Locking
In such a case, perform the procedure

not operate properly.
. It is not possible to lock the doors
when one of the doors is open. Close
all of the doors including the rear gate
and lock the doors.
! How to use keyless access functions
! Unlocking
1)
Rear gate opener button
For the rear gate, carry the access key,

and push the rear gate opener button
located next to the license plate light. The
rear gate and all doors will be unlocked,
and the rear gate will be opened. Also, the
hazard warning flashers will flash twice.
1)
1)
Door lock/unlock button
Carry the access key, close all doors

including the rear gate and press the door
lock/unlock button on the door handle. All
doors including the rear gate will be
locked. Also, the hazard warning flashers
will flash once.
Door lock/unlock button
Carry the access key, and press the door

lock/unlock button on the door handle. All
doors including the rear gate will be
unlocked. Also, the hazard warning
flashers will flash twice.
Black plate (97,1)
Keys and doors
mately 3 seconds.
1)
Rear lock button
For the rear gate, carry the access key,

close all doors including the rear gate and
press the rear lock button located next to
the license plate light. The rear gate and
all doors will be locked. Also, the hazard
warning flashers will flash once.
NOTE
. If any of the doors or the rear gate is
opened, the doors or the rear gate
cannot be locked.
. When locking, be sure to carry the
access key to prevent locking the
access key in the vehicle.
. After performing the lock operation
using the rear lock button, it is not
possible to unlock the rear gate using
the rear gate opener button for approxi-
! Interior light interlock function

When the interior light switch is in the door
interlock position, as you enter the operating range near the drivers seat or the
passengers seat while carrying the access key, the interior light will illuminate for
a limited time period and then turn off.
When the push-button ignition switch is
switched from ON to OFF, or unlocking
is operated by the keyless access function
or the remote keyless entry system, or the
doors are opened/closed, the interior light
will illuminate for a limited time period and
turn off. The interior light will turn off when
any of the following operations is performed.
. When locking is operated by pressing
one of the door lock/unlock buttons
. When the doors are locked by pressing
the button on the access key
. When the push-button ignition switch is
switched to Acc.
When the vehicle is equipped with the
genuine SUBARU navigation system,
enabling/disabling of the interlock and
the time that the light stays illuminated
can be set on the monitor screen. For
details, please refer to the Owners Manual supplement for the navigation system.
2-13
When the vehicle is not equipped with the

genuine SUBARU navigation system, the
setting can be changed at a SUBARU
dealer. For more details, we recommend
! Door unlock selection function (except vehicles with double locking
system)
The door unlock selection function makes
it possible to unlock the drivers door
without unlocking any other doors.
! Unlocking doors with the unlock
function
for this function can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer.
Operational: Only the door for which the
door lock/unlock button is pressed will be
unlocked.
Non-operational: All doors and the rear
gate are unlocked.
The factory setting (default setting) is set
as non-operational.
For further details, we recommend that
you consult a SUBARU dealer.
! Power saving function
The keyless access function will be
disabled in the following cases to protect
the access key battery and the vehicle
battery.
CONTINUED
Black plate (98,1)
2-14
Keys and doors
. When the keyless access function and

the remote keyless entry system have not
been used for 2 weeks or longer while all
doors are locked
. When the access key has been left in
the operating range for 10 minutes or
longer while all doors are locked
! Recovery from power saving mode
When one of the following is operated, the
keyless access function will be recovered.
. Unlock by pressing any of the door
lock/unlock buttons on the doors or the
rear gate opener button on the rear gate
. Lock or unlock by the remote keyless
entry system
. Lock or unlock by the mechanical key
! Automatic locking (except vehicles

with double locking system)
If any of the doors or the rear gate was not
opened within 30 seconds after unlocking,
they will be automatically locked again.
enabling/disabling of the automatic locking function and the time until automatic
locking takes place can be set on the
monitor screen. For details, please refer to
the Owners Manual supplement for the
navigation system. When the vehicle is
not equipped with the genuine SUBARU
navigation system, the setting can be
changed at SUBARU dealers. For more
details, we recommend that you contact a
SUBARU dealer.
& Locking and unlocking doors

by remote keyless entry system (locking and unlocking
by buttons)
All doors including the rear gate can be
locked/unlocked at a distance from the
vehicle by pressing the buttons on the
access key.
! Unlocking
When the button on the access key is

pressed near the vehicle, all doors including the rear gate will be unlocked. Also,
the hazard warning flashers will flash
twice.
Black plate (99,1)
Keys and doors
! Locking
vehicle is not equipped with the genuine

SUBARU navigation system, the setting
can be changed at SUBARU dealers. For
more details, we recommend that you
NOTE
When the button on the access key is

pressed near the vehicle, all doors including the rear gate will be locked. Also, the
hazard warning flashers will flash once.
! Automatic locking (except vehicle
If any of the doors or the rear gate was not
opened within 30 seconds after unlocking,
they will be automatically locked again.
enabling/disabling of the automatic locking function and the time until the automatic locking takes place can be set on
the monitor screen. For details, please
refer to the Owners Manual supplement
for the navigation system. When the
. The operating range of the automatic locking function is approximately

1 m from the vehicle, however when it
operate in a location when operating in
a location with strong radio waves or
noise (e.g., near a radio tower, power
plant, broadcast station and area where
wireless equipment is used), the operating ranges may change.
. Before leaving the vehicle, make
sure that it is locked.
. If any of the doors or the rear gate is
open, the function does not operate.
. Enabling/disabling of the hazard
warning flashers and the time that the
interior light stays illuminated can be
set at SUBARU dealers. For more
details, we recommend that you contact a SUBARU dealer.
2-15
. When the button on the access

key is pressed while the access key is
placed too close to the vehicle body,
unlocking by the keyless access functions may not work. In such a case, the
functions will recover by unlocking
using the remote keyless entry system.
system)
function
The unlocking procedure of this function is
as follows.
1. With all doors closed, pressing the
button on the remote control causes
only the drivers door to unlock.
2. If you press the button again
within 5 seconds of unlocking the drivers
door, all of the other doors and the rear
gate will be unlocked.
SUBARU dealer.
Operational: Only the drivers door is
unlocked.
CONTINUED
Black plate (100,1)
2-16
Keys and doors
Non-operational: All doors and the rear

gate are unlocked.
The factory setting (default setting) is set
as non-operational.
& Unlocking rear gate by remote keyless entry system

(unlocking by buttons)
! Unlocking rear gate
& Warning chimes and warning

light
The keyless access function sounds a
warning chime and flashes the access key
warning light on the meter in order to
minimize improper operations and help
protect your vehicle from theft.
When the warning chime sounds and/or
the warning light flashes, take the appropriate action.
NOTE
For China models, the outside warning
chime will not sound.
! Warnings by warning chimes
When the warning chime sounds and the
warning light flashes, take the appropriate
action.
When the
button is pressed near the
vehicle, the rear gate will be unlocked.
Also, the hazard warning flashers will flash
twice.
! Door ajar warning

When the door lock/unlock button is
pressed to lock the vehicle while any of
the doors including the rear gate is not
fully closed, the warning chime will sound.
NOTE
Close the door that is open, and lock
the vehicle.
! Lockout warning
When you attempt to lock all doors while
the access key is left inside the vehicle, a
chirp sound will be heard for 2 seconds,
and all doors including the rear gate will be
unlocked.
NOTE
Take out the access key from inside the
vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
! Access key lock-in warning
When the doors are closed and the door
lock/unlock button is pressed to lock the
vehicle while the access key is left inside
the vehicle and the power is OFF, a chirp
sound will be heard for 2 seconds.
NOTE
Take out the access key from inside the
vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
! Power warning
When the door lock/unlock button is
pressed while carrying the access key
and the power is in a position other than
OFF, a chirp sound will be heard for a
maximum of 60 seconds.
NOTE
. Switch the power to OFF, and lock
the doors. When the power is in a
Black plate (101,1)
Keys and doors
position other than OFF, it is not

possible to lock the doors by the door
lock/unlock button or the LOCK button
on the access key.
. When the access key is returned to
the inside of the vehicle or the power is
switched to OFF, the chirp sound will
stop.
. This warning occurs when the
power is in a position other than
OFF and the selector lever is in the
P position (AT vehicles).
! Selector lever position warning
indication (AT vehicles)
When the drivers door is opened while
the power is in a position other than OFF
and the selector lever is in a position other
than the P position, the warning chime
will sound.
NOTE
When a chirp sound is heard, shift the
selector lever to the P position,
switch the power to OFF, and get
out of the vehicle.
! Warnings by warning light
2-17
! Access key takeout warning

When the driver exits the vehicle with the
access key and closes the drivers door
while the power is in a position other than
OFF, a chirp sound will be heard, and
the access key warning light will flash.
NOTE
When the access key is not inside the

vehicle or is under such irregular conditions, the access key warning light on the
combination meter flashes.
! Access key warning
When the vehicle is driven while the
access key is not inside the vehicle, a
chirp sound will be heard. At the same
time, the access key warning light will
flash.
NOTE
Carry the access key, and drive the
vehicle.
. Switch the power to OFF, and exit

the vehicle (MT vehicles).
. Shift the selector lever to the P
position, switch the power to OFF,
and exit the vehicle (AT vehicles).
. When the access key is taken out of
the vehicle through an open window,
the warning will not be provided.
! Passenger access key takeout warning
When another passenger exits the vehicle
with the access key and closes a door
other than the drivers door while the
power is in a position other than OFF,
the warning chime will sound. At the same
flash.
NOTE
stop.
CONTINUED
Black plate (102,1)
2-18
Keys and doors

! Warning by flashing of operation
indicator on push-button ignition
switch
! Steering lock warning
If the steering lock is not released when
you start the engine, the indicator on the
push-button ignition switch flashes in
green. In this case, slightly depress the
brake pedal while rotating the steering
wheel right and left and push the pushbutton ignition switch.
WARNING
green, there could be a steering lock

malfunction. We recommend that
you contact your SUBARU dealer
as soon as possible.
! Keyless access with push-button
start system malfunction warning
In case the keyless access with pushbutton start system has a malfunction, the
operation indicator on the push-button
ignition switch flashes in orange.
CAUTION
When the operation indicator
flashes in orange, we recommend
that you contact a SUBARU dealer
immediately.
Never drive the vehicle if the indicator on the push-button ignition

switch is flashing in green when
starting the engine. This indicates
the status that the steering wheel is
not released and could result in an
accident involving serious injury or
death.
CAUTION
When starting the engine again, if
the indicator light is still flashing in
Black plate (103,1)
Keys and doors
2-19
! List of warnings
Inside warning
chime
Ding,
ding ...
(intermittent)
Outside warning
chime
Short beep
(2 seconds)
Beep
(10 seconds)
Long beep (60

seconds max.)
Ding
Access key
warning light on
meter
Operation indicator on pushbutton ignition

switch
Status
Action
The drivers door was opened while

the power is Acc (in AT vehicles,
when the selector lever is in the P
position).
Switch the power to OFF, or close

the drivers door.
*When exiting the vehicle, be sure
to switch the power to OFF.
The power was switched to OFF

while the drivers door is open.
Close the drivers door.
An attempt was made to lock all

doors while the access key is left
inside the vehicle.
Take out the access key from the

vehicle, and lock the doors.
*The doors cannot be locked while
the access key is inside the vehicle.
*A chirp sound will be heard, and all
doors will be unlocked.
The door lock/unlock button was

pressed while the power is OFF
and the access key is inside the
vehicle.

*If the access key is inside the
vehicle, the doors cannot be locked.
The push-button ignition switch is

pushed while the ignition switch is
in the OFF position and one of the
doors including the rear gate is
opened.
Close the doors securely and lock

them.
*If one of the doors including the
rear gate is opened, the doors
cannot be locked.

pressed while carrying the access
key and the power is in a position
other than OFF (in AT vehicles,
position).
Return the access key inside the

vehicle, or switch the power to
OFF.
*If the power is not switched to
OFF, the doors cannot be locked.
The vehicle was driven while the

access key is not inside the vehicle. vehicle.
CONTINUED
Black plate (104,1)
2-20
Keys and doors
Inside warning
chime
Outside warning
chime
Ding
Ding
Beep, beep,
beep (3 times)
Ding
Beep, beep,
beep (3 times)
Access key
warning light on
meter
(Flashes 1 sec.
intermittent)
(Flashes 1 sec.
intermittent)
(Flashes 1 sec.
intermittent)

switch
Status
Action
The push-button ignition switch was Carry the access key, and press the
pressed while the access key is not push-button ignition switch.
inside the vehicle.
The driver exited the vehicle with

the access key and closed the
drivers door while the power is in a Switch the power to OFF, and get
position other than OFF (in AT
out of the vehicle.
vehicles, when the selector lever is
in the P position).
A fellow passenger exited the veReturn the access key to inside the
hicle with the access key and
closed a door other than the drivers vehicle, or switch the power to
door while the power is in a position OFF.
other than OFF.

Shift the selector lever to the P
drivers door while the power is in a position,
switch the power to OFF
position other than OFF and the
selector lever is in a position other and exit the vehicle.
than the P position.
Long beep
(continuous)
Long beep
(continuous)
Long beep
(continuous)
The drivers door was opened while Shift the selector lever to the P
the power is in a position other than position, switch the power to OFF
OFF and the selector lever is in a and exit the vehicle.
position other than the P position.
Ding
the battery of the access

The battery of the access key is low. Replace
key.
(Flashes 1 sec.
intermittent)
Flashes in green The engine start procedure was

(15 seconds
performed, but the steering is still
max.)
locked.
While turning the steering wheel

right and left lightly, depress the
brake pedal and press the pushbutton ignition switch.
Black plate (105,1)
Keys and doors
2-21
Inside warning
chime
Outside warning
chime
Access key
warning light on
meter

switch
Status
Action
Flashes in orange
A malfunction was detected in the

power system or steering lock.
We recommend that you contact a

SUBARU dealer immediately and
have the vehicle inspected.
CONTINUED
Black plate (106,1)
2-22
Keys and doors
& Disabling keyless access

function
When the vehicle is not going to be used
for a long time, or when the user chooses
not to use the keyless access function, the
keyless access function can be disabled.
NOTE
. The locking and unlocking function
by the remote keyless entry system is
not disabled.
. The setting can also be changed at
SUBARU dealers. For more details, we
recommend that you contact a
SUBARU dealer.
. To start the engine while the functions are disabled, perform the procedure described in When access key
does not operate properly in chapter
7.
! Disabling functions
1. Sit in the drivers seat, and close the
door.
2. Pull the power door locking switch to
the rear position (unlock side).
3. Within 5 seconds after step 2 is
performed, open the drivers door.
performed, pull the power door locking
switch to the rear position (unlock side)
twice while the door is open.

performed, close and open the drivers
door twice.
performed, pull the power door locking
switch to the rear position (unlock side)
twice while the door is open.
performed, close and open the drivers
door once.
performed, close the door. A chirp sound
will be heard twice, and the functions are
disabled.
in the surrounding area or low battery of

the access key, perform the following
procedures to lock and unlock the doors.
When the battery of the access key is
discharged, replace it with a new one.
! Locking and unlocking by mechanical key
NOTE
In steps 4 and 6, pull the power door
locking switch slowly. If the switch is
pressed quickly, the functions may not
be disabled.
! Enabling functions
When the procedure to disable the functions is performed again, the functions are
enabled.
A chirp sound will be heard once.
& When access key does not

operate properly
If the locking/unlocking procedures cannot
be operated because of strong radio noise
1)
2)
Knob
Mechanical key
While pulling the knob of the access key,

take out the mechanical key.
Unlock the drivers door with the mechanical key.
NOTE
After locking and unlocking, be sure to
attach the mechanical key back to the
access key.
Black plate (107,1)
Keys and doors
2-23
& Replacing battery of access

key
If the operation of the keyless access

function or the operating distance of the
remote keyless entry system is unstable,
the battery of the access key may be
discharged.
Replace the battery with a new one.
Battery: Button battery CR1632
2. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl

tape or a cloth, and insert it in the gap (A)
to remove the cover.
1)
2)
4. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with

insulating tape, and insert it between the
battery and the board (B). Take out the
battery as shown in the figure.
Knob
Mechanical key
1. Take out the mechanical key.
3. Remove the board in the cover (B).

Place it with the battery side facing
upward.
CONTINUED
Black plate (108,1)
2-24
Keys and doors
NOTE
5. Insert a new battery with its positive (+)

side facing upward as shown in the figure.
Attach the cover firmly.
CAUTION
. Keep the battery and removed
parts out of reach of children so
that they do not swallow them.
. Danger of explosion if battery is
incorrectly replaced. Replace
only with the same or equivalent
type.
. Batteries shall not be exposed to
excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the like.
. Replace only with the same or

equivalent type of battery recommended by the manufacturer.
. Dispose of used batteries according
to the local laws.
. Mount the battery in the correct
orientation to prevent fluid leakage.
Be careful not to bend the terminals. It
may result in a malfunction.
. It is recommended that the battery
should be replaced at a SUBARU dealer.
. Use a new battery.
. After replacing the battery, confirm
that the access key functions properly.

(if equipped)
By use of the remote transmitter, you can
lock or unlock all doors and the rear gate
from a distance within approximately 1.0
m (3.2 ft) of the vehicle. The operable
distance varies depending on the environmental conditions. The systems operable
distance will be shorter in areas near a
facility or electronic equipment emitting
strong radio waves such as a power plant,
broadcast station, TV tower, or remote
controller of home electronic appliances.
The trade, model and suppliers names of
this device are as follows.
. Equipments trade name: SUBARU
. Equipments model name:
TF001 (left-hand drive vehicles)
ASREU55 (right-hand drive vehicles)
. Suppliers name: Calsonic Kansei
For Europe:
This device complies with the essential
requirements of the Radio and Telecommunication Terminal Equipment Directive
found in the chapter 13.
Black plate (109,1)
Keys and doors
& Locking and unlocking doors
Pressing the or LOCK button locks all

doors and the rear gate and pressing the
or OPEN button unlocks them.
When leaving the vehicle, pull the door
handle to make sure that the doors have
been locked.
NOTE
The keyless entry system does not
operate when the ignition key is inserted in the ignition switch or when
any of the doors or the rear gate is not
fully closed.
Type A
CAUTION
. Do not expose the transmitter to
shocks.
. Do not take the transmitter apart.
. Do not get the transmitter wet. If it
gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth
immediately.
Type B
1) Open
2) Lock

system)
2-25

function
1. With all doors closed, pressing the
button causes only the drivers door
to unlock.
2. If you press the button again
within 5 seconds of unlocking the drivers
door, all of the other doors including the
rear gate will be unlocked.
SUBARU dealer.
Operational: Only the drivers door is
unlocked.
Non-operational: All doors including the
rear gate are unlocked.
! Automatic locking (except vehicle
When the button is pressed, all of the
doors and the rear gate are automatically
locked 30 seconds later unless any one of
the four doors or the rear gate is opened
during that period. The automatic locking
functions operational/non-operational
setting and the setting for the locking time
period (the time period after which locking
takes place) can be changed.
CONTINUED
Black plate (110,1)
2-26
Keys and doors
Vehicle with genuine SUBARU navigation system:

The automatic locking functions operational/non-operational setting and the
setting for the locking time period can be
changed using the monitor. For details,
please refer to the Owners Manual
supplement for the navigation system.
Vehicle without genuine SUBARU navigation system:
The automatic locking function can be
canceled by a SUBARU dealer. We
recommend that you contact the nearest
SUBARU dealer for details.
Pressing the
button unlocks the rear
gate.
! Vehicles with double locking system
& Unlocking rear gate

! Vehicle without double locking
system
When the OPEN button is pressed

continuously for at least 2 seconds, all
four doors unlock and the rear gate then
unlocks.
& Interior light interlock function

The dome light and the map lights will
illuminate when the or OPEN button
is pressed. The dome light and the map
lights will illuminate for approximately 15
seconds and gradually turn off. When the
or LOCK button is pressed, the dome
light and the map lights immediately turn
off. Also, the dome light and the map lights

will start going out if the key is turned to
the ON position.
To activate this function, set the dome light
switch to the DOOR position.
The setting for the illumination period of
the dome light and the map lights can be
changed by a SUBARU dealer in accordance with your wishes.
. Vehicle with genuine SUBARU navigation system:
The setting can be changed using the
monitor. For details, please refer to the
Owners Manual supplement for the navigation system.
details.
. Vehicle without genuine SUBARU
navigation system:
you contact the nearest SUBARU dealer
for details.
& Replacing battery

If the transmitter fails to operate when
used within the standard distance, this
may indicate a weak battery. Replace the
battery as soon as possible. It is recom-
Black plate (111,1)
Keys and doors
mended that you have the battery replaced by your authorized SUBARU dealer. If you have to replace the battery by
yourself, use utmost care that no dust and
water may enter the transmitter.
2-27
! Type A
CAUTION
. Do not let dust, oil or water get on
or in the transmitter when replacing battery.
. Be careful not to damage the
printed circuit board in the transmitter when replacing the battery.
. Be careful not to allow children to
touch the battery and any removed parts; children could
swallow them.
. Danger of explosion if battery is
incorrectly replaced. Replace
only with the same or equivalent
type.
. Batteries shall not be exposed to
excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the like.
1. Remove the screw on the transmitter

case.
3. Remove the screw on the battery

case.
4. Open the case.

2. Open the case using a flat-head
screwdriver.
CONTINUED
Black plate (112,1)
2-28
Keys and doors
! Type B
5. Remove the old battery.

6. Fit a new battery (type CR-1620 3V or
equivalent) in the case with its positive (+)
side facing upward.
7. Put the case together by fitting the
mating part of the button side into the hook
on the key side.
8. Reinstall the screw on the transmitter
case.
3. Remove the old battery.

4. Fit a new battery (type CR-1620 3V or
equivalent) in the case with its negative
() side facing upward.
5. Put the case together by fitting the
mating part of the button side into the hook
on the key side.
6. Reinstall the screw on the transmitter
case.
1. Remove the screw on the transmitter

case.
2. Separate the case.
1)
Negative () side facing up
Black plate (113,1)
Keys and doors
Double locking system (if

equipped)
& To set double locking system
The double locking system is an anti-theft

system. It operates when the doors are
locked using the key or remote transmitter.
While this system is operating, the power
door locking switch and door lock levers
inside the cabin cannot be used to unlock
the doors.
1. Remove the key from the ignition

switch and have all occupants get out of
the vehicle.
2. Close all of the doors and the rear gate
securely.
! Setting system using key
WARNING
Never set the double locking system
while passengers are inside the
vehicle. With the system set, people
in the vehicle would not be able to
open the doors from the inside. The
result could be serious injuries or
death.
2-29
! Setting system using remote transmitter

1. Remove the key from the ignition
switch and have all occupants get out of
the vehicle.
2. Close all of the doors and the rear gate
securely.
3. Press the LOCK button on the
transmitter. The hazard warning flashers
will flash once and the double locking
system will be set. All of the doors and the
rear gate will be locked.
NOTE
For the vehicle with the keyless access
function, it is possible to set the double
locking system by pressing the door
lock/unlock button.
3. Insert the key into the key cylinder of

the drivers door, then turn it in the locking
direction to set the double locking system.
All of the doors and the rear gate will be
locked.
CONTINUED
Black plate (114,1)
2-30
Keys and doors
& To cancel double locking

system
! Canceling system using key
! Canceling system using remote

transmitter
Press the OPEN button on the transmitter. The hazard warning flashers will flash
twice and the double locking system will
be canceled. All of the doors and the rear
gate will be unlocked.
NOTE
function, it is possible to cancel the
double locking system by pressing the
door lock/unlock button.
& In an emergency
Insert the key into the key cylinder of the
drivers door, then turn it in the unlocking
direction to cancel the double locking
system. All of the doors and the rear gate
will be unlocked.
If you become trapped inside the vehicle

owing to an accident or some other
unexpected circumstance, unlock the
doors using one of the following methods:
. Remove the key from the ignition
switch, then press the OPEN button on
the remote transmitter.
. Insert the key into the ignition switch
and turn it to the ON position.
. Open the drivers window, then insert
the key into the key cylinder of the drivers
door and turn it in the unlocking direction.
. Break one of the windows and climb
out through the window opening.
. Open the rear gate from inside the
cargo area. Refer to Rear gate if the
rear gate cannot be opened in chapter 9.
& If a battery goes dead

If the double locking system cannot be
canceled because the vehicle battery or
transmitter battery has gone dead or
because of a blown fuse or other electrical
problem, insert the key into the key
cylinder of the drivers door and turn it in
the unlocking direction.
& To reset double locking system

The double locking system must be reset
when the vehicle battery has been temporarily disconnected for replacement or
charging. To reset the system, turn the key
once in the unlocking direction or press
the OPEN button on the transmitter. The
double locking system will then operate
normally.
NOTE
function, it is possible to reset the
double locking system by pressing
the door lock/unlock button.
Black plate (115,1)
Keys and doors
Function disabling unlocking

with the power door locking
switch (Australia models
without double locking system)
Refer to the Locking and unlocking doors

This function is canceled when the doors
are unlocked using the remote keyless
entry system or the ignition switch is
turned to ON.
2-31
Child safety locks

2
NOTE
WARNING
Never lock the doors using the
remote keyless entry system while
passengers are inside the vehicle.
Doing so activates the function that
disables unlocking with the power
door locking switch and so people
in the vehicle would not be able to
open the doors from the inside. This
could result in serious injury or
death.
Australia models are fitted with an antitheft function that disables door unlocking
with the power door locking switch. This
function is activated in the following
situations, disabling the doors from being
unlocked using the power door locking
switch.
. The doors are locked using the remote
keyless entry system.
. The automatic locking function is in
operation.
. Even while this function is activated,

doors can be unlocked using their lock
levers, refer to the Door locks section
in this chapter.
. This function is not activated when
the doors are locked using the key or
power door locking switch.
Each rear door has a child safety lock that
prevents the doors from being opened
even if the inside door handle is pulled.
When the child safety lock lever is in the
lock position, the door cannot be opened
from inside regardless of the position of
the inner door handle lock lever. The door
can only be opened from the outside.
WARNING
Always turn the child safety locks to
the LOCK position when children
sit on the rear seat. Serious injury
could result if a child accidentally
opens the door and falls out.
Black plate (116,1)
2-32
Keys and doors
! Drivers side switches
Windows
! Operating the drivers window
& Power windows

WARNING
To avoid serious personal injury
caused by entrapment, you must
do the following.
. When operating the power windows, be extremely careful to
prevent anyones fingers, arms,
neck or head from being caught
in the window.
. Always lock the passengers windows using the lock switch when
children are riding in the vehicle.
. Before leaving the vehicle, always remove the key from the
ignition switch for safety and
never allow an unattended child
to remain in the vehicle. Failure
to follow this procedure could
result in injury to a child operating the power window.
The power windows operate only when
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Lock switch
For drivers window (with one-touch auto
up and down feature)
For front passengers window
For rear left window
For rear right window
All door windows can be controlled by the

power window switch cluster at the driver
side door.
1)
2)
Automatically open/close
Open/close
To open:
Push the switch down lightly and hold it.
The window will open as long as the
switch is held.
This switch also has a one-touch auto
down feature that allows the window to be
opened fully without holding the switch.
Push the switch down until it clicks and
release it, and the window will fully open.
To stop the window halfway, pull the
switch up lightly.
To close:
Pull the switch up lightly and hold it. The
window will close as long as the switch is
Black plate (117,1)
Keys and doors
held.
This switch also has a one-touch auto up
feature that allows the window to be
closed fully without holding the switch.
Pull the switch up until it clicks and release
it, and the window will fully close. To stop
the window halfway, push the switch down
lightly.
! Locking the passengers windows
2-33
When the lock switch on the power

window switch cluster, located on the
drivers side door, is in the LOCK
position, the passengers windows cannot
be operated with the passengers
switches.
! Operating the passengers windows
1)
2)
Lock
Unlock
Push the lock switch. When the lock

switch is in the LOCK position, the
passengers windows cannot be opened
or closed.
To open:
Push the appropriate switch down and
hold it until the window reaches the
desired position.
To close:
Pull the switch up and hold it until it
reaches the desired position.
Press the switch again to cancel the

passengers window locking.
! Passengers side switches
To open:
Push the switch down and hold it until the
window reaches the desired position.
To close:
Pull the switch up and hold it until the
window reaches the desired position.
Black plate (118,1)
2-34
Keys and doors
. Do not attempt to shut the rear

gate while holding the recessed
grip. Also avoid closing the rear
gate by pulling on the recessed
grip from inside the cargo space.
There is a danger of your hand
being caught and injured.
Rear gate
CAUTION
The rear gate can be locked and unlocked

using any of the following systems.
. Power door locking switch
. Keyless access with push-button start
system (if equipped)
. Remote keyless entry system (if
equipped)
Refer to the Power door locking switch,
Keyless access with push-button start
system and Remote keyless entry system sections in this chapter.
To open:
First unlock the rear gate lock then push
the rear gate opener button.
To close:
Lower the rear gate slowly and push down
firmly until the latch engages. The rear
gate can be lowered easily if you pull
down on the inside handle as shown in the
illustration.
WARNING
. To prevent dangerous exhaust
gas from entering the vehicle,
always keep the rear gate closed
while driving.
. Do not jam a plastic bag in or

place cellophane tape on the rear
gate stays or scratch the stays
while loading or unloading cargo.
That could cause leakage of gas
from the stays, which may result
in their inability to hold the rear
gate open.
. Be careful not to hit your head or
face on the rear gate when opening or closing the rear gate and
when loading or unloading cargo.
NOTE
Should the rear gate be unable to be
unlocked due to discharged battery, a
fault in the door locking/unlocking
system or other causes, you can
unlock it by manually operating the
rear gate lock release lever.
Black plate (119,1)
Keys and doors
For the procedure, refer to the Rear

gate if the rear gate cannot be
opened section in chapter 9 In case
of emergency.
Sunroof (if equipped)

WARNING
. Never let anyones hands, arms,
head or any objects protrude
from the sunroof. A person could
be seriously injured if the vehicle
stops suddenly or turns sharply
or if the vehicle is involved in an
accident.
To avoid serious personal injury
caused by entrapment, you must
do the following.
. Before closing the sunroof, make
sure that no ones hands, arms,
head or other objects will be
accidentally caught in the sunroof.
result in injury to a child operating the sunroof.
2-35
. Never try to check the anti-entrapment function by deliberately

placing part of your body in the
sunroof.
CAUTION
. Do not sit on the edge of the open
sunroof.
. Do not operate the sunroof if
falling snow or extremely cold
conditions have caused it to
freeze shut.
1)
2)
3)
Open/close switch
Open
Close
CONTINUED
Black plate (120,1)
2-36
Keys and doors
The sunroof operates only when the

ignition switch is in the ON position.
& To open the sunroof

Pull the switch to the OPEN side and
quickly release it to open the sunroof. The
sun shade will also be opened together
with the sunroof. The sunroof will stop at a
position 50 cm (20 in) away from the fully
closed position. Pull the switch again to
open the sunroof completely.
To stop the sunroof at a desired position,
momentarily push the switch to the
CLOSE or OPEN side.
After washing the vehicle or after it rains,
wipe away water on the roof prior to
opening the sunroof to prevent drops of
water from falling into the passenger
compartment.
& To close the sunroof

Push the switch to the CLOSE side then
quickly release it to close the sunroof. The
sunroof will stop at a position 20 cm (8 in)
away from the fully closed position. Push
the switch again to close the sunroof
completely.
To stop the sunroof at a desired position,
momentarily push the switch to the
CLOSE or OPEN side.
& Anti-entrapment function
& Sun shade
When the sunroof senses an object

trapped between its glass and the vehicles roof during closure, it automatically
moves back by 15 cm (6 in) from that point
and then stops. The anti-entrapment
function may also be activated by a strong
shock on the sunroof even when there is
nothing trapped.
NOTE
. For the sake of safety, it is recommended that you avoid driving with the
sunroof fully opened.
. Driving with the sunroof fully open
can cause an annoying sound to generate at high speeds. If such a condition has been encountered, use the
sunroof at the initial stop position of 50
cm (20 in).
. If the sunroof cannot be closed
through switch operation because of
system failure, it can be closed manually using a hex-head wrench. For the
procedure, refer to Sunroof if the
sunroof cannot be closed in chapter 9
In case of emergency.
The sun shade can be slid forward or

backward by hand while the sunroof is
closed.
If the sunroof is opened, the sun shade
also moves back.
Black plate (5,1)

Ignition switch (vehicle without pushbutton start system).........................................
3-3
LOCK..................................................................
Acc.....................................................................
ON......................................................................
START ................................................................
Key reminder chime (if equipped) ........................
Ignition switch light .............................................
3-3
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-4
Push-button ignition switch (vehicle with

push-button start system) ...............................
3-5
Operating range for push-button start system ......

Switching power .................................................
When access key does not operate properly ........
3-7
3-8
3-9
Hazard warning flasher......................................

Meters and gauges.............................................
3-10
3-11
Combination meter illumination ..........................

Canceling the function for meter/gauge needle
movement upon turning on the ignition
switch..............................................................
Speedometer......................................................
Odometer/Trip meter...........................................
Tachometer ........................................................
Fuel gauge.........................................................
3-11
3-11
3-12
3-12
3-13
3-13
Warning and indicator lights .............................
3-14
Seatbelt warning light and chime

(if equipped).....................................................
SRS airbag system warning light ........................
Malfunction indicator lamp
(Check Engine light) .........................................
Coolant temperature low indicator light/Coolant
temperature high warning light .........................
3-15
3-16
3-17
Charge warning light..........................................

Oil pressure warning light ..................................
AT OIL TEMP warning light (AT vehicles) ............
Rear differential oil temperature warning light
(if equipped) ....................................................
ABS warning light..............................................
Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/Vehicle
Dynamics Control OFF indicator light ...............
Brake system warning light................................
Low fuel warning light .......................................
Hill start assist warning light (MT vehicles).........
Door open warning light ....................................
All-Wheel Drive warning light (AT vehicles).........
Power steering warning light (if equipped)..........
Automatic headlight beam leveler warning light
(vehicles with HID headlights) ..........................
Access key warning light (vehicle with keyless
access with push-button start system) .............
Keyless access with push-button start system
malfunction warning ........................................
Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator
light ................................................................
Immobilizer indicator light..................................
SPORT mode indicator light (AT vehicles) ..........
Selector lever and gear position indicator
(AT vehicles)....................................................
LO position indicator light (dual range MT
vehicles)..........................................................
Turn signal indicator lights.................................
High beam indicator light ...................................
Cruise control indicator light (if equipped) ..........
3-18
3-18
3-19
3-19
3-19
3-20
3-21
3-22
3-22
3-23
3-23
3-23
3-23
3-24
3-24
3-29
3-29
3-29
3-29
3-29
3-30
3-30
3-30
3-18
Black plate (6,1)
Cruise control set indicator light

(if equipped).....................................................
Headlight indicator light .....................................
Front fog light indicator light (if equipped) ..........
Rear fog light indicator light (if equipped) ...........
3-30
3-30
3-30
3-30
Clock ...................................................................
Information display ............................................
3-31
3-31
Outside temperature indicator ............................

Average fuel consumption ..................................
3-32
3-32
Light control switch ...........................................
3-33
Headlights..........................................................
High/low beam change (dimmer).........................
Headlight flasher ................................................
3-33
3-34
3-34
Turn signal lever ................................................

Illumination brightness control .........................
Headlight beam leveler (if equipped) ................
3-34
3-35
3-36
Automatic headlight beam leveler

(vehicles with HID headlights)...........................
3-36
Manual headlight beam leveler (vehicles without

HID headlights, if equipped) .............................
3-36
Fog light switch .................................................
3-38
Front fog light switch (if equipped) .....................

Rear fog light switch (if equipped)......................
3-38
3-38
Wiper and washer..............................................
3-39
Windshield wiper and washer switches ..............

Rear window wiper and washer switch ...............
3-41
3-42
Rear window defogger button ..........................

Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped)..............
Headlight washer (if equipped).........................
Mirrors ................................................................
3-43
3-44
3-46
3-46
Inside mirror......................................................
Outside mirrors .................................................
3-46
3-47
Tilt/telescopic steering wheel ...........................

Horn ....................................................................
3-49
3-49
Black plate (125,1)
Ignition switch (vehicle without push-button start system)
NOTE
. Keep the ignition switch in the
LOCK position when the engine is
not running.
. Using electrical accessories for a
long time with the ignition switch in the
ON or Acc position can cause the
battery to go dead.
. If the ignition switch will not move
from the LOCK position to the Acc
position, turn the steering wheel
slightly to the left and right as you turn
the ignition switch.
& LOCK
The ignition switch has four positions:
LOCK, Acc, ON and START.
CAUTION
Do not attach a large key holder or
key case to either key. If it bangs
against your knees while you are
driving, it could turn the ignition
switch from the ON position to the
Acc or LOCK position, thereby
stopping the engine.
3-3
LOCK only when the key is pushed in

while turning it. The ignition switch will lock
the steering wheel when you remove the
key.
If turning the key is difficult, turn the
steering wheel slightly to the right and left
as you turn the key.
WARNING
. Never turn the ignition switch to
LOCK while the vehicle is
being driven or towed because
that will lock the steering wheel,
preventing steering control. And
when the engine is turned off, it
takes a much greater effort than
usual to steer.
result in injury to a child or
others. Children could operate
the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle
move.
The key can only be inserted or removed

in this position.
The key can be turned from Acc to
CONTINUED
Black plate (126,1)
3-4
& Acc
NOTE
In this position the electrical accessories

(radio, cigarette lighter, etc.) can be used.
The engine may not start in the following cases:
& Key reminder chime (if

equipped)
& ON
This is the normal operating position after
the engine is started.
The reminder chime sounds when the

drivers door opens and the key is in the
LOCK or Acc positions. The chime
stops when the key is removed from the
ignition switch.
& START
The engine is started in this position. The
starter cranks the engine to start it. When
the key is released (after the engine has
started), the key automatically returns to
the ON position.
CAUTION
Do not turn the ignition switch to the
START position while the engine
is running.
contains an immobilizer transponder.

. The key is near or touching another
transmitter.
& Ignition switch light

. The key grip is touching another key
or a metallic key holder.
For easy access to the ignition switch in

the dark, the ignition switch light illuminates when any of the doors are opened.
The light remains illuminated for a several
seconds and gradually turns off after all
doors are closed or if the key is inserted in
the ignition switch.
The ignition switch light also can be turned
on by use of the keyless entry transmitter.
Refer to the Keyless access with pushbutton start system or Remote keyless
entry system section in chapter 2 for
detailed information.
As your vehicle is equipped with an

immobilizer system, if you fail to start your
engine with your registered key, pull out
the key once, (at this time, the immobilizer
indicator light blinks) and then insert the
key in the ignition switch and turn it to the
START position and again try to start
your engine.
. The key is near another key that
Black plate (127,1)
Push-button ignition switch

(vehicle with push-button
start system)
WARNING
the vehicle.
before using the push-button start
system, refer to Radio waves used
for the push-button start system
mentioned later, and contact the
electric medical equipment manufacturer for more information. The
radio waves from the transmitting
antennas on the vehicle could adversely affect the operation of the
electric medical equipment.
3-5

functions can be changed. For
the setting procedure, refer to the
Disabling keyless access function section in chapter 2. The
setting can also be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. For more details, we recommend that you
. For detailed information about
the operation method of the
push-button ignition switch while
the keyless access functions is
switched to the non-operational
mode, refer to the When access
key does not operate properly
section in 7 chapter.
Radio waves used for the pushbutton start system
. The push-button start system
uses radio waves of the following
frequency* in addition to the
radio waves used for the remote
keyless entry system functions.
The radio waves are periodically
output from the antennas installed on the vehicle as shown
in the following illustrations.
*Radio frequency: 134 kHz
1)
Antenna
CONTINUED
Black plate (128,1)
3-6
CAUTION
uses weak radio waves. The
status of the access key and the
environmental conditions may
interfere with the communication
between the access key and the
vehicle under the following conditions, and it may not be possible to lock or unlock the doors or
start the engine.
When operating near a facility
When products that transmit
When carrying more than one
access key
When the access key is
placed near wireless communication equipment such as a
cell phone
placed near a metallic object
When metallic accessories are

When carrying the access key
When the battery of the access key is discharged
door pocket or at the corner of
the cargo area) or within 2 m (6.6
garage).
. The access key may be locked
the power may not turn on in
some cases depending on the
location of the access key.
access function section in chapter 2. The setting can also be

Although you can replace the
that the battery should be
replaced by a SUBARU dealer
to avoid the risk of damage at
the time of replacement.
Do not get the access key wet.
dry completely.
Do not apply strong impacts
to the access key.
Keep the access key away
Never leave the access key in
Black plate (129,1)
Do not wash the access key in

Do not leave the access key in
Do not leave the access key
one.
NOTE
. If an access key is lost, it is
recommended that the access key be
reregistered. For reregistration of an
access key, we recommend that you
. For a spare access key, we recommend that you contact a SUBARU
dealer.
. Up to 7 access keys can be registered for one vehicle.
. Carefully store the key number plate
and security ID plate supplied with the
access key. They are necessary for
vehicle repair and additional registration of access keys.
storage spaces inside the vehicle, such
as the door pocket, dashboard and
corner of the cargo area. Vibrations
may damage the key or turn on the
switch, possibly resulting in a lockout.
3-7
& Operating range for pushbutton start system
1)
2)
Antenna
Operating range
NOTE
. If the access key is not detected
within the operating range of the antennas inside the vehicle, the power
switch and the engine start cannot be
operated.
. Even when the access key is outside
the vehicle, if it is placed too close to
the glass, the power may switch on.
following places. It may become impossible to operate the power switch.
On the instrument panel
CONTINUED
Black plate (130,1)
3-8
On the floor
Inside the glove box
Inside the door trim pocket
On the rear seat
At the corner of the cargo area
. If the battery of the access key is
discharged, perform the procedure
not operate properly in this section to
switch the power. In such a case,
replace the battery immediately. Refer
to the Replacing battery of access
key section in chapter 2.
& Switching power
push-button ignition switch is pressed.

1. Carry the access key, and sit in the
drivers seat.
2. Make sure that the shift lever is in
neutral (MT vehicles). Make sure that the
selector lever is in the P position (AT
vehicles).
3. Press the push-button ignition switch
without depressing the clutch pedal (MT
vehicles) or the brake pedal (AT vehicles).
Every time the button is pressed, the
power is switched in the sequence of
OFF, Acc, ON and OFF. When the
engine is stopped and the push-button
ignition switch is in Acc or ON, the
ignition switch illuminates in orange.
Power
status
Indicator color
Operation
OFF
Turned off
Power is turned
off.
Orange
The following
parts can be
used:
wipers, washer,
audio and accessory power
outlet.
Acc
ON
Orange
(while engine is
stopped)
Turned off
(while engine is
running)
All electrical
parts can be
used.
! Battery drainage prevention function

When the power is left in Acc for
approximately 1 hour, the power will be
automatically switched to OFF to prevent
the battery from going dead. (In AT
vehicles, this function is activated when
the selector lever is in the P position.)
CAUTION
1)
2)
Operation indicator
The power is switched every time the
. When the power is left in ON or

Acc for a long time, it may
result in vehicle battery discharge.
Black plate (131,1)
. In AT vehicles, the power cannot

be switched to OFF when the
selector lever is in a position
other than P.
. Do not spill drinks, etc. on the
push-button ignition switch. It
may cause a malfunction.
. Do not touch the push-button
ignition switch with a hand soiled
with oil, etc. It may cause a
malfunction.
. If the push-button ignition switch
does not operate smoothly, stop
the operation. And we recommend that you contact a
SUBARU dealer immediately.
. If the operation indicator on the
push-button ignition switch does
not illuminate even when the
instrument panel illumination is
turned on (light control switch is
or
turned to the
position), we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected
at a SUBARU dealer.
. If the vehicle was left under the
hot sun for a long time, the
surface of the push-button ignition switch may get hot. Be careful not to burn yourself.
. After the battery was discharged
or replaced, it may require an

initialization of the steering lock
system to start the engine. In
such a case, initialize the steering lock.*
*Initialization of steering lock
Switch the power to OFF. Open
and close the drivers door, and
wait for approximately 10 seconds. When the steering is
locked, the initialization is completed.
3-9
! Switching power to ON
! MT vehicles
1. Make sure that the parking brake is
engaged.
neutral.
3. Depress the clutch pedal.
NOTE
. When operating the push-button
ignition switch, firmly press it all the
way.
. If the push-button ignition switch is
pressed quickly, the power may not
turn on and off.

operate properly
If the power switch procedures cannot be
operated because of strong radio noise in
the surrounding area or low battery of the
access key, try the following to switch the
power on. When the battery of the access
key is discharged, replace it with a new
one.
4. Hold the access key with the buttons

facing you, and touch the push-button
ignition switch with it.
When the communication between the
access key and the vehicle is completed,
a chime (ding) will sound, and the operation indicator on the push-button ignition
switch illuminates in green.
5. Within 5 seconds after the operation
indicator illuminates in green, release the
CONTINUED
Black plate (132,1)
3-10
clutch pedal, and press the push-button

ignition switch.
indicator illuminates in green, release the

brake pedal, and press the push-button
ignition switch.
Hazard warning flasher
! AT vehicles
engaged.
2. Make sure that the selector lever is in
the P position.
3. Depress the brake pedal.
The hazard warning flasher is used to

warn other drivers when you have to park
your vehicle under emergency conditions.
The hazard warning flasher works with the
ignition switch in any position.

To turn on the hazard warning flasher,

push the hazard warning button on the
instrument panel. To turn off the flasher,
push the button again.
NOTE
When the hazard warning flasher is on,
the turn signals do not work.
Black plate (133,1)
Meters and gauges

NOTE
Liquid-crystal displays are used in
some of the meters and gauges on
the combination meter. You will find
their indications hard to see if you wear
polarized glasses.
& Canceling the function for

meter/gauge needle movement upon turning on the
ignition switch
*: or
cannot be displayed when
& Combination meter illumination

When the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position, the various parts of the
combination meter illuminate in the following sequence:
1. Warning lights, indicator lights, meter
needles, gauge needles, odometer and
trip meter back light illuminate.
2. Meter needles and gauge needles
each show MAX position.
3. Meter needles and gauge needles
each show MIN position.
4. Regular illumination (for driving) begins.
3-11
To change the current setting, press the

trip knob for at least 2 seconds.
It is possible to activate or deactivate the

movement of the meter needles and
gauge needles that takes place when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
position.
Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK or
Acc position.
Press the trip knob to show or

on the odometer/trip meter display.
The display can be switched as shown in
the following illustration by pressing the
trip knob.
: Activated
: Deactivated
NOTE
. Your vehicles initial movement
setting of the meter/gauge needles
has been set for activation at the
time of shipment from the factory.
. It is not possible to cancel the initial
movement setting of the meter/gauge
needles when the ignition switch is in
the ON position. Cancel the setting
when the ignition switch is in the
LOCK or Acc position.
CONTINUED
Black plate (134,1)
3-12
& Speedometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle
speed.
! Speed warning chime (if equipped)
When the speed is over approximately
120 km/h (75 mph), a chime sounds.
not press the trip knob within 10 seconds

of illumination of the odometer/trip meter,
the odometer/trip meter will turn off.
! Odometer
The display can be switched as shown

below by pressing the trip knob.
& Odometer/Trip meter
*: or
cannot be displayed when
1)
Trip knob
The odometer shows the total distance

that the vehicle has been driven.
! Double trip meter
indication, refer to
For the or
Canceling the function for meter/gauge
needle movement upon turning on the
ignition switch in this section.
This meter displays the odometer and two

trip meters when the ignition switch is in
the LOCK, Acc or ON position.
If you press the trip knob when the ignition
switch is in the LOCK position, the
odometer/trip meter will light up. It is
possible to switch the indications while
the odometer/trip meter is lit up. If you do
The trip meter shows the distance that the
Black plate (135,1)
vehicle has been driven since you last set

it to zero.
To set the trip meter to zero, select the A
trip or B trip meter by pushing the knob
and keep the knob pushed for more than 2
seconds.
CAUTION
to protect the engine from overrevving. The engine will resume running normally after the engine speed
is reduced below the red zone.
3-13
NOTE
& Fuel gauge
To ensure safety, do not attempt to

change the function of the indicator
during driving, as an accident could
result.
NOTE
If the connection between the combination meter and battery is broken for any
reason such as vehicle maintenance or
fuse replacement, the data recorded on
the trip meter will be lost.
1)
& Tachometer
The tachometer shows the engine speed
in thousands of revolutions per minute.
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine with the
pointer of the tachometer in the red
zone. In this range, fuel injection will
be cut by the engine control module
Low fuel warning light
The fuel gauge shows the approximate

amount of fuel remaining in the tank.
When the ignition switch is in the LOCK
or Acc position, the fuel gauge shows E
even if the fuel tank contains fuel.
The gauge may move slightly during
braking, turning or acceleration due to fuel
level movement in the tank.
You will see the

sign in the fuel
gauge.
This indicates that the fuel filler door
(lid) is located on the right side of the
vehicle.
! Low fuel warning light
The low fuel warning light illuminates
when the tank is nearly empty [approximately 9.0 liters (2.3 US gal, 1.9 Imp gal)].
It only operates when the ignition switch is
in the ON position. When this light
illuminates, fill the fuel tank immediately.
NOTE
This light does not turn off unless the
tank is replenished up to an internal
CONTINUED
Black plate (136,1)
3-14
fuel quantity of approximately 15 liters

(4.0 US gal, 3.3 Imp gal).
CAUTION
Promptly put fuel in the tank whenever the low fuel warning light
illuminates. Engine misfires as a
result of an empty tank could cause
damage to the engine.
Warning and indicator lights

Several of the warning and indicator lights
illuminate momentarily and then turn off
when the ignition switch is initially turned
to the ON position. This permits checking the operation of the bulbs.
Apply the parking brake and turn the
ignition switch to the ON position. The
following lights illuminate:
: Seatbelt warning light (if equipped)
(The seatbelt warning light turns off only
when the driver fastens the seatbelt.)
: Front passengers seatbelt warning
light (Australia models only)
(The seatbelt warning light turns off only
when the front seat passenger fastens the
seatbelt.)
: All-Wheel Drive warning light
(AT vehicles)
: Power steering warning light
(if equipped)
: SRS airbag system warning light
: Malfunction indicator lamp
(Check Engine light)
: Coolant temperature high warning light
: Charge warning light
: Oil pressure warning light

: AT OIL TEMP warning light
(AT vehicles)
: Rear differential oil temperature warning light (if equipped)
: ABS warning light
: Brake system warning light
: Low fuel warning light
: Hill start assist warning light
(MT vehicles)
: Door open warning light
: SPORT mode indicator light
(AT vehicles)
: Vehicle Dynamics Control operation
indicator light
: Vehicle Dynamics Control warning
light/Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF
indicator light
: Cruise control indicator light
(if equipped)
: Cruise control set indicator light
(if equipped)
: Immobilizer indicator light
: Access key warning light
(if equipped)
Black plate (137,1)
warning light(s) corresponding to the unfastened seatbelt(s) will illuminate and

If any lights fail to illuminate, it indicates a

burned-out bulb or a malfunction of the
corresponding system.
We recommend that you consult your
authorized SUBARU dealer for repair.
& Seatbelt warning light
and chime (if equipped)
NOTE
If your seatbelt warning device does
not operate as described below, it may
be out of order. We recommend that
you have the device inspected and, if
necessary, repaired by the nearest
SUBARU dealer.
3-15
! Australia models
warning device at the drivers and front
passengers seat.
With the ignition switch turned to the ON
position, this device reminds the driver
and front passenger to put on their
seatbelts by turning on warning lights in
the following locations.

warning light(s) will start a repeated cycle
consisting of 5 seconds of flashing followed by a 1-second pause. At the same
time, a buzzer will start a repeated cycle
consisting of 5 seconds of sounding
followed by a 1-second pause. If either
of the unfastened seatbelts is fastened at
this time, the warning light corresponding
to that seatbelt will immediately turn off but
the buzzer will continue operating unless
the remaining seatbelt is fastened. This
condition (continued operation of the
buzzer unless the remaining seatbelt is
fastened) will continue for approximately
108 seconds.
NOTE
Front passengers warning light

. If the drivers and passengers seatbelts are not fastened simultaneously

(if one seatbelt is fastened significantly
earlier or later than the other), the
buzzer may sound longer (10 seconds
maximum).
. The occupant detection system of
the front passengers seat detects the
CONTINUED
Black plate (138,1)
3-16
passenger by the weight on the seat.

Therefore, if there is a heavy object on
the seat, the warning system to fasten
the seatbelt is activated.
. If you use a cushion on a passengers seat, there is the possibility that
the occupant detection system cannot
detect the passenger.
If the drivers seatbelt and/or the passengers seatbelt is still not fastened when the
108-second period has elapsed, the warning light(s) will stop flashing and the
light(s), however, will stay on continuously
unless the corresponding seatbelt(s) is
fastened.
warning device at the drivers seat.
will start a repeated cycle consisting of 5

seconds of sounding followed by a 1second pause. If the seatbelt is fastened
at this time, the warning light will turn off
and the buzzer will stop sounding immediately. This condition will continue for
This device causes the seatbelt warning

light on the combination meter to illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to
ON to remind the driver to wear the
seatbelt.
mph) with the drivers seatbelt not fastened, the warning light will illuminate and
mph) with the drivers seatbelt not fastened, the warning light will start a
repeated cycle consisting of 5 seconds
of flashing followed by 1 second of steady
illumination. At the same time, a buzzer
If the drivers seatbelt is still not fastened

when the 108-second period has elapsed,
the warning light will stop flashing and the
light, however, will stay on continuously
unless the seatbelt is fastened.
& SRS airbag system

warning light

ON position, the SRS airbag system
warning light will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds and turn off. This shows
the SRS airbag, SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag (if equipped) and seatbelt
pretensioners are in normal operation.
WARNING
have the system checked immedi-
Black plate (139,1)
ately by your nearest SUBARU dealer. Unless checked and properly

injury.
warning light
while driving
& Malfunction indicator

lamp (Check Engine
light)
! Vehicle equipped with OBD system

Vehicles sold in Europe are equipped with
an enhanced on-board diagnostics system called OBD that monitors the performance of the vehicles emission control
system.
3-17
Vehicles sold in some countries outside

Europe may be equipped with the OBD
system. We recommend that you ask your
SUBARU dealer to ascertain whether your
vehicle has the OBD system.
! If the light illuminates steadily:

If the light illuminates steadily while driving
or does not turn off after the engine starts,
an emission control system malfunction
has been detected.
The OBD system helps to protect the

environment by ensuring that emissions
are at acceptable levels for the life of the
vehicle.
We recommend that you have your

vehicle checked by an authorized
If the malfunction indicator lamp illuminates steadily or blinks while the engine is
running, it may indicate that there is a
problem or potential problem somewhere
in the emission control system and that
service is required. The OBD system also
assists your service technician in properly
diagnosing any malfunction.
CAUTION
If the malfunction indicator lamp
illuminates while you are driving,
we recommend that you have your
vehicle checked/repaired by your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. Continued vehicle operation
without having the emission control
system checked and repaired as
necessary could cause serious damage, which may not be covered by
your vehicles warranty.
! If the light is blinking:

If the light is blinking while driving, an
engine misfire condition has been detected which may damage the emission
control system.
To prevent serious damage to the emission control system, you should do the
following:
. Reduce vehicle speed.
. Avoid hard acceleration.
. Avoid steep uphill grades.
. Reduce the amount of cargo, if possible.
. Stop towing a trailer as soon as
possible.
The malfunction indicator lamp may stop
blinking and illuminate steadily after several driving trips. We recommend that you
have your vehicle checked by an authorized SUBARU dealer immediately.
CONTINUED
Black plate (140,1)
3-18
! Vehicle NOT equipped with OBD

system
If the malfunction indicator lamp illuminates when the engine is running, it may
indicate that there is a problem somewhere in the engine control system.
If the light illuminates while driving or does
not turn off after the engine starts, we
recommend that you contact your nearest
& Coolant temperature
low indicator light/Coolant temperature high

warning light
CAUTION
. After turning the ignition switch

to the ON position, if this
indicator light/warning light remains illuminated in RED for
approximately more than 1 second, the electrical system may be
malfunctioning. We recommend
that you contact your SUBARU
dealer immediately for inspection.
. If this indicator light/warning light
illuminates in RED while driving,
safely stop the vehicle as soon
as possible, and refer to the
emergency steps for the case of

engine overheating. After that,
we recommend that you have
the system checked by your
nearest SUBARU dealer. Refer
to In case of emergency in
chapter 9.
This coolant temperature low indicator
light/coolant temperature high warning
light has the following two functions:
. Illumination in BLUE indicates insufficient warming up of the engine
. Illumination in RED indicates overheating condition of the engine
For the system check, this indicator light/
warning light illuminates in red for approximately 2 seconds when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON position. After that,
this indicator light/warning light changes to
blue and maintains illumination in blue.
This blue illuminated light turns off when
the engine is warmed up sufficiently.
If the engine is overheated, this indicator
light/warning light illuminates in red immediately. At this time, safely stop the
vehicle as soon as possible, and refer to
the emergency steps for the case of
engine overheating. Refer to In case of
emergency in chapter 9. After that, we
recommend that you have the system
checked by your nearest SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
If the engine is restarted after a certain
driving condition, this indicator light/
warning light may illuminate in red.
However, this is not a malfunction if the
indicator light/warning light turns off
after a short time.
& Charge warning light

If this light illuminates when the engine is
running, it may indicate that the charging
system is not working properly.
not turn off after the engine starts, stop the
engine at the first safe opportunity and
check the alternator belt. If the belt is
loose, broken or if the belt is in good
condition but the light remains illuminated,
nearest SUBARU dealer immediately.
& Oil pressure warning

light

running, it may indicate that the engine oil
pressure is low and the lubricating system
is not working properly.
Black plate (141,1)
not turn off after the engine starts, stop the

engine at the first safe opportunity and
check the engine oil level. If the oil level is
low, add oil immediately. If the engine oil is
at the proper level but the light remains
illuminated, we recommend that you contact your nearest SUBARU dealer immediately.
CAUTION
oil pressure warning light on. This
may cause serious engine damage.
& AT OIL TEMP warning

light (AT vehicles)
The AT oil temperature warning light AT

OIL TEMP illuminates when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position and
turns off after the engine has started.
running, it may indicate that the automatic
transmission fluid temperature is too hot.
If the light illuminates while driving, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place
and let the engine idle until the warning
light turns off.
! Automatic transmission control

system warning
If the AT OIL TEMP warning light flashes
after the engine starts, it may indicate that
the automatic transmission control system
is not working properly. We recommend
that you contact your nearest SUBARU
dealer for service immediately.
& Rear differential oil
temperature warning
light (if equipped)

running, it may indicate that the rear
differential oil temperature is too hot.
If the light illuminates while driving, reduce
vehicle speed and stop the vehicle at the
nearest safe place.
Park the vehicle for several minutes. After
the light turns off, you can start driving.
CAUTION
Reduce the vehicle speed and park
the vehicle at a safe place as soon
as possible if the R.DIFF TEMP
warning light illuminates. Sustained
driving with this light on can cause
the rear differential to be damaged.
3-19
& ABS warning light

The ABS warning light illuminates when
the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position and turns off after the engine has
started.
This is an indication that the ABS system
is working properly.
CAUTION
If the warning light behaves as
follows, the ABS system may not
work properly.
When the warning light is on (and
brake system warning light is off),
the ABS function shuts down; however, the conventional brake system
continues to operate normally.
. The warning light does not illuminate when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON position.
. The warning light illuminates
when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position, but
it does not turn off even when the
vehicle speed exceeds approximately 12 km/h (8 mph).
. The warning light illuminates during driving.
If any of these conditions occur, we
recommend that you have the ABS
CONTINUED
Black plate (142,1)
3-20
system repaired at the first available

opportunity by your SUBARU dealer.
With a vehicle equipped with an ABS
system, the ABS warning light illuminates
together with the brake system warning
light if the EBD system becomes faulty.
For further details of the EBD system fault
warning, refer to the Brake system warning light section.
NOTE
If the warning light behavior is as
shown in the following, the ABS system may be considered normal.
. The warning light illuminates right
after the engine is started but turns off
immediately, remaining off.
. The warning light remains illuminated after the engine has been started,
but it turns off when the vehicle speed
reaches approximately 12 km/h (8
mph).
. The warning light illuminates during
driving, but it turns off immediately and
remains off.
When driving with an insufficient battery
voltage such as when the engine is jump
started, the ABS warning light may illuminate. This is due to the low battery voltage
and does not indicate a malfunction.
When the battery becomes fully charged,

the light will turn off.
& Vehicle Dynamics
Control warning light/

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light
This warning light has both the function of

indicating faults in the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system and the function of indicating that the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system has been deactivated.
It illuminates in the event of a fault in the
system and is on when the system is not
operating.
This warning light illuminates when the
position and turns off after the engine
has started. It indicates that the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system is in normal
operation.
! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning
light
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
probably inoperative under any of the
following conditions. We recommend that
you have your vehicle checked at a
. The warning light does not illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position.
. The warning light illuminates while the
vehicle is running.
. If the electrical circuit of the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system itself becomes
faulty, the warning light only illuminates. At
this time, the ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) remains fully operational.
. The warning light illuminates when the
electronic control system of the ABS/
Vehicle Dynamics Control system becomes faulty.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system
provides its ABS control through the
electrical circuit of the ABS system.
Accordingly, if the ABS is inoperative, the
Vehicle Dynamics Control system becomes unable to provide ABS control. As
a result, the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system also becomes inoperative, causing the warning light to illuminate. Though
both the Vehicle Dynamics Control and
ABS systems are inoperative in this case,
the ordinary functions of the brake system
are still available. You will be safe while
driving with this condition, but we recommend that you have your vehicle checked
at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
Black plate (143,1)
NOTE
shown in the following, the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system may be considered normal.
. The warning light illuminates after
engine startup and turns off while the
vehicle is subsequently being driven.
remains off.
! Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light
. It illuminates when the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch is pressed.
. It also illuminates when the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system is deactivated.
NOTE
. The light may stay on for a while
after the engine has been started,
especially in cold weather. This does
not indicate the existence of a problem.
The light should turn off as soon as the
engine has warmed up.
. The indicator light illuminates when
the engine has developed a problem
and the malfunction indicator lamp is
on.
probably faulty under the following condition. We recommend that you have your
vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
. The light does not turn off even after
the lapse of several minutes (the engine
has warmed up) after the engine has
started.
& Brake system warning

light
WARNING
. Driving with the brake system
warning light on is dangerous.
This indicates your brake system
may not be working properly. If
the light remains illuminated, we
recommend that you have the
brakes inspected by a SUBARU
dealer immediately.
. If at all in doubt about whether
the brakes are operating properly, do not drive the vehicle. We
recommend that you have your
vehicle towed to the nearest
SUBARU dealer for repair.
This light has the following three functions:
3-21
! Parking brake warning

The light illuminates with the parking
brake applied while the ignition switch is
in the ON position. It turns off when the
parking brake is fully released.
! Brake fluid level warning
This light illuminates when the brake fluid
level has dropped to near the MIN level
of the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition
switch in the ON position and with the
parking brake fully released.
If the brake system warning light should
illuminate while driving (with the parking
brake fully released and with the ignition
switch positioned in ON), it could be an
indication of leaking of brake fluid or worn
brake pads. If this occurs, immediately
stop the vehicle at the nearest safe place
and check the brake fluid level. If the fluid
level is below the MIN mark in the
reservoir, do not drive the vehicle. We
recommend that you have the vehicle
towed to the nearest SUBARU dealer for
repair.
! Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD) system warning
The brake system warning light also
illuminates if a malfunction occurs in the
EBD system. In that event, it illuminates
together with the ABS warning light.
CONTINUED
Black plate (144,1)
3-22
The EBD system may be malfunctioning if

the brake system warning light and ABS
warning light illuminate simultaneously
during driving.
Even if the EBD system fails, the conventional braking system will still function.
However, the rear wheels will be more
prone to locking when the brakes are
applied harder than usual and the vehicles motion may therefore become somewhat harder to control.
If the brake system warning light and ABS
warning light illuminate simultaneously,
take the following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe,
flat place.
2. Shut down the engine, apply the
parking brake, and then restart it.
3. Release the parking brake. If both
warning lights turn off, the EBD system
may be faulty.
We recommend that you drive carefully to
the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the
system inspected.
4. If both warning lights illuminate again
and stay illuminated after the engine has
been restarted, shut down the engine
again, apply the parking brake, and check
the brake fluid level.
5. If the brake fluid level is not below the
MIN mark, the EBD system may be
faulty. We recommend that you drive

carefully to the nearest SUBARU dealer
and have the system inspected.
6. If the brake fluid level is below the
MIN mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle.
Instead, we recommend that you have the
vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU
dealer for repair.
& Low fuel warning light

The low fuel warning light illuminates
when the tank is nearly empty approximately 9.0 liters (2.3 US gal, or 1.9 Imp
gal). It only operates when the ignition
switch is in the ON position. When this
light illuminates, fill the fuel tank immediately.
NOTE
This light does not turn off unless the
tank is replenished up to an internal
fuel quantity of approximately 14 liters
(3.7 US gal, 3.1 Imp gal).
CAUTION
Turbo models only:
Promptly put fuel in the tank whenever the low fuel warning light
illuminates. Engine misfires as a
result of an empty tank could cause
damage to the engine.
& Hill start assist warning

light (MT vehicles)

ON position, the Hill start assist warning
light illuminates. After the engine starts it
will turn off. While the engine is rotating, if
any malfunction is detected in the hill start
assist system control, the warning light will
illuminate.
WARNING
When the Hill start assist warning
light illuminates, we recommend
that you have the vehicle inspected
immediately at an authorized
SUBARU dealer.
Black plate (145,1)
& Door open warning

light
The door open warning light illuminates if

any door or the rear gate is not fully
closed.
Always make sure this light is out before
you start to drive.
& All-Wheel Drive warn-
ing light (AT vehicles)
The All-Wheel Drive warning light illuminates when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position and turns off after the
engine has started.
This light illuminates when All-Wheel
Drive is disengaged and the drive mechanism is switched to Front Wheel Drive
for maintenance or similar purposes.
It flashes if the vehicle is driven with tires
of differing diameters fitted on the wheels
or with an excessively low air pressure in
any of the tires.
CAUTION
Continuing to drive with the AWD
warning light flashing can damage
the powertrain. If the AWD warning
light starts to flash, promptly park in
a safe place and check whether the
tires have differing diameters and
whether any of the tires has an

excessively low inflation pressure.
& Power steering warn-
ing light (if equipped)
3-23
order to prevent the system from overheating. At this time, there will be more
resistance when steering. However this
is not a malfunction. The normal steering force will be restored after a short
time.
This warning light illuminates when the

position and turns off after the engine
has started. This indicates that the warning system is working properly.
& Automatic headlight
While the engine is running, this warning

light illuminates when a malfunction has
been detected in the electric power steering system.
The automatic headlight beam leveler

warning light illuminates when the ignition
turns off after approximately 3 seconds.
This light illuminates when the automatic
headlight beam leveler does not operate
normally.
If this light illuminates while driving or does
not turn off approximately 3 seconds after
turning the ignition switch to the ON
position, we recommend that you have
your vehicle inspected at your SUBARU
dealer.
CAUTION
When the power steering warning
light is illuminated, there may be
more resistance when the steering
wheel is operated. We recommend
that you drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the
vehicle inspected immediately.
beam leveler warning

light (vehicles with HID
headlights)
NOTE
If the steering wheel is operated frequently while the vehicle is stopped,
the power steering control system may
temporarily limit the power assist in
CONTINUED
Black plate (146,1)
3-24
& Access key warning light

(vehicle with keyless access
with push-button start system)
NOTE
. Carry the access key, and press the
push-button ignition switch.
. Even when the access key is within
the operating ranges inside the vehicle,
the access key warning may be provided depending on the status of the
access key and the environmental
conditions.
! Access key warning
When the vehicle is driven while the
access key is not inside the vehicle, a
chirp sound will be heard. At the same
flash.
NOTE
This light illuminates when the power is
switched to ON and turns off approximately 2 seconds later.
When the access key is not inside the
vehicle or is under such irregular conditions, the access key warning light on the
combination meter flashes.
! Engine start warning
Access key warning indication
pressed while the access key is not inside
the vehicle, a chirp sound will be heard,
and the access key warning light will flash.

vehicle.
! Access key takeout warning
When the driver exits the vehicle with the
access key and closes the drivers door
while the power is in a position other than
OFF, a chirp sound will be heard, and
the access key warning light will flash.
NOTE
. Switch the power to OFF, and exit
the vehicle (MT vehicles).
. Shift the selector lever to the P
position, switch the power to OFF,
and exit the vehicle (AT vehicles).

! Passenger access key takeout
warning
When another passenger exits the vehicle
with the access key and closes a door
other than the drivers door while the
power is in a position other than OFF,
the warning chime will sound. At the same
flash.
NOTE
stop.
& Keyless access with pushbutton start system malfunction warning

In case the keyless access with pushbutton start system has a malfunction, the
ignition switch flashes in orange.
Black plate (147,1)
3-25
CAUTION
When the operation indicator
flashes in orange, we recommend
that you contact a SUBARU dealer
immediately.
NOTE
For China models, the outside warning
chime will not sound.
CONTINUED
Black plate (148,1)
3-26
! List of warnings
Inside warning
chime
Ding,
ding ...
(intermittent)
Outside warning
chime
Short beep
(2 seconds)
Beep
(10 seconds)
Long beep (60

seconds max.)
Ding
Access key
warning light on
meter

switch
Status
Action
The drivers door was opened while

the power is Acc (in AT vehicles,
position).
Switch the power to OFF, or close

the drivers door.
*When exiting the vehicle, be sure
to switch the power to OFF.
The power was switched to OFF

while the drivers door is open.
Close the drivers door.
An attempt was made to lock all

doors while the access key is left
inside the vehicle.

*The doors cannot be locked while
the access key is inside the vehicle.
*A chirp sound will be heard, and all
doors will be unlocked.

pressed while the power is OFF
and the access key is inside the
vehicle.

*If the access key is inside the
vehicle, the doors cannot be locked.
The push-button ignition switch is

pushed while the ignition switch is
in the OFF position and one of the
doors including the rear gate is
opened.
Close the doors securely and lock

them.
*If one of the doors including the
rear gate is opened, the doors
cannot be locked.

pressed while carrying the access
key and the power is in a position
other than OFF (in AT vehicles,
position).
Return the access key inside the

vehicle, or switch the power to
OFF.
*If the power is not switched to
OFF, the doors cannot be locked.
The vehicle was driven while the

access key is not inside the vehicle. vehicle.
Black plate (149,1)
Inside warning
chime
Outside warning
chime
Ding
Ding
Beep, beep,
beep (3 times)
Ding
Beep, beep,
beep (3 times)
Access key
warning light on
meter
(Flashes 1 sec.
intermittent)
(Flashes 1 sec.
intermittent)
(Flashes 1 sec.
intermittent)

switch
Status
3-27
Action
The push-button ignition switch was Carry the access key, and press the
pressed while the access key is not push-button ignition switch.
inside the vehicle.

drivers door while the power is in a Switch the power to OFF, and get
position other than OFF (in AT
out of the vehicle.
vehicles, when the selector lever is
in the P position).
A fellow passenger exited the veReturn the access key to inside the
hicle with the access key and
closed a door other than the drivers vehicle, or switch the power to
door while the power is in a position OFF.
other than OFF.

the selector lever to the P
drivers door while the power is in a Shift
position, switch the power to OFF
position other than OFF and the
selector lever is in a position other and exit the vehicle.
than the P position.
Long beep
(continuous)
Long beep
(continuous)
Long beep
(continuous)
The drivers door was opened while Shift the selector lever to the P
the power is in a position other than position, switch the power to OFF
OFF and the selector lever is in a
position other than the P position. and exit the vehicle.
Ding
the battery of the access

The battery of the access key is low. Replace
key.
(Flashes 1 sec.
intermittent)
Flashes in green The engine start procedure was

(15 seconds
performed, but the steering is still
max.)
locked.
While turning the steering wheel

right and left lightly, depress the
brake pedal and press the pushbutton ignition switch.
CONTINUED
Black plate (150,1)
3-28
Inside warning
chime
Outside warning
chime
Access key
warning light on
meter

switch
Status
Action
Flashes in orange
A malfunction was detected in the

power system or steering lock.
We recommend that you contact a

SUBARU dealer immediately and
have the vehicle inspected.
Black plate (151,1)
& Vehicle Dynamics
Control operation indicator light
This light illuminates when the ignition

switch is ON and turns off approximately 2
seconds later.
It blinks when the skid suppression function is activated. It illuminates when only
the traction control function is operating.
probably faulty under any of the following
conditions. We recommend that you have
your vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer
immediately.
. The light does not illuminate when the
position.
. The light does not turn off even after a
period of approximately 2 seconds after
the ignition switch has been turned to the
ON position.
& Immobilizer indicator

light
This light begins flashing approximately

60 seconds after the ignition switch is
turned from ON position to the Acc or
LOCK position or right after the key is
pulled out. Refer to the Immobilizer
section in chapter 2.
If the indicator light does not blink, it may

indicate that immobilizer system is not
working properly. We recommend that you
contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
immediately.
3-29
& Selector lever and gear position indicator (AT vehicles)
In case an unauthorized key is used, the

immobilizer indicator light illuminates.
& SPORT mode indicator

light (AT vehicles)
This light illuminates when the ignition

turns off after the engine has started.
When the selector lever is moved to the
manual gate, the SPORT mode is selected and the indicator light illuminates.
Refer to the Automatic transmission
This indicator shows the position of the

selector lever.
When the manual mode is selected, the
gear position indicator (which shows the
current gear selection) and the upshift/
downshift indicator light up. Refer to the
Automatic transmission section in chapter 7.
& LO position indicator
light (dual range MT vehicles)
This light illuminates when Hi-Lo select

lever is set at Lo position.
CONTINUED
Black plate (152,1)
3-30
& Turn signal indicator

lights
These lights show the operation of the turn

signal or lane change signal.
If the indicator lights do not blink or blink
rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burned
out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Refer to the Replacing bulbs section in
chapter 11.
& High beam indicator

light
This light shows that the headlights are in

the high beam mode.
This indicator light also illuminates when
the headlight flasher is operated.
& Cruise control indicator light (if equipped)
The cruise control indicator light illuminates when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position and turns off after
This light illuminates when the CRUISE
main switch is pressed.
NOTE
. If you press the main switch button
while turning the ignition switch ON,
the cruise control function is deacti-
vated and the cruise control indicator

light flashes. To reactivate the cruise
control function, turn the ignition
switch back to the Acc or LOCK
position, and then turn it again to the
ON position.
. If this indicator light and the malfunction indicator lamp flash
simultaneously during driving, we recommend that you have the vehicle
checked by your nearest SUBARU
dealer.
& Front fog light indicator

light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates while the

front fog lights are illuminated.
& Rear fog light indicator

light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates while the

rear fog lights are illuminated.
& Cruise control set indicator light (if

equipped)
The cruise control set indicator light

illuminates when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position and turns off
after approximately 3 seconds.
This light illuminates when vehicle speed
has been set.
& Headlight indicator

light
This indicator light illuminates when the

or
light control switch is placed in the
position.
Black plate (153,1)
NOTE
Clock
If the battery is disconnected, the time

will be erased. After reconnecting the
battery, set the correct time.
3-31
Information display
The time changes by 1 minute each time

the + button or button is pressed.
Pressing the + button moves the displayed time forward, while pressing the
button moves the displayed time back.
Pressing and holding either button
changes the displayed time continuously.
1)
2)
Outside temperature indicator

Average fuel consumption indicator
With the ignition switch in the ON

position, the outside temperature and
average fuel consumption are indicated
on the display.
CAUTION
To ensure safety, do not attempt to
set the time during driving, as an
accident from inadequate attention
to the road could result.
CONTINUED
Black plate (154,1)
3-32
& Outside temperature indicator
! Road surface freeze warning indication
NOTE
The outside temperature indication
may differ from the actual outside
temperature. The road surface freeze
warning indication should be treated
only as a guide. Be sure to check the
condition of the road surface before
driving.
& Average fuel consumption
The outside temperature indicator shows

the outside temperature in a range from
30 to 508C (22 to 1228F).
The indicator can give a false reading
under any of the following conditions:
. When there is too much sun.
. During idling; while running at low
speeds in a traffic jam; when the engine
is restarted immediately following a shutdown.
. When the actual outside temperature
falls outside the specified indicator range.
When the outside temperature drops to

38C (378F) or lower, the temperature
indication flashes to show that the road
surface may be frozen.
If the outside temperature drops to 38C
(378F) or lower while the display is giving
an indication other than the outside
temperature, the display switches to the
outside temperature indication and flashes
for 5 seconds before returning to its
original indication.
If the display is already indicating an
outside temperature of 38C (378F) or lower
ON position, the indication does not
flash.
This indication shows the average rate of

fuel consumption since the trip meter was
last reset.
Pressing the trip knob toggles the indication between the average fuel consumption corresponding to the A trip meter
indication and the average fuel consumption corresponding to the B trip meter
Black plate (155,1)
indication.
When either of the trip meter indications is
reset, the corresponding average fuel
consumption value is also reset.
NOTE
. The displayed unit varies depending
on the destination.
. The indicated values vary in accordance with changes in the vehicles
running conditions. Also, the indicated
values may differ slightly from the
actual values and should thus be
treated only as a guide.
. When either trip meter indication is
reset, the average fuel consumption
corresponding to that trip meter indication is not shown until the vehicle has
subsequently covered a distance of 1
km (or 1 mile).
Light control switch

The light control switch only operates
when the ignition key is inserted into the
ignition switch.
Regardless of the position of the light
control switch, the illuminated lights are
turned off when the ignition key is
removed from the ignition switch.
3-33
than OFF, the battery may be

discharged.
& Headlights
NOTE
Even if the ignition key is removed
from the ignition switch, the lights can
be illuminated by operating the light
control switch from OFF to the

or position. In this case, if the
drivers door is opened, the chirp
sound will inform the driver that the
lights are illuminated.
CAUTION
. Use of any lights for a long period
of time while the engine is not
running can cause the battery to
discharge.
. Before leaving the vehicle, make
sure that the light control switch
is turned to the OFF position. If
the vehicle is left unattended for
a long time with the light control
switch set to a position other
To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on

the end of the turn signal lever.
first position
Front position lights, instrument panel
illumination, tail lights and license plate
lights are on.
second position
Headlights, front position lights, instrument panel illumination, tail lights, and
license plate lights are on.
CONTINUED
Black plate (156,1)
3-34
& High/low beam change (dimmer)
To change from low beam to high beam,

push the turn signal lever forward. When
the headlights are on high beam, the high
beam indicator light on the combination meter also illuminates.
To switch back to low beam, pull the lever
back to the detent position.
& Headlight flasher
To flash the headlights, pull the lever

toward you and then release it. The high
beam will stay on for as long as you hold
the lever. The headlight flasher works
even though the light switch is in the
OFF position.
When the headlights are on high beam,
the high beam indicator light on the
combination meter also illuminates.
CAUTION
Do not hold the lever in the flashing
position for more than just a few
seconds.
Turn signal lever
To activate the right turn signal, push the

turn signal lever up. To activate the left
turn signal, push the turn signal lever
down. When the turn is finished, the lever
will return automatically. If the lever does
not return after cornering, return the lever
to the neutral position by hand.
To signal a lane change, push the turn
signal lever up or down slightly and hold it
during the lane change. The turn signal
indicator lights will flash in the direction of
the turn or lane change. The lever will
return automatically to the neutral position
when you release it.
Black plate (157,1)
NOTE
For a vehicle that has the turn signal
lever equipped on the right side of the
steering wheel, the pushing direction
of the turn signal lever is opposite of
that described here.
Illumination brightness control
3-35
at all.
. The brightness setting is not canceled even when the ignition switch is
turned to the OFF position.
The brightness of clock display, audio, air

conditioner, information display and instrument panel illumination dims when the
or
light switch is in the

positions. You can adjust brightness of
the instrument panel illumination for better
visibility.
To brighten, turn the control dial upward.
To darken, turn the control dial downward.
NOTE
. When the control dial is turned fully
upward, the illumination brightness
becomes the maximum and the automatic dimming function does not work
Black plate (158,1)
3-36
Headlight beam leveler (if

equipped)
& Automatic headlight beam
leveler (vehicles with HID
headlights)
The HID headlights generate more light
than conventional halogen headlights.
Therefore a driver of an oncoming vehicle
may experience too much glare when your
headlight beam height adjustment is high
due to the vehicle carrying heavy load.
The automatic headlight beam leveler
adjusts the headlight beam height automatically and optimally according to the
load being carried by the vehicle.
& Manual headlight beam leveler (vehicles without HID

headlights, if equipped)
Adjust the headlight beam level with the

following dial positions according to the
number of passengers and load condition.
Black plate (159,1)
Switch position
Number of front seat

occupants
1 or 2
Number of rear seat

occupants
Load in the luggage

compartment area
Trailer towing
No load
No
No load
No
Full load*
No
Full load*
No
Full load*
Yes
Full load*
Yes
Not apply
Not apply
Not apply
Not apply
3-37
*: Up to maximum permissible weight.
Black plate (160,1)
3-38
The rear fog lights operate only when the

light switch is in the position or the
front fog lights are on.
The indicator light located on the combination meter will illuminate when the rear
fog lights are on.
Fog light switch

& Front fog light switch (if
equipped)
The indicator light located on the combination meter will illuminate when the front
fog lights are on.
The front fog lights operate only when the
or position.
light switch is in the
To turn on the front fog lights, turn the fog
light switch on the turn signal lever upward
to the position. To turn off the front fog
lights, turn the switch back down to the
OFF position.
& Rear fog light switch (if

equipped)
Vehicle with front fog lights:
To turn on the rear fog lights, turn the fog
to the position. The switch will return
to the position when released.
To turn off the rear fog lights, either turn
the switch upward back to the position
or turn it downward to the OFF position.
Black plate (161,1)
ignition switch (except vehicles with

the Keyless access with push-button
start system).
. The push-button ignition switch is
turned off (vehicles with the Keyless
access with push-button start system).
Vehicle without front fog lights:

To turn on the rear fog lights, turn the fog
to the position. The switch will return
to the OFF position when released. To
turn off the rear fog lights, turn the switch
to the position again.
NOTE (Europe and Australia

models)
To prevent switching off the rear fog
light from being forgotten, the rear fog
light circuit is designed so that it turns
off whenever one of the following
operations is performed.
. The light switch is set to either the
or OFF position.
. The ignition key is removed from the
However, this does not mean that the

rear fog light illuminates when the light
switch is set to position or the
ignition switch is turned to ON position again. So, if you want to reilluminate the rear fog light, turn the switch
upward again.
3-39
Wiper and washer

WARNING
In freezing weather, do not use the
windshield washer until the windshield is sufficiently warmed by the
defroster.
Otherwise the washer fluid can
freeze on the windshield, blocking
your view.
CAUTION
. Do not operate the washer continuously for more than 10 seconds, or when the washer fluid
tank is empty. This may cause
overheating of the washer motor.
Check the washer fluid level
frequently, such as at fuel stops.
. Do not operate the wipers when
the windshield or rear window is
dry. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades and
cause the wiper motor to burn
out. Before operating the wiper
on a dry windshield or rear
window, always use the windshield washer.
CONTINUED
Black plate (162,1)
3-40
. In freezing weather, be sure that

the wiper blades are not frozen to
the windshield or rear window
before switching on the wipers.
Attempting to operate the wiper
with the blades frozen to the
window glass could cause not
only the wiper blades to be
damaged but also the wiper motor to burn out. If the wiper
blades are frozen to the window
glass, be sure to operate the
defroster, windshield wiper deicer (if equipped) or rear window
defogger before turning on the
wiper.
. If the wipers stop during operation because of ice or some other
obstruction on the window, the
wiper motor could burn out even
if the wiper switch is turned off. If
this occurs, promptly stop the
vehicle in a safe place, turn the
ignition switch to the LOCK
position and clean the window
glass to allow proper wiper operation.
. Use clean water if windshield
washer fluid is unavailable. In
areas where water freezes in
winter, use SUBARU Windshield
Washer Fluid or the equivalent.
Refer to the Windshield washer

fluid section in chapter 11.
Also, when driving the vehicle
when there are freezing temperatures, use non-freezing type wiper blades.
. Do not clean the wiper blades
with gasoline or a solvent, such
as paint thinner or benzine. This
will cause deterioration of the
wiper blades.
NOTE
. The wiper operates only when the
ignition switch is in the ON or Acc
position.
. The front wiper motor is protected
against overloads by a circuit breaker.
If the motor operates continuously
under an unusually heavy load, the
circuit breaker may trip to stop the
motor temporarily. If this happens, park
your vehicle in a safe place, turn off the
wiper switch, and wait for approximately 10 minutes. The circuit breaker
will reset itself, and the wipers will
again operate normally.
. Clean your wiper blades and window glass periodically with a washer
solution to prevent streaking, and to
remove accumulations of road salt or
road film. Keep the washer button

depressed at least for 1 second so that
washer solution will be sprinkled all
over the windshield or rear window.
. Grease, wax, insects or other material on the windshield or the wiper
blade results in jerky wiper operation
and streaking on the glass. If you
cannot remove those streaks after
operating the washer or if the wiper
operation is jerky, clean the outer surface of the windshield or rear window
and the wiper blades using a sponge or
soft cloth with a neutral detergent or
mild-abrasive cleaner. After cleaning,
rinse the window glass and wiper
blades with clean water. The glass is
clean if no beads form on the glass
when you rinse with water.
. If you cannot eliminate the streaking
even after following this procedure,
replace the wiper blades with new
ones. Refer to the Replacement of
wiper blades section in chapter 11 for
replacement instructions.
Black plate (163,1)
& Windshield wiper and washer

switches
! Wiper intermittent time control
3-41
! Mist (for a single wipe)
The wiper operates only when the ignition

switch is in the ON or Acc position.
! Windshield wipers
OFF: Park
: Intermittent
LO: Low speed
HI: High speed
When the wiper switch is in the

position, turn the dial to adjust the operating interval of the wiper.
The operating interval can be adjusted in
nine steps.
For a single wipe of the wipers, pull the

lever toward you. The wipers operate until
you release the lever.
To turn the wipers on, push the wiper

control lever down.
To turn the wipers off, return the lever to
the OFF position.
CONTINUED
Black plate (164,1)
3-42
! Washer
& Rear window wiper and

washer switch
The wiper operates only when the ignition
switch is in the ON or Acc position.
To wash the windshield, push the washer

button at the end of the wiper control lever.
The washer fluid sprays until you release
the washer button. The wipers operate
while you push the button.
NOTE
If your vehicle is equipped with a
headlight washer, pressing the windshield washer button for more than 1
second also causes the headlight
washer to operate when the headlight
switch is in the position. For
further details, refer to the Headlight
washer section in this chapter.
: Washer (accompanied by wiper operation)

ON: Continuous
INT: Intermittent
OFF: Park
: Washer
! Rear wiper
To turn the rear wiper on, turn the knob on
the end of the wiper control lever upward
to the INT or ON position.
To turn the wiper off, return the knob on
the end of the lever to the OFF position.
With the switch turned to the INT
position, the rear wiper will operate intermittently at intervals corresponding to the
vehicle speed (longer when the vehicle

speed is low; shorter when the vehicle
speed is high).
When you subsequently move the selector lever of the automatic transmission to
the R position, the rear wiper will switch
to continuous operation. When you move
the selector lever from the R position to
some other position, the rear wiper will
return to intermittent operation.
! Washer
To wash the rear window while the rear
wiper is operating, turn the knob on the
end of the wiper control lever upward to
the position. The washer fluid sprays
until you release the knob.
To wash the rear window when the rear
wiper is not in use, turn the knob on the
end of the wiper control lever downward to
the position. The washer fluid sprays
and the wiper operates until you release
the knob.
NOTE
When the amount of washer fluid is
getting low, the rear washer fluid will
first be stopped. This means that the
amount of washer fluid is low, and it
should be added immediately.
Black plate (165,1)
Rear window defogger button
Vehicle with automatic climate control

system
Vehicle with manual climate control system
The rear window defogger operates only

when the ignition switch is in the ON
position. It is the same button as the
windshield wiper deicer (if equipped).
The rear window defogger button is
located on the climate control panel.
To turn on the defogger, push the button.
To turn it off, push the button again.
The indicator light located on the button
lights up while the rear window defogger is
operating.
The defogger will automatically shut off
after approximately 15 minutes. If the
window clears before that time, push the
button to turn it off. It also turns off when
the ignition switch is turned to the Acc or
3-43
LOCK position. If defrosting or defogging

is desired when you restart your vehicle,
you have to push the button to turn it on
again.
If you wish, you can set the rear window
defogger for continuous operation.
The rear window defogger setting can be
changed for continuous operation by
means of the monitor. For details, please
for the navigation system.
details.
navigation system:
details.
Once the rear window defogger has been
set for continuous operation, the rear
window defogger repeatedly operates for
15 minutes, stops for 2 minutes, and again
operates for 15 minutes. If the battery
voltage drops below the permissible level,
continuous operation is canceled and
operation stops as described below.
CONTINUED
Black plate (166,1)
3-44
. If the battery voltage drops below the

permissible level within 15 minutes of
depression of the button, continuous
operation is canceled and the rear window
defogger stops operating 15 minutes later.
. If the battery voltage drops below the
permissible level after the rear window
defogger has, following depression of the
button, operated for 15 minutes, stopped
operating for 2 minutes, and started
operating again, the rear window defogger
immediately stops operating.
NOTE
. If your vehicle is equipped with the
outside mirror defogger, the outside
mirror defogger operates while the rear
window defogger is operating.
. Turn on the rear window defogger if
the wiper is frozen to the glass.
Windshield wiper deicer (if

equipped)
CAUTION
. Do not use sharp instruments or
window cleaner containing abrasives to clean the inner surface
of the rear window. They may
damage the conductors printed
on the window.
. To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not operate the
defogger continuously for any
longer than necessary.
Black plate (167,1)

system
The windshield wiper deicer operates only

position.
Before turning on the windshield wiper
deicer, remove any snow from the windshield. To turn on the windshield wiper
deicer, push the button. The indicator light
located on the button lights up while the
windshield wiper deicer is operating.
The windshield wiper deicer will automatically shut off after approximately 15
minutes. If the windshield wiper blades
have been deiced completely before that
time, push the button to turn it off. It also
turns off when the ignition switch is turned
to the Acc or LOCK position. If deicing
is not complete, you have to push the
button to turn the deicer on again.

If you wish, you can set the windshield
wiper deicer for continuous operation.
The windshield wiper deicer setting can be
changed for continuous operation by
means of the monitor. For details, please
for the navigation system.
details.
navigation system:
details.
3-45
. The battery voltage decreases below

the permissible level.
CAUTION
To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not operate the
windshield wiper deicer continuously for any longer than necessary.
NOTE
If your vehicle is equipped with the
outside mirror defogger, the outside
mirror defogger operates while the
windshield wiper deicer is operating.
Once the windshield wiper deicer has

been set for continuous operation, pressing the button results in continuous operation. The windshield wiper deicer automatically stops operating if any one of the
following conditions occurs during continuous operation.
. The outside temperature becomes 58C
(418F) or higher.
. The vehicle speed remains at 15 km/h
(9 mph) or lower for 15 minutes.
Black plate (168,1)
3-46
Headlight washer (if

equipped)
CAUTION
Do not operate the washer if the
washer fluid tank is empty. This may
cause overheating of the washer
motor. Check washer fluid level
frequently, such as at fuel stops.
Mirrors
Always check that the inside and outside
mirrors are properly adjusted before you
start driving.
& Inside mirror
NOTE
When the area around the nozzle cover
of the headlight washer is frozen,
remove the ice before using.
With the ignition switch in the ON

position and the headlight switch in the
position, the windshield washer
operates first when you press the windshield washer button. If you continue
pressing the button for more than 1
second, the headlight washer then operates together with the windshield washer.
The windshield washer stops spraying
washer fluid as soon as you release the
windshield washer button. The headlight
washer sprays the washer fluid for approximately 1 second and then stops
automatically.
The inside mirror has a day and night

position. Pull the tab at the bottom of the
mirror toward you for the night position.
Push it away for the day position. The
night position reduces glare from headlights.
Black plate (169,1)
& Outside mirrors
! Remote control mirror switch
3-47
! Power folding mirror switch (if

equipped)
! Convex mirror
WARNING
Objects look smaller in a convex
mirror and farther away than when
viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use
the convex mirror to judge the
distance of vehicles behind you
when changing lanes. Use the inside
mirror (or glance backwards) to
determine the actual size and distance of objects that you view in
convex mirror.
1)
2)
Selection switch
Direction control switch
The remote control mirrors operate only

when the ignition switch is in the ON or
Acc position.
1. Press either end of the selection
switch, L for the left, R for the right.
2. Move the direction control switch in the
direction you want to move the mirror.
3. Return the selection switch to the
neutral position to prevent unintentional
operation.
The mirrors can also be adjusted manually.
The power folding mirror switch operates

only when the ignition switch is in the ON
or Acc position.
To fold the outside mirrors, push the power
folding mirror switch. To unfold the mirrors,
push the switch again.
NOTE
. When the temperature is low, the
outside mirrors may stop during operation. Push the switch again. When the
outside mirrors do not work by switch
operation, move them several times by
manually. This makes it possible to
operate them by switch operation.
. When you operate the power folding
mirror switch continuously, it may not
CONTINUED
Black plate (170,1)
3-48
LOCK position. If defrosting or defogging

is desired when you restart your vehicle,
you have to push the button to turn it on
again.
work. This is not a malfunction. Operate after waiting for a short period of
time.
. When you unfold the outside mirrors
manually, the mirrors may become
wobbly. Be sure to unfold the mirrors
by switch operation. If the outside
mirrors are still wobbly, fold the mirrors
again and then unfold them by switch
operation.
CAUTION
To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not operate the defogger continuously for any longer
than necessary.
! Outside mirror defogger (if

equipped)
system
The outside mirror defogger shares the

button with rear window defogger.
The outside mirror defogger operates only
position.
To turn on the outside mirror defogger,
push the button.
To turn it off, push the button again. The
indicator light located on the button lights
up while the outside mirror defogger is
operating.
NOTE
. While the outside mirror defogger is
operating, the rear window defogger
also operates.
. When the rear window defogger has
been set for continuous operation, the
outside mirror defogger also operates
continuously. Refer to the Rear window defogger button section in this
chapter.
The defogger will automatically shut off

after approximately 15 minutes. If the
mirror clears before that time, push the
button to turn it off. It also turns off when
the ignition switch is turned to the Acc or
Black plate (171,1)
Tilt/telescopic steering wheel

WARNING
. Do not adjust the steering wheel
tilt/telescopic position while driving. This may cause loss of
vehicle control and result in
personal injury.
. If the lever cannot be raised to
the fixed position, adjust the
steering wheel again. It is dangerous to drive without locking
the steering wheel. This may
cause loss of vehicle control
and result in personal injury.
Front seats section in chapter 1.

2. Pull the tilt/telescopic lock lever down.
3. Move the steering wheel to the desired
level.
4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering
wheel in place.
5. Make sure that the steering wheel is
securely locked by moving it up and down,
and forward and backward.
3-49
Horn
To sound the horn, push the horn pad.
1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to the
Black plate (7,1)
Climate control
Ventilator..............................................................
4-2
Air flow selection ................................................

Center and side ventilators ..................................
4-2
4-4
Manual climate control system

(if equipped) .....................................................
4-4
Control panel ......................................................

Heater operation .................................................
Air conditioner operation.....................................
4-4
4-6
4-8
Automatic climate control system

(if equipped) .....................................................
4-9
Control panel ...................................................... 4-9

To use as full-automatic climate control
system.............................................................. 4-9
To use as semi-automatic climate control
system.............................................................. 4-9
Fan speed control dial......................................... 4-9
Temperature control dial..................................... 4-10
Air flow control dial............................................ 4-10
Air inlet selection button .................................... 4-11
Air conditioner button ........................................

Temperature sensors .........................................
4-11
4-12
Operating tips for heater and air

conditioner ......................................................
4-13
Cleaning ventilation grille...................................

Efficient cooling after parking in direct
sunlight ...........................................................
Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant
circuit..............................................................
Checking air conditioning system before summer
season ............................................................
Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity and
low temperature weather conditions .................
Air conditioner compressor shut-off when engine
is heavily loaded..............................................
Refrigerant for your climate control system ........
4-13
4-13
4-13
4-13
4-13
4-13
4-14
Air filtration system ...........................................
4-14
Replacing an air filter.........................................
4-14
Black plate (174,1)
4-2
Climate control
Ventilator
& Air flow selection
! Left-hand drive vehicles
Black plate (175,1)
Climate control
4-3
! Right-hand drive vehicles
CONTINUED
Black plate (176,1)
4-4
Climate control
& Center and side ventilators
! Side ventilators
! Center ventilators
Manual climate control system (if equipped)

& Control panel
Move the tab up and down or right and left

to adjust the flow direction.
1)
2)
3)
Open
Close
Thumb-wheel
Move the tab up and down or right and left

to adjust the flow direction.
To open or close the ventilator, turn the
thumb-wheel up or down.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Temperature control dial

Fan speed control dial
Air flow control dial
Rear window defogger button (Refer to
the Rear window defogger button section in chapter 3.)
Air conditioner button
Air inlet selection button
! Temperature control dial

This dial regulates the temperature of air
flow from the air outlets over a range from
the blue side (cool) to red side (warm).
Black plate (177,1)
Climate control
! Fan speed control dial

The fan operates only when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position. The
fan speed control dial is used to select
four fan speeds.
! Air flow control dial
This dial has the following five positions:
: Air flows through the instrument panel
outlets.
side air mode.

In this state, you cannot select recirculation mode by manually pressing
the air inlet selection button.
Also, you cannot stop the air conditioner compressor by pressing the air
conditioner button.
4-5
! Air inlet selection button
! Air conditioner button
: Air flows through the instrument panel

outlets and the foot outlets.
: Air flows through the foot outlets and
some through the windshield defroster
outlets.
: Air flows through the windshield
defroster outlets and foot outlets.
: Air flows through the windshield
defroster outlets.
NOTE
When the dial is placed in the or
position, the air conditioner compressor operates automatically regardless of the position of the air conditioner button to defog the windshield
quickly. However the indicator on the
air conditioner button will not illuminate. At the same time, the air inlet
selection is automatically set to out-
The air conditioner operates only when

the engine is running.
Push the air conditioner button while the
fan is in operation to turn on the air
conditioner. The indicator light will illuminate.
Push it again to turn off the air conditioner.
ON position (Recirculation): Interior air

is recirculated inside the vehicle. Push the
air inlet selection button to the ON position. The indicator light will illuminate.
Place the air inlet selection button to the
ON position for fast cooling with the air
conditioner or when driving on a dusty
road.
OFF position (Outside air): Outside air is
drawn into the passenger compartment.
Push the air inlet selection button again to
the OFF position. The indicator light will
turn off.
Place the air inlet selection button to the
OFF position when the interior has cooled
to a comfortable temperature and the road
is no longer dusty.
CONTINUED
Black plate (178,1)
4-6
Climate control
WARNING
Continued operation with the air
inlet selection button in the ON
position may fog up the windows.
Switch to the OFF position as soon
as the outside dusty condition
clears.
& Heater operation

! Defrosting or defogging the windshield
the way to the right.

3. Set the fan speed control dial to the
highest speed.
If your vehicle is equipped with an air
conditioner, when the or position
is selected, the air conditioner compressor
automatically operates regardless of the
position of the air conditioner button to
defog the windshield quickly.
However, the air conditioner indicator light
does not illuminate at this time.
NOTE
Warm air also comes out from the right
and left air outlets. To stop warm air
flow from these outlets, turn the corresponding thumb-wheel down.
To direct warm air to the windshield and

front door windows:
1. Set the air flow control dial to the
position.
2. Turn the temperature control dial all
! Heating and defrosting
To direct warm air toward the floor and the

windshield:
position.
2. Set the temperature control dial to the
most comfortable level.
desired speed.
If your vehicle is equipped with an air
conditioner, when the or position
is selected, the air conditioner compressor
automatically operates regardless of the
position of the air conditioner button to
defog the windshield quickly.
However, the air conditioner indicator light
does not illuminate at this time.
Black plate (179,1)
Climate control
NOTE
NOTE


! Heating
! Bi-level heating
To direct warm air toward the floor:

1. Set the air inlet selection button to the
OFF position.
position.
most comfortable level.
desired speed.
This setting allows you to direct air of

different temperatures from the instrument
panel and foot outlets. The air from the
foot outlets is slightly warmer than from
the instrument panel outlets.
OFF position.
position.
desired temperature level.
4-7
desired speed.
Setting the temperature control dial fully
turned to the red area or blue area
decreases the temperature difference
between the air from the instrument panel
outlets and the air from the foot outlets.
! Ventilation
To force outside air through the instrument

panel outlets:
OFF position.
position.
3. Set the temperature control dial all the
way left.
desired speed.
CONTINUED
Black plate (180,1)
4-8
Climate control
When driving on a dusty road, set the air

inlet selection button to the ON position.
WARNING
Continued operation with the air
inlet selection button in the ON
position may fog up the windows.
Switch to the OFF position as soon
as the outside dusty condition
clears.
& Air conditioner operation

! Cooling or dehumidifying
1)
ON position
For cooling and dehumidification of the

passenger compartment, performing the
following steps will allow air to flow
through the instrument panel outlets:

OFF position.
position.
3. Set the air conditioner button to the
ON position.
blue side.
5. Set the fan speed control dial at the
highest speed.
red side.
3. Set the fan speed control dial at the
highest speed.
The air conditioner compressor automatically operates when the air flow control
dial set in the or position to
provide better defogging performance.
! Defrosting or defogging
To direct warm air to the windshield and

front door windows:
position.
Black plate (181,1)
Climate control
Automatic climate control

system (if equipped)
Although this climate control system can
be used as a full-automatic climate control
system, it can also, if desired, be used as
a semi-automatic climate control system.
When it is used as a full-automatic climate
control system, the outlet air temperature,
fan speed, air flow distribution, air inlet
control, and air conditioner compressor
operation are all automatically controlled
to maintain a constant, comfortable temperature inside the vehicle.
sor automatically and the A/C indicator light on the control panel illuminates.
& Control panel
set the other dials and buttons as described in the following. The systems
functions will then switch to AUTO mode
and be controlled automatically.
. Air flow control dial: AUTO position
. Fan speed control dial: AUTO position
& To use as semi-automatic

climate control system
Each function can be individually set to
AUTO mode independently of the others.
Any function set to AUTO mode is controlled automatically. Any function not set
to AUTO mode can be manually adjusted
as desired.
NOTE
. Operate the automatic climate control system when the engine is running.
. When the engine coolant is cold, the
blower does not run.
. In the AUTO mode, when the air
temperature in the passenger compartment is sufficiently cool, the air conditioner compressor does not operate.
For efficient defogging or dehumidifying in cold weather, press the A/C
button to operate the air conditioner
compressor.
. Even when cooling is not necessary,
setting the temperature much lower
than the current outlet air temperature
turns on the air conditioner compres-
4-9
& Fan speed control dial

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Temperature control dial

Fan speed control dial
Air flow control dial
Rear window defogger button (Refer to
the Rear window defogger button section in chapter 3.)
Air inlet selection button
Air conditioner button
& To use as full-automatic climate control system

Place the temperature control dial in the
position for your desired temperature, then
The fan operates only with the ignition

CONTINUED
Black plate (182,1)
4-10
Climate control
switch in the ON position. The fan speed

control dial is used to select the AUTO
(automatic control) mode or to select the
desired fan speed. The dials positions
and their functions are as follows:
OFF: The fan does not operate.
AUTO: The fan speed is adjusted automatically in accordance with the air
temperature inside and outside the passenger compartment, the intensity of sunlight, and other factors. SUBARU recommends using the AUTO position.
Other positions: The fan speed can be
adjusted in 7 steps.
& Temperature control dial
NOTE
This dial is used to set the desired interior

temperature. With the dial set to your
desired temperature, the system automatically adjusts the temperature of air
supplied from the outlets such that the
desired temperature is achieved and
maintained.
If the dial is turned fully counterclockwise,
the system gives maximum cooling performance. If the dial is turned fully clockwise, the system gives maximum heating
performance.
With the fan speed control dial in the

AUTO position and the air flow control
dial in the , , or position,
the fan does not operate during engine
warm-up until the engine coolant temperature exceeds approximately 508C
(1228F).
17 to 278C (63 to 818F) on other models.
& Air flow control dial
NOTE
The controllable temperature range
that is indicated on the dial differs by
vehicle model. It is a range of 20 to
308C (68 to 868F) on some models, but
This dial has the following six positions.

The outlets from which air is supplied in
each position are as follows:
AUTO: The air flow control is adjusted
automatically in accordance with the air
temperature inside and outside the passenger compartment, the intensity of sunlight, and other factors. SUBARU recommends using the AUTO position.
: Instrument panel outlets
: Instrument panel outlets and foot
outlets
: Foot outlets and windshield defroster
outlets (relatively little air from windshield
defroster outlets)
Black plate (183,1)
Climate control
: Windshield defroster outlets and foot

outlets
: Windshield defroster outlets
NOTE
When the dial is placed in the or
position, the air inlet selection is
automatically set to outside air
mode.
& Air inlet selection button
is drawn into the passenger compartment.

Push the air inlet selection button to the
OFF position when the interior has cooled
to a comfortable temperature and the road
is no longer dusty. The indicator light will
turn off.
AUTO: Turn the fan speed control dial and
air flow control dial to the AUTO position.
The air inlet control is then adjusted
automatically in accordance with the air
temperature inside and outside the passenger compartment, the intensity of sunlight and other factors. Pressing the air
inlet selection button cancels the AUTO
mode. To return to the AUTO mode, turn
the fan speed control dial or air flow
control dial to a position other than the
AUTO position. Then turn to the AUTO
mode. SUBARU recommends using the
AUTO position.
WARNING
ON position (Recirculation): Interior air

is recirculated inside the vehicle. Push the
air inlet selection button to the ON position
for fast cooling with the air conditioner or
when driving on a dusty road. The
indicator light will illuminate.
OFF position (Outside Air): Outside air
Continued operation in the ON position may fog up the windows. Switch

to the OFF position as soon as the
outside dusty condition clears.
4-11
& Air conditioner button
The buttons positions and their functions

are as follows:
ON: The air conditioner operates while the
fan is running.
Push the button to select this position. The
indicator light will illuminate.
OFF: The air conditioner does not operate.
Push the button again to select this
position. The indicator light will turn off.
AUTO: Turn the fan speed control dial and
air flow control dial to the AUTO position.
The air conditioner compressor operation
is then adjusted automatically in accordance with the air temperature inside and
outside the passenger compartment, the
intensity of sunlight, and other factors.
CONTINUED
Black plate (184,1)
4-12
Climate control
Pressing the button cancels the AUTO

mode. To return to the AUTO mode, turn
the fan speed control dial or air flow
control dial to a position other than the
AUTO position. Then turn to the AUTO
mode. SUBARU recommends using the
AUTO position.
& Temperature sensors
NOTE
The air conditioners compressor does
not operate with an outside temperature of 08C (328F) or lower.
properly and become damaged, the system may not be able to control the interior
temperature correctly. To avoid damaging
the sensors, observe the following precautions:
Do not subject the sensors to impact.
Keep water away from the sensors.
Do not cover the sensors.
The sensors are located as follows:
Solar sensor: beside the windshield
defroster grille.
Interior air temperature sensor: next to
the steering column.
Outside temperature sensor: behind
the front grille.
1)
2)
Interior air temperature sensor

Solar sensor
The automatic climate control system

employs several sensors. These sensors
are delicate. If they are not treated
Black plate (185,1)
Climate control
Operating tips for heater and

air conditioner
& Cleaning ventilation grille
3)
Front ventilator inlet grille
Always keep the front ventilation inlet grille

free of snow, leaves, or other obstructions
to ensure efficient heating and defrosting.
Since the condenser is located in front of
the radiator, this area should be kept clean
because cooling performance is impaired
by any accumulation of insects and leaves
on the condenser.
& Efficient cooling after parking

in direct sunlight
After parking in direct sunlight, drive with
the windows open for a few minutes to
allow outside air to circulate into the
heated interior. This results in quicker
cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the
windows closed during the operation of
the air conditioner for maximum cooling
efficiency.
& Lubrication oil circulation in

the refrigerant circuit
Operate the air conditioner compressor at
a low engine speed (at idle or low driving
speeds) a few minutes each month during
the off-season to circulate its oil.
1)
2)

4-13
& Checking air conditioning

system before summer season
Check the air conditioner unit for refrigerant leaks, hose conditions, and proper
operation each spring. We recommend
that you have your SUBARU dealer perform this check.
& Cooling and dehumidifying in

high humidity and low temperature weather conditions
Under certain weather conditions (high
relative humidity, low temperatures, etc.) a
small amount of water vapor emission
from the air outlets may be noticed. This
condition is normal and does not indicate
any problem with the air conditioning
system.
& Air conditioner compressor

shut-off when engine is
heavily loaded
To improve acceleration and gas mileage,
the air conditioner compressor is designed
to temporarily shut off during air conditioner operation whenever the accelerator
is fully depressed such as during rapid
acceleration or when driving on a steep
upgrade.
CONTINUED
Black plate (186,1)
4-14
Climate control
& Refrigerant for your climate

control system
Air filtration system
Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly

refrigerant HFC134a. Therefore, the method of adding, changing or checking the
refrigerant is different from the method for
CFC12 (freon). We recommend that you
consult your SUBARU dealer for service.
Repairs needed as a result of using the
wrong refrigerant are not covered under
warranty.
Replace the filter element according to the

replacement schedule shown in the following. This schedule should be followed
to maintain the filters dust collection
ability. Under extremely dusty conditions,
the filter should be replaced more frequently. It is recommended that you have
your filter checked or replaced by your
SUBARU dealer. For replacement, we
recommend that you use only a genuine
SUBARU air filter kit.
NOTE
The filter can influence the air conditioning, heating and defroster performance if not properly maintained.
& Replacing an air filter

1. Remove the glove box.
(1) Open the glove box.
Replacement schedule:
Every 12 months or 12,000 km (7,500
miles) whichever comes first
CAUTION
We recommend that you contact
your SUBARU dealer if the following
occurs, even if it is not yet time to
change the filter:
Reduction of the air flow through
the vents.
Windshield gets easily fogged or
misted.
(2) Remove the damper shaft from the

glove box.
Black plate (187,1)
Climate control
4-15
(3) Push the stoppers located on the

both sides of the glove box to remove
the glove box.
3. Replace the air filter element with a

new one.
CAUTION
The arrow mark on the filter must
point UP.
4. Reinstall the glove box, and connect

the damper shaft.
5. Close the glove box.
6. LABEL installation
(1) Fill out the information on the
service label (small).
2. Remove the air filter.
CONTINUED
Black plate (188,1)
4-16
Climate control
(3) Attach the caution label next to the

air filter as shown in the illustration.
1)
Service label
(2) Attach the service label to the

drivers side door pillar.
1)
Caution label
Black plate (9,1)
Audio
Antenna system ..................................................
5-2
Roof antenna ......................................................

FM reception .......................................................
5-2
5-2
Installation of accessories..................................
Audio set .............................................................
5-3
5-4
Type A audio set (if equipped) .............................

Type B audio set (if equipped) .............................
Type C audio set (if equipped) .............................
5-4
5-5
5-6
Power and sound controls .................................
5-7
Power switch and volume control ........................

Sound control .....................................................
Adjustable level of each mode .............................
5-7
5-7
5-9
FM/AM radio operation ......................................
5-10
FM/AM selection.................................................
Tuning ...............................................................
Displaying radio PS (Program Service Name) ......
Station preset ....................................................
5-10
5-10
5-12
5-13
CD player operation ...........................................
5-14
How to insert a CD (type A and C audio).............

How to insert a CD(s) (type B audio) ...................
5-14
5-14
How to play back a CD ......................................

To select a track from its beginning....................
Fast-forwarding and fast-reversing .....................
Repeating ..........................................................
Random playback ..............................................
Scan .................................................................
Display selection ...............................................
Folder selection .................................................
How to eject a CD from the player (type A and C
audio)..............................................................
How to eject CDs from the player
(type B audio) ..................................................
When the following messages are displayed.......
5-16
5-16
5-17
5-18
5-18
5-19
5-19
5-20
AUX unit operation ............................................
5-22
AUX jack ...........................................................

AUX inputs selection button...............................
5-22
5-23
Audio control buttons (if equipped) .................
5-23
MODE button .....................................................
5-23
Precautions to observe when handling a

compact disc...................................................
5-25
5-20
5-21
5-22
Black plate (190,1)
5-2
Audio
Antenna system
& FM reception
& Roof antenna
Although FM is normally static free,

reception can be affected by the surrounding area, atmospheric conditions, station
strength and transmitter distance. Buildings or other obstructions may cause
momentary static, flutter or station interference. If reception continues to be
unsatisfactory, switch to a stronger station.
CAUTION
. Be sure to lower the antenna rod
before entering garages, parking
towers and other locations with
low ceilings.
. Remove the antenna rod before
washing your car at a car wash. If
the antenna rod is left attached, it
may scratch the roof.
. When reinstalling the removed
antenna rod, be sure to fully
tighten it.
1)
2)
Unscrew
Remove
The roof antenna is installed in the center

at the rear part of the roof.
The antenna rod can be folded down
towards the front and rear of the vehicle.
Extend the antenna rod when listening to
the radio.
Unscrew the antenna rod base in order to
remove the antenna rod.
Black plate (191,1)
Audio
5-3
Installation of accessories
your SUBARU dealer before installing a
citizen band radio or other transmitting
device in your vehicle. Such devices may
cause the electronic control system to
malfunction if they are incorrectly installed
or if they are not suited for the vehicle.
Black plate (192,1)
5-4
Audio
Audio set
Your SUBARU may be equipped with one of the following audio sets. See the pages
indicated in this section for operating details.
& Type A audio set (if equipped)
The illustration shown is for a left-hand

drive vehicle. The switch positions for a
right-hand drive vehicle are the opposite
of those shown.
The audio set will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the Acc or ON
position.
. Power and sound controls: refer to
page 5-7
. Radio operation: refer to page 5-10
. CD (compact disc) player operation:
refer to page 5-14
. AUX unit operation: refer to page 5-22
Black plate (193,1)
Audio
& Type B audio set (if equipped)
5-5

position.
page 5-7
refer to page 5-14
The illustration above is for a left-hand drive vehicle. The switch positions for a right-hand
drive vehicle are the opposite of those shown.
CONTINUED
Black plate (194,1)
5-6
Audio
& Type C audio set (if equipped)

position.
page 5-7
refer to page 5-14
Black plate (195,1)
Audio
Power and sound controls
& Sound control
& Power switch and volume

control
! Tone and balance control
5-7
! Other sound setting controls
The dial is used for both power (ON/OFF)

and volume control. The radio is turned
ON and OFF by pushing the dial, and the
volume is controlled by turning the dial.
Each brief press of the sound control dial

changes the control modes in the following sequence.
Choose the desired level for each mode

by turning the sound control dial.
The control function returns to the tune/
track/channel control mode after approximately 5 seconds.
Each brief press of the MENU button

changes the control modes in the following sequence.
Type A audio:
Type B audio:
CONTINUED
Black plate (196,1)
5-8
Audio
Type C audio:
! SRS CS Auto setting (type B audio)

SRS CS Auto can be set ON/OFF. When
is displayed on the
this setting is ON,
screen.
NOTE
Choose the desired settings for each
mode by turning the sound control dial.
The control function returns to the tune/
track/channel control mode after approximately 5 seconds.
! SVC setting
SVC (Speed Volume Control) is a function
that automatically adjusts the volume
according to the vehicle speed. As the
vehicle speed increases, the audio volume automatically increases to match the
vehicle speed, in order to create a
pleasant listening environment even as
the driving noise increases. The amount of
this automatic volume change can be set
in the range from OFF to 2. The initial
setting is OFF.
! BEEP setting (type A and C audio)
A beep sound (operation sound) that
occurs when the audio system is operated
can be set ON/OFF. The initial setting is
ON.
SRS CS Auto creates a 5.1ch equivalent surround field using 7 speakers

that are installed in the vehicle.
SRS CS Auto features:
1) Sound originating from door mount
speakers can be heard at ear level
(built in SRS FOCUS effect).
2) Ultra rich bass sound can be obtained from standard door mount
speakers and a sub-woofer (built in
SRS TruBass effect).
3) Surround sound can be obtained
from 2-channel stereo sources such as
CD, MP3 and FM (built in SRS Circle
Surround II effect).
4) SRS CS Auto can position the
center channel image in the center of
the vehicles windshield. This eliminates the need for a center speaker
(built in SRS Circle Surround II phantom center and SRS FOCUS effects).
under license from SRS Labs, inc.

! REG setting
This function prevents the radio from
selecting local stations during AF
searches. It is possible to turn the function
ON/OFF by selecting the REG setting.
! VOL ADJUST setting (type A audio)
It is possible to preset the volume that the
set will use when it breaks into playback
with broadcasts of traffic information,
news bulletins and emergency announcements.
If you select the VOL ADJ setting, the
preset break-in volume can be adjusted.
NOTE
. If the preset break-in volume is
lower than the current volume when
break-in reception occurs, the volume
does not change to the preset break-in
level. (It remains at the current level.)
. When break-in reception finishes,
the volume returns to the original level.
CS Auto, TruBass, FOCUS, Circle Sur symbol are

round-II, SRS and
trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc.
CS Auto technology is incorporated
Black plate (197,1)
Audio
5-9
& Adjustable level of each mode

Mode
Volume
Range of levels
(displayed)
Initial setting
Turn counterclockwise
Turn clockwise
Volume control
0 to 40
15
For less volume
For more volume
AUX volume control*
0 to 40
15
For less volume
For more volume
8 to +8
For less bass sound
For more bass sound
Midrange control
8 to +8
For less midrange sound
For more midrange sound
Treble control
8 to +8
For less treble sound
For more treble sound
Balance
L9 to R9
Right channel attenuated
Left channel attenuated
Tone and balance Bass control
Other settings
Fader
R9 to F9
Front attenuated
Rear attenuated
REG
OFF to ON
OFF
OFF
ON
VOL ADJUST (type A

audio)
0 to 40
17
For less volume
For more volume
SVC
OFF to 2
OFF
For less auto volume change For more auto volume change
BEEP (type A and C audio) OFF to ON
ON
OFF
ON
CS Auto (type B audio)
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF to ON
*Only when an AUX audio product is connected.
Black plate (198,1)
5-10
Audio
FM/AM radio operation
& Tuning
& FM/AM selection
! Manual tuning
Push the FM AM button when the radio

is off to turn on the radio.
Push the FM AM button when the radio
is on to select FM1, FM2, FM3 or AM
reception.
Each brief press of the FM AM button
changes the radio in the following sequence starting from the last radio band
with you selected.
Turn the TUNE dial clockwise to increase

the tuning frequency and turn the TUNE
dial counterclockwise to decrease it.
Every time the dial is turned, the frequency interval is changed 9 kHz (10
kHz*) in the MW mode, 3 kHz in the LW
mode and 0.05 MHz in the FM mode.
! Tuning frequency interval change

function for AM waveband (type C
audio)
Select the tuning frequency interval (9 kHz
or 10 kHz) that is appropriate for the
broadcasting area where the radio is
used. To select an interval of 9 kHz, press
the 1 preset button for 3 seconds while
pressing the AM button. The display will
show 9 kHz STEP.
To select an interval of 10 kHz, press the
2 preset button for 3 seconds while
pressing the AM button. The display will
show 10 kHz STEP.
! Stereo indicator
The stereo indicator ST will illuminate
when an FM stereo broadcast is received.
*: For type C audio: The tuning frequency

interval can be set to either 9 kHz or 10 kHz to
suit the broadcasting area. Refer to Tuning
frequency interval change function for AM
waveband (type C audio).
Black plate (199,1)
Audio
! Seek tuning (SEEK)
! Scan tuning (SCAN)
5-11
! Local seek function (type A and B

audio)
If you press the or side of the

SEEK button briefly, the radio will automatically search for a receivable station
and stop at the first one it finds. This
function may not be available, however,
when radio signals are weak. In such a
situation, perform manual tuning to select
the desired station.
If you press the SCAN button, the radio

will switch to the preset scan mode. In this
mode, the radio scans through the preset
channels until a station is found. The radio
will stop at the station for 10 seconds
while displaying the frequency, after which
scanning will continue until all of the
preset channels have been scanned.
Automatic scanning may not function
properly if the station reception is weakened by distance from the station or
proximity to tall buildings and hills.
You can turn the local seek function on or

off during FM, MW or LW reception by
pressing the LOCAL button for at least
1.5 seconds.
! Radio Data System (RDS) on FM
RDS is a system in which inaudible digital
information is transmitted in addition to
normal FM radio broadcasts. Your car
radio uses the RDS information to offer
you many benefits.
! Alternative Frequencies (AF)
If the vehicle moves beyond the area of
the station that the radio is receiving and
subsequently enters an area where the
same station is available on a different
frequency, the radio automatically
CONTINUED
Black plate (200,1)
5-12
Audio
searches that frequency. Push and hold

the RDS button to change the ON and
OFF mode of the alternative frequency
(AF) searching function. The default
setting is ON.
! Traffic information (T.I.) (type A and
B audio)
turn ON and the traffic information breakin function to be turned ON.

The TA illuminates on the display (for
traffic announcements) while the set is
actually receiving traffic information.
! News bulletins (type A and B audio)
break-in function to be turned ON.
NOTE
The initial setting of the break-in function is OFF.
! Emergency announcements
(ALARM)
When a station begins broadcasting an
emergency announcement, the set automatically receives it so that the driver can
hear it. If the driver is listening to another
audio source, the set breaks into that
playback with the emergency announcement. This function is permanently ON.
& Displaying radio PS (Program Service Name)
When a station begins broadcasting traffic

information, this function causes the set to
automatically receive it so that the driver
can hear it. If the driver is listening to
another audio source, the set breaks into
that playback with the traffic information.
It is possible to turn the traffic information
break-in function ON/OFF by pressing the
T.I. button briefly.
When the audio power is OFF, pressing
the T.I. button causes the audio power to
When a station begins broadcasting news,

this function causes the set to automatically receive it so that the driver can hear
it. If the driver is listening to another audio
source, the set breaks into that playback
with the news.
It is possible to turn the news bulletin
break-in function ON/OFF by pressing the
NEWS button for more than 0.5 second.
When the audio power is OFF, pressing
the NEWS button causes the audio
power to turn ON and the news bulletin
If the PS (Program Service Name) is
Black plate (201,1)
Audio
available, pressing the DISP button

changes the display among PS and
frequency. The initial setting is PS.
NOTE
The maximum number of characters
that can be displayed for PS is 8.
. If a cell phone is placed near the

radio, it may cause the radio to emit
noise when it receives calls. This noise
does not indicate a radio fault.
! Selecting preset stations
& Station preset

! How to preset stations
1. Press the FM AM button to select
FM1, FM2, FM3 or AM reception.
2. Press the or side of the
SEEK button or tune the radio manually
until the desired station frequency is
displayed.
3. Press one of the preset buttons for
more than 1.5 seconds to store the
frequency. If the button is pressed for less
than 1.5 seconds, the preceding selection
will remain in memory.
NOTE
. If the connection between the radio
and battery is broken for any reason
such as vehicle maintenance or radio
removal, all stations stored in the
preset buttons are cleared. If this
occurs, it is necessary to reset the
preset buttons.
5-13
NOTE
. When you use Auto-store, the new
stations replace any stations previously stored.
. Interrupting Auto-store: If you accidentally press the A/S (Auto-store)
button, you can cancel the Auto-store
function before the AST function has
been completed as follows.
switching to the other source
mode
switching to the other band
turning the tune dial
operating the seek key
Presetting a station with a preset button

allows you to select that station in a single
operation. Up to six AM, FM1, FM2 and
FM3 stations each may be preset.
! Auto-store
Using the Auto-store function, you can
automatically store 6 stations on the
current waveband by simply pressing the
A/S button. Use Auto-store to quickly
find the strongest stations, for example
when traveling through different reception
areas.
Black plate (202,1)
5-14
Audio
CD player operation
& How to insert a CD (type A

and C audio)
NOTE
Hold a disc with a finger in the center hole

while gripping the edge of the disc, then
insert it in to the slot (with the label side
up) and the player will automatically pull
the disc into position.
. Make sure to always insert a disc

with the label side up. If a disc is
inserted with the label side down, the
player displays CHECK DISC.
Refer to When the following messages
are displayed in this section.
. If a disc is inserted during a radio
broadcast, the disc will interrupt the
broadcast.
. After the last song finishes, the disc
will automatically return to the first
track on the disc (or the beginning of
the next disc for type B audio) and will
automatically play back.
. The player is designed to be able to
play music CD-Rs and music CD-RWs,
but it may not be able to play certain
ones.
. CDs (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch CDs) are not
supported, and if inserted, they will be
immediately ejected.
. The file (track) that has protected by
copyright of WMA cannot be played,
and the player will skip to the next file
(track).
NOTE
DO NOT INSERT TWO DISCS INTO THE
DISC INSERTION SLOT AT A TIME.
& How to insert a CD(s) (type B

audio)
idle position will blink.

If no indicator blinks, it means that there is
no idle position in the magazine.
2. When the LOAD indicator illuminates, insert the disc. Once you have
inserted the disc, the LOAD indicator will
turn off. The disc will then be automatically
drawn in, and the player will begin to play
back the first track of the disc.
. To insert more discs in succession,
repeat Steps 1 and 2. The magazine will
be loaded with discs in the ascending
order of position number.
If you do not insert any disc in 15 seconds
after you have pressed the LOAD button,
the player will begin to play back the first
track of the last disc you have inserted.
. The disc indicator steadily lights up if a
disc is already inserted in the corresponding position of the magazine.
. While the player is in the loading mode,
if you press FM/AM or AUX button, the
player will enter the standby mode. Press
the CD button to start playback.
1. Briefly press the LOAD button. If the

magazine in the player has an idle
position where you can insert a disc, the
disc number indicator associated with the
Black plate (203,1)
Audio
5-15
CD button to start playback.

! Loading all the magazine (Full disc
loading mode)
! Inserting a disc in a desired position
1. Briefly press the LOAD button. If the

magazine in the player has an idle
position where you can insert a disc, the
disc number indicator associated with the
idle position will blink.
The positions in the magazine the indicator of which steadily lights up are already
loaded with discs.
2. Press the disc select button at the

position where you want to insert a disc.
3. When the LOAD indicator illuminates, insert the disc. Once you have
inserted the disc, the LOAD indicator will
turn off. The disc will then be automatically
drawn in, and the player will begin to play
the first track on the disc.
. If you wish to insert another disc,
repeat the procedure beginning with step
1.
If you do not insert any disc in 15 seconds
after you have pressed the LOAD button,
the player will begin to play back the first
track of the last disc you have inserted.
. While the player is in the loading mode,
if you press FM/AM or AUX button, the
player will enter standby mode. Press the
1. If you continue to press the LOAD

button for more than 1.5 seconds, the
player will produce beep sound and will
enter the full disc loading mode.
2. When the disc number indicator
flashes and ALL LOAD indicator illuminates, insert a disc within 15 seconds. If a
disc is successfully loaded during this
period, the disc number indicator will stop
blinking and will steadily light.
3. When the loading of a disc is complete, the next disc number indicator will
blink. Then repeat Step 2.
4. When the magazine is filled with discs
by repeating Steps 2 and 3, the player will
CONTINUED
Black plate (204,1)
5-16
Audio
start playback of the discs, beginning with

the one inserted first.
If you fail to insert any disc during each 15
seconds interval, the full disc loading
mode will be canceled, and the player will
start playback of the disc inserted first.
When the CD button is pressed, the

player will start playback.
! When there are CDs loaded (type B
audio)
& To select a track from its

beginning
! Forward direction
& How to play back a CD

! When there is no CD inserted
Insert a CD by referring to How to insert a
CD (type A and C audio) / How to insert
a CD(s) (type B audio).
When a CD is loaded, the player will start
playback of the CD, beginning with the
first track.
! When CD is in the player (type A
and C audio)
Press a desired one of the disc select

buttons the disc number indicator of which
steadily lights up. The player will then start
playback of the selected CD, beginning
with the first track.
If a disc that the player cannot read has
been loaded, the player will display the
message CHECK DISC.
Turn the TRACK dial clockwise to skip to

the beginning of the next track/file (track).
Each time the dial is turned, the indicated
track/file (track) number will increase.
NOTE
In an MP3 or WMA folder, skipping past
the last track/file (track) will take you
back to the first track/file (track) in the
folder.
Black plate (205,1)
Audio
! Backward direction
& Fast-forwarding and fast-reversing
5-17
! Fast-reversing
! Fast-forwarding
Turn the TRACK dial counterclockwise

to skip to the beginning of the current
track/file (track). Each time the dial is
turned, the indicated track/file (track)
number will decrease.
NOTE
In an MP3 or WMA folder, skipping past
the first track/file (track) will take you to
the last track/file (track) in the folder.
Press the side of the SEEK button

continuously to fast-forward the disc/
folder.
Release the button to stop fast-forwarding.
NOTE
If you fast-forward to the end of the last
track/file (track), fast-forwarding will
stop and the player will start playback
beginning with the first track/file
(track).
Press the side of the SEEK button

continuously to fast-reverse the disc/
folder.
Release the button to stop fast-reversing.
NOTE
If you fast-reverse to the beginning of
the first track/file (track), fast-reversing
will stop and the player will start playback.
CONTINUED
Black plate (206,1)
5-18
Audio
& Repeating
To repeat a track/file (track), briefly press

the RPT button while the track/file (track)
is playing.
Each time you briefly press the button, the
mode changes in the following sequences.
Type A and C audio:
Type B audio:
. Press the disc select button

. Press the SCAN button
. Press the LOAD button when
there is free space in the CD magazine.
NOTE
& Random playback
. The RPT indication refers to the

repeat playback of a single track. It
repeats the track that is playing.
. The F-RPT indication refers to the
repeat playback of a folder. It repeats
all of the tracks in the folder. It is
possible to select the function when
the MP3/WMA format track is playing.
. The D-RPT indication refers to the
repeat playback of a disc. It repeats all
of the tracks on the CD. It is only
possible to select this function for type
B audio.
To cancel the track/file (track) repeat-play
mode, briefly press the RPT button
twice. The RPT indication will turn off,
and the normal playback mode will be
resumed.
To playback a track/file(s) at random,

press the RPT button for 0.5 second or
longer while the track/file is playing.
Each time you press the button, the mode
changes in the following sequences.
NOTE
The repeat-play mode will be cancelled
if you perform any of the following
steps:
. Press the RPT button and select
CANCEL
. Press the button
Black plate (207,1)
Audio
NOTE
. The F-RDM indication refers to the
random playback in the folder. It randomly repeats all of the tracks in the
folder. It is possible to select the
function when an MP3/WMA format
track is playing.
. The D-RDM indication refers to the
random playback of a disc. It randomly
repeats all of the tracks on the CD. It is
possible to select the function when an
MP3/WMA format track is playing.
To cancel the random playback mode,
press the RPT button again for more
than 0.5 second.
The RDM indication will turn off, and the
normal playback mode will be resumed.
NOTE
Random playback will be cancelled if
you perform any of the following steps:
. Press the RPT button and select
CANCEL
. Press the button
. Press the SCAN button
& Scan
5-19
SEEK/SCAN button
. Press the button
. Select the radio or AUX mode
. Turn off the power of the audio
equipment.
. Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK position.
& Display selection

The scan mode lets you listen to the first
10 seconds of each track/file in succession. Press the SCAN button to start
scanning upward beginning with the track/
file(s) following the currently selected one.
After all track/file(s) in the disk/folder have
been scanned, normal playback will be
resumed. To cancel the scan mode, press
the SCAN button again.
NOTE
The scan mode will be cancelled if you
perform any of the following steps:
. Press the RPT button
or
side of the
. Press the
TUNE/TRACK button
. Turn the TRACK dial
. Press the or side of the
If you press the DISP button during

playback, the indication will change to
the next one in the following sequence.
CONTINUED
Black plate (208,1)
5-20
Audio
For CD-DA:
NOTE
The display is designed to show titles
for up to 24 characters.
& Folder selection

For MP3/WMA:
appropriate folder exists on the disc,

pressing the or side of the
FOLDER button starts playback beginning with the first track/file (track).
& How to eject a CD from the

player (type A and C audio)
! Page (track/folder title) scroll
Press the side of the FOLDER

button briefly to select the next folder.
Press the side of the button briefly to
go back to the previous folder. The folder
title will be shown each time you press
one of the buttons.
If you press the DISP button again for at
least 0.5 second, the title will be scrolled
so you can see all of it.
NOTE
. Selecting folders in this way is
possible only within a single disc.
. Only MP3/WMA folders are recognized when an attempt to select the
next or previous folder is made. If no
When a disc is being played back or when

a disc is in the player, press the eject
button . The disc will be ejected.
NOTE
. Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD
sticking out, because vibration might
make it fall out.
. If the disc is left ejected for more
than approximately 15 seconds after
the ignition switch is turned to the
OFF position, a disc protection func-
Black plate (209,1)
Audio
5-21
! Ejecting all discs from the player

(All disc ejection mode)
tion will operate, automatically reloading the disc. In this case, the disc is not
played.
& How to eject CDs from the

player (type B audio)
! Ejecting a CD from the player
Of the discs loaded, you can select and
remove only one disc.
5
2. Briefly press the button. The
selected disc will be ejected. The disc
number indicator will flash at this time.
When you remove the ejected disc, the
disc number indicator will turn off.
To remove more discs in succession,
repeat steps 1 and 2.
1. Use the disc select button to select the

disc to be ejected.
1. If you continue to press the

button, the player will produce beep sound
and will enter the all disc ejection mode. At
this time, the disc number indicator and
ALL EJECT indicator will flash.
2. Remove the disc that has been
ejected. The other discs loaded will then
be ejected one after another. If you do not
remove the disc that has been ejected, the
All disc ejection mode will be canceled.
NOTE
. Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD
sticking out, because vibration might
make it fall out.
. If you press the button while
CONTINUED
Black plate (210,1)
5-22
Audio
the player is in all disc ejection mode,

the mode will be cancelled following
ejection of the disc that is currently
being ejected.
. If you press the CD button or
LOAD button while the player is in
all disc ejection mode, the player will
draw in the discs that have been
ejected and play them.
& When the following messages are displayed

If one of the following messages is
displayed while operating the CD player,
determine the cause based on the following information. If you cannot clear those
messages, we recommend that you contact your SUBARU dealer.
! When CHECK DISC is displayed

Press the eject button to unload the discs.
Check that the disc is not damaged or
scratched, and also check that the disc is
inserted correctly. This message may
appear when using some CD-RW discs.
Check that the disc type (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch
CDs are not supported) and data format
are correct. This player can only play MP3
and WMA data formats. If the disc cannot
be unloaded or this message remains
displayed, we recommend that you contact your SUBARU dealer.
AUX unit operation

& AUX jack
Type A
! When PUSH EJECT is displayed

Press the eject button to unload the disc.
Check the disc for damage or deformation, and also check that the correct disc is
inserted. Do not try to unload the disc
forcibly. Single CDs (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch CDs)
are not supported, and if inserted, they will
be immediately ejected and this message
will be displayed. If the disc cannot be
unloaded or this message remains displayed, we recommend that you contact
your SUBARU dealer.
Type B
Black plate (211,1)
Audio
By connecting a commercial audio product to the vehicle, such as portable audio

player, you can hear its sound via the
vehicles speaker.
Connect the portable audio player and
push the AUX button.
For the audio input jack, a stereo mini pin
plug (3.5) can be connected. For detailed
information, see the Owners Manual of
the portable audio player.
& AUX inputs selection button
Press the AUX button when the auxiliary

audio input is off to turn on the auxiliary
audio input.
via the vehicles speakers that are

connected to the vehicle audio set is
very small. If you turn up the volume of
the audio set, the volume becomes
louder. However, when you change
the player to the other portable audio
player, the sound may become a lot
louder. Turn down the volume when
you change between them.
. In some cases, when the sound
volume of the portable audio player is
low, the sound becomes bad when you
turn up the volume of the vehicle audio
system. In this case, adjust the sound
volume of the portable audio player.
. In some cases, noise occurs because of a bad connection between the
portable player of the vehicle audio
system or for the player.
5-23
Audio control buttons (if

equipped)
These buttons are located on the spokes
of the steering wheel. They allow the
driver to control audio functions without
taking his/her hands off the steering
wheel.
& MODE button
This button is used to select the desired

audio mode. Each time it is pressed, the
mode changes to the next one in the
following sequence:
NOTE
. The output sound of the portable
audio player is not loud, and the sound
CONTINUED
Black plate (212,1)
5-24
Audio
*1: The frequency last received in the selected

waveband will be displayed.
*2: Only when a CD is in the player.
*3: Only when with an auxiliary audio product is
connected.
NOTE
The MW and LW modes are displayed on the type A and B audio. For
the type C audio those are displayed as
AM mode.
!
and
buttons
the next receivable station and stop on it.

That stations frequency will be shown on
the audio display.
! MUTE button
! With CD mode selected

Press the button to skip forward in the
track/file (track) order. Press the
button to skip backward in the track/file
(track) order.
The track/file (track) number will be shown
on the audio display.
! Volume control buttons
Press this button if you wish to immediately cut the volume to zero.
The audio display will show MUTE.
If you press the button again, the original
sound volume will return and MUTE
goes off.
! With radio mode selected

Briefly press the button or button
to select a preset channel.
Press the button or button for
more than 0.5 second. The radio will seek
Press the + button to increase the

volume. Press the button to reduce
the volume.
A number indicating the volume will be
shown on the audio display.
Black plate (213,1)
Audio
5-25
Precautions to observe when

handling a compact disc
Use only compact discs (CDs, CD-Rs and
CD-RWs) that have the mark shown in the
following. Also, some compact discs
cannot be played.
5
. You cannot use a DualDisc in the CD
player. If you insert a DualDisc into the
player, the disc may not come out again,
possibly causing the player to malfunction.
. In cold and/or rainy weather, dew can
form inside the CD player, preventing
normal operation. If this happens, eject
the CD and wait for the player to dry out.
. Skipping may occur when the CD
player is subjected to severe vibration
(for example, when the vehicle is driven
on a rough surface).
. To remove a disc from the case, press
the center of the case and hold both
edges of the disc. If the disc surface is
touched directly, contamination could
cause poor tone quality. Do not touch the
disc surface.
. Use a clean disc whenever possible. If
CONTINUED
Black plate (214,1)
5-26
Audio
there are deposits, wipe the disc surface

from the center outward with a dry, soft
cloth. Be sure not to use a hard cloth,
thinner, benzine, alcohol, etc.
. Do not use any disc that is scratched,
deformed, or cracked. Also, do not use
any disc that has a non-standard shape
(for example, a heart shape). Malfunctions
or problems might result.
. A disc is vulnerable to heat. Never
keep it in places exposed to direct sunlight
or near heaters. Also, never leave a disc
in a vehicle that is parked in the sun or
outside on hot days.
Black plate (11,1)
Interior equipment
Interior light .........................................................
6-2
Dome light ..........................................................

Cargo area light ..................................................
Map light.............................................................
6-2
6-3
6-3
Sun visors ...........................................................
6-4
Vanity mirror .......................................................
6-4
Storage compartment .........................................
6-4
Glove box ...........................................................

Center console....................................................
Overhead console ...............................................
Rear seat center table (if equipped) .....................
Coin tray.............................................................
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-6
6-7
Cup holders .........................................................
6-7
Front passengers cup holder ..............................

Rear passengers cup holder (if equipped) ...........
6-7
6-8
Bottle holders ......................................................
6-9
Accessory power outlets ....................................
6-9
Use with a cigarette lighter (if equipped).............
6-11
Ashtray (if equipped).........................................
6-12
Center console ..................................................

Rear ashtray ......................................................
6-12
6-12
Floor mat (if equipped)......................................

Shopping bag hook ...........................................
Coat hook...........................................................
Cargo area cover (if equipped) .........................
6-13
6-13
6-14
6-14
Using the cover .................................................

To remove the cover ..........................................
To install the cover housing ...............................
6-14
6-15
6-15
Cargo tie-down hooks .......................................

Under-floor storage compartment
(if equipped) ....................................................
6-16
6-16
Black plate (216,1)
6-2
Interior equipment
Interior light
When leaving your vehicle, make sure the
light is turned off to avoid battery discharge.
& Dome light
1)
2)
3)
ON
DOOR
OFF
The dome light switch has three positions:

ON: The light stays on continuously.
DOOR: The light illuminates when any of
the doors or the rear gate is opened. The
light remains illuminated for several seconds and gradually turns off after all doors
and the rear gate are closed or if the key is
turned to the ON position.
The light also can be turned on by use of

the remote keyless entry transmitter. Refer
to the Remote keyless entry system
section in chapter 2 for detailed information.
The setting of the period for which the light
stays on can be changed.
. Vehicle equipped with genuine
SUBARU navigation system:
The setting can be changed using the
monitor. For details, please refer to the
Owners Manual supplement for the navigation system. Also, the setting can be
changed by a SUBARU dealer. We
recommend that you contact the nearest
SUBARU dealer for details.
. Vehicle not equipped with genuine
SUBARU navigation system:
you contact the nearest SUBARU dealer
for details.
. when the doors are closed after the

doors were open
. when the doors are unlocked using the
remote keyless entry transmitter
The dome light turns off when one the
following operations is performed.
. when the ignition switch is turned to the
Acc or ON position
. when the doors are locked using the
remote keyless entry transmitter
OFF: The light stays off.

! OFF DELAY function
When the dome light switch is in the
DOOR position, the dome light illuminates and gradually turns off when any of
the following operations are performed.
. when the ignition switch is turned from
the Acc to LOCK position
Black plate (217,1)
Interior equipment
& Cargo area light
& Map light
6-3
! OFF DELAY function

The map light illuminates when any of the
doors or the rear gate is opened. The light
remains illuminated for several seconds
and gradually turns off after all doors and
the rear gate are closed or if the key is
turned to the ON position.
This functions operational/non-operational setting can be changed by a
you contact a SUBARU dealer for details.
6
1)
2)
3)
DOOR
OFF
ON
The cargo area light switch has three

positions:
To turn on the map light, push the lens.

To turn it off, push the lens again.
When leaving the vehicle, make sure the
light is turned off to avoid battery discharge.
DOOR: The light illuminates when the rear

gate is opened. The light remains illuminated for several seconds and gradually
turns off after the rear gate is closed.
OFF: The light stays off.
ON: The light stays illuminated continuously.
Black plate (218,1)
6-4
Interior equipment
Sun visors
& Vanity mirror
Storage compartment
CAUTION
Keep the vanity mirror cover closed
while the car is being driven to avoid
dazzle.
To block out glare, swing down the visors.

To use the sun visor at a side window,
swing it down and move it sideways.
CAUTION
. Always keep the storage compartment closed while driving to
reduce the risk of injury in the
event of sudden stops or an
accident.
. Do not store spray cans, containers with flammable or corrosive
liquids or any other dangerous
items in the storage compartment.
& Glove box
To use the vanity mirror, swing down the

sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover.
To open the glove box, pull the handle. To
Black plate (219,1)
Interior equipment
close it, push the lid firmly upward.
To use as armrest:
& Center console

! Vehicles with the dual range
6-5
driving position. Make sure the armrest is

securely retained.
To return the console top to the vertical
position, raise the console top.
CAUTION
Do not step or sit on the armrest,
and do not place heavy objects on it.
The armrest could break, and you
could get hurt.
To use as storage space:

1. Tip the console top forward from its
vertical position.
To open the lid, pull up the release button.
! Vehicles without the dual range
The center console box provides storage
space. In addition, the top of the console
can be used as an armrest.
2. Push the armrest part of the console

top forward to the desired position. Adjust
the position of the armrest to suit your
Raise the console top to the vertical

position. Then, remove the lid.
When installed, the lid can be used as a
tray for placing small items in it.
CONTINUED
Black plate (220,1)
6-6
Interior equipment
CAUTION
. Before removing the lid of the
console box, raise the console
top completely to the vertical
position. Otherwise, the lid may
be damaged and an injury may
occur.
. Be careful not to trap your hands
between the console top and
console box when raising and
tipping the console top.
. When there is an object on the
console box lid, do not tip the
console top forward. Otherwise,
the console top or lid could be
damaged, and an injury could
occur.
& Overhead console
To open the console, push on the console

lid lightly and the lid will automatically
open.
& Rear seat center table (if

equipped)
To use the rear seat center table, pull the

strap up.
CAUTION
When your vehicle is in the sun or
on a warm day, the inside of the
overhead console heats up. Avoid
storing plastic or other heat-vulnerable or flammable articles such as a
lighter in the overhead console.
The rear seat center table can be used as

a storage space and as rear passengers
Black plate (221,1)
Interior equipment
& Coin tray
cup holders.
6-7
Cup holders
CAUTION
. Do not step or sit on the rear seat
center table, and do not place
heavy objects on it. The rear seat
center table could break, and you
could get hurt.
. When pulling out or returning the
rear seat center table, make sure
not to pinch fingers or other body
parts.
. Do not use the rear seat center
table while driving.
. When folding down the rear seatback, return the rear seat center
table.
CAUTION
Take care to avoid spills. Beverages,
if hot, might burn you or your
passengers. Spilled beverages may
also damage upholstery, carpets or
audio equipment.
& Front passengers cup holder

A coin tray is built in the center console.
CAUTION
Do not pick up a cup from the cup
holder or put a cup in the holder
while you are driving, as this may
distract you and lead to an accident.
CONTINUED
Black plate (222,1)
6-8
Interior equipment
& Rear passengers cup holder

(if equipped)
If two cup holders are built in the center

console, the cup holder rear partition can
be removed and placed on the front
partition. This space can be used to store
small items.
A dual cup holder is located on the rear

seat center table.
One or two cup holders is/are built in the

center console, beside the parking brake
lever.
Black plate (223,1)
Interior equipment
Bottle holders
trim can be used to hold beverage bottles

and other items.
6-9
Accessory power outlets
CAUTION
. Do not pick up a bottle from the
bottle holder or put a bottle in the
holder while you are driving, as
this may distract you and lead to
an accident.
. When placing a beverage in a
door pocket, make sure it is
capped. Otherwise, the beverage
could spill when opening/closing
the door or while driving and, if
the beverage is hot, it could scald
you.
6
Power outlet below the climate controls
Power outlet in the center console (Type A)
The door pocket equipped on each door

CONTINUED
Black plate (224,1)
6-10
Interior equipment
Power outlet in the center console (Type B)
available at any of the outlets when the

ignition switch is in either the Acc or ON
position.
You can use an in-vehicle electrical
appliance by connecting it to an outlet.
The maximum power rating of an appliance that can be connected varies among
outlets as shown in the following. Do not
use an appliance which exceeds the
indicated wattage for each outlet.
Outlet below the climate controls: 80W or
less
Outlets in the center console and cargo
area: 120W or less
When using appliances connected to two
outlets simultaneously, the total power
consumed by them must not exceed
120W.
CAUTION
Power outlet in the cargo area
Accessory power outlets are provided

below the climate controls, in the center
console and in the cargo area. Electrical
power (12V DC) from the battery is
. Do not attempt to use a cigarette

lighter in the accessory power
outlets.
. Do not place any foreign objects,
especially metal ones such as
coins or aluminum foil, into the
accessory power outlet. That
could cause a short circuit. Always put the cap on the accessory power outlet when it is not
in use.
. Use only electrical appliances

which are designed for 12V DC.
The maximum power rating of an
appliance that can be connected
varies among outlets as shown in
the following. Do not use an
appliance which exceeds the indicated wattage for each outlet.
Outlet below the climate controls: 80W or less
Outlets in the center console and
cargo area: 120W or less
When using appliances connected to two outlets simultaneously, the total power consumed by them must not exceed
120W. Overloading the accessory
power outlet can cause a short
circuit. Do not use dual adapters
or more than one electrical appliance.
. If the plug on your electric appliance is either too loose or too
tight for the accessory power
outlet, this can result in a poor
contact or cause the plug to get
stuck. Only use plugs that fit
properly.
. Use of an electric appliance in the
accessory power outlet for a long
period of time while the engine is
Black plate (225,1)
Interior equipment
not running can cause battery

discharge.
. Before driving your vehicle, make
sure that the plug and the cord
on your electrical appliance will
not interfere with your shifting
gears and operating the accelerator and brake pedals. If they
do, do not use the electrical
appliance while driving.
& Use with a cigarette lighter (if

equipped)
To use the accessory power outlet that is
located in the center console as a cigarette lighter socket, purchase the cigarette
lighter plug, which is an optional accessory.
A cigarette lighter plug is available from
your SUBARU dealer.
The cigarette lighter operates only when
the ignition switch is in the ON or Acc
position.
To use the cigarette lighter, push in the
knob and wait a few moments. It will
automatically spring up when ready for
use.
WARNING
To avoid being burned, never grasp
the lighter by the end with the
heating element. Doing so could
result in injury and could also
damage the heating element.
6-11
power a plug-in accessory. Doing

so may cause the plug to stick
and overheat, creating a potential
fire hazard.
CAUTION
. Do not hold the lighter pushed in,
because it will overheat.
. The electrical power socket that
is located in the center console is
originally designed to use a genuine SUBARU cigarette lighter
plug. Do not use non-genuine
cigarette lighter plugs in the
socket. Doing so may cause a
short-circuit and overheating, resulting in a fire.
. If the socket is ever used for a
plug-in accessory such as a cell
phone, that may damage the
portion of the sockets internal
mechanism that causes a cigarette lighter plug to pop out
after its lighter element is heated.
Therefore, do not place a cigarette lighter plug in a socket that
has been used, even once, to
Black plate (226,1)
6-12
Interior equipment
Ashtray (if equipped)
Fully close the lid after using it to help

reduce residual smoke.
Fully close the ashtray after using it to help

NOTE
CAUTION
Do not use ashtrays as waste receptacles or leave a lighted cigarette
in an ashtray. This could cause a
fire.
Particles of ash and tobacco will accumulate around the hinges of the ashtrays inner lid. Clean them off using a
toothbrush or a similar narrow-ended
implement.
NOTE
Particles of ash and tobacco will accumulate around the hinges of the ashtrays inner lid. Clean them off using a
toothbrush or a similar narrow-ended
implement.
& Rear ashtray
& Center console
The portable ashtray is equipped as a

front ashtray. The ashtray is available from
your SUBARU dealer.
When using the ashtray, open the lid of the
ashtray.
The portable ashtray is equipped as a rear

ashtray. The ashtray is available from your
SUBARU dealer.
When using the ashtray, open the lid of the
ashtray.
Fully close the lid after using it to help
Black plate (227,1)
Interior equipment
Floor mat (if equipped)
6-13
Shopping bag hook

CAUTION
Do not hang items on the shopping
bag hook that weigh 3 kg (6 lbs) or
more.
6
CAUTION
A retaining pin is located on the drivers
side floor.
The floor mat is secured using the built-in
grommets, by placing the grommets over
the pins and pushing them downward.
Make sure the drivers floor mat is

placed back in its proper location
and correctly secured on its retaining pins. Also, do not use more than
one floor mat. If the floor mat slips
forward and interferes with the
movement of the pedals during
driving, it could cause an accident.
A shopping bag hook is attached to each

side of the cargo area.
Black plate (228,1)
6-14
Interior equipment
Coat hook
Cargo area cover (if

equipped)
The cargo area cover is provided for
covering the cargo area and to protect its
contents from direct sunlight. This cover is
detachable to make room for additional
cargo.
WARNING
Do not place anything on the extended cover. Putting excessive
weight on the extended cover can
break it and an object on the cover
could tumble forward in the event of
a sudden stop or collision. This
could cause serious injury.
& Using the cover

CAUTION
Be careful not to scratch the rear
gate stays while extending and
rewinding the cover.
Scratches on the stays could cause
leakage of gas from the stays, which
may result in their inability to hold
the rear gate open.
A coat hook is attached to each side of the

cargo area.
CAUTION
Never hang anything on the coat
hook that might obstruct the drivers
view or that could cause injury in
sudden stops or in a collision. Do
not hang items on the coat hook that
weigh 3 kg (6 lbs) or more.
To extend the cover, pull the end of the

cover out of the housing, then insert its
hooks into the catches as shown. To
rewind it, unhook it from the catches and
will rewind automatically. You should hold
on to the cover and guide it back into the
cover housing while it is rewinding.
Black plate (229,1)
Interior equipment
& To remove the cover
& To install the cover housing
1. Rewind the cover.
6-15
ends of the sleeve into the recesses of the

retainers.
6
2. Push the switch that is next to the right
end of the cover housing.
3. Take it off the retainer.
1. Remove the cover of the retainers by

prying on the edge with a flat-head
screwdriver.
2. Insert the projections located on both
Black plate (230,1)
6-16
Interior equipment
Cargo tie-down hooks
CAUTION
The cargo tie-down hooks are designed only for securing light cargo.
Never try to secure cargo that
exceeds the capacity of the hooks.
The maximum load capacity is 20 kg
(44 lbs) per a hook.
The cargo area is equipped with four tiedown hooks so that cargo can be secured
with a cargo net or ropes.
When using the tie-down hooks, turn them
down out of the storing recesses. When
not in use, put the hooks up into the
storing recesses.
Under-floor storage compartment (if equipped)
The storage compartment is located under

the floor of the cargo area and can be
used to store small items. To open the lid,
pull the tab up.
NOTE
When storing a flat tire, put the storage
tray in the cargo area.
CAUTION
. Always keep the lid of the storage
compartment closed while driving to reduce the risk of injury in
the event of sudden stop or an
accident.
Black plate (231,1)
Interior equipment
6-17
. Do not store spray cans, containers with flammable or corrosive

liquids or any other dangerous
items in the storage compartment.
Black plate (13,1)

Fuel ......................................................................
7-2
2.5 L models......................................................
7-25
Fuel requirements ...............................................

Fuel filler lid and cap...........................................
7-2
7-2
Braking ...............................................................
7-26
Preparing to drive ...............................................

Starting and Stopping engine (vehicle
without push-button start system)..................
7-5
Braking tips.......................................................
Brake system ....................................................
Disc brake pad wear warning indicators .............
7-26
7-26
7-27
7-5
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)..........................
7-28
Starting engine....................................................
Stopping engine ..................................................
7-5
7-7
ABS system self-check ......................................

ABS warning light..............................................
7-28
7-28
Starting and Stopping engine (vehicle with

push-button start system) ...............................
7-7
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)

system .............................................................
7-29
Operating range for push-button start system ...... 7-9

Starting engine................................................... 7-10
Stopping engine ................................................. 7-12
When access key does not operate properly ....... 7-13
Steps to take if EBD system fails .......................
7-30
Vehicle Dynamics Control system....................
7-31
Vehicle Dynamics Control system monitor..........

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch ................
7-32
7-34
Manual transmission..........................................
7-14
Parking your vehicle .........................................
7-35
Shifting speeds ..................................................

Driving tips ........................................................
7-15
7-16
Parking brake ....................................................

Parking tips .......................................................
7-35
7-35
Dual range (if equipped) ....................................

Automatic transmission.....................................
7-17
7-18
Hill start assist system (MT vehicles) ..............
7-36
Hill start assist warning light..............................
7-37
Selector lever.....................................................
Selector lever reverse inhibiting function ............
Selection of manual mode ..................................
Maximum speeds ...............................................
Driving tips ........................................................
SPORT mode .....................................................
Shift lock release ...............................................
7-19
7-20
7-21
7-22
7-23
7-24
7-24
Cruise control (if equipped) ..............................
7-38
To set cruise control ..........................................

To temporarily cancel the cruise control .............
To turn off the cruise control..............................
To change the cruising speed ............................
Cruise control indicator light..............................
Cruise control set indicator light ........................
7-38
7-39
7-39
7-40
7-41
7-41
Power steering ...................................................
7-25
2.0 L models ......................................................
7-25
Black plate (234,1)
7-2
Fuel
CAUTION
Use of a fuel which is low in quality
or use of an inappropriate fuel
additive may cause engine damage.
& Fuel requirements

! Non-turbo models
Your engine is designed to use only
unleaded petrol. The use of unleaded
petrol with an octane rating of 95 or higher
is recommended. This octane rating is the
Research Octane number.
If unleaded petrol with an octane rating of
95 or higher is not available, unleaded
may be used.
! Australia models
unleaded petrol. The use of unleaded
is recommended. This octane rating is the
For optimum engine performance and
driveability, it is recommended that you
use premium grade unleaded petrol.

! Turbo models
unleaded petrol with an octane rating of
95 or higher. This octane rating is the
NOTE
The neck of the fuel filler pipe is
designed to accept only an unleaded
petrol filler nozzle. Under no circumstances should leaded petrol be used
because it will damage the emission
control system and may impair driveability and fuel economy. Also, this can
increase maintenance costs.
& Fuel filler lid and cap

! Refueling
Only one person should be involved in
refueling. Do not allow others to approach
the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler
pipe while refueling is in progress.
Be sure to observe any other precautions
that are posted at the service station.
1. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the lid

release lever up. The lever is on the floor
of the drivers seat.
Black plate (235,1)
WARNING
Before opening the fuel filler cap,
first touch the vehicle body or a
metal portion of the fuel pump or
similar object to discharge any
static electricity that may be present
on your body. If your body is carrying an electrostatic charge, there is
a possibility that an electric spark
could ignite the fuel, which could
burn you. To avoid acquiring a new
static electric charge, do not get
back into the vehicle while refueling
is in progress.
1)
2)
Open
Close
7-3
2. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it

slowly counterclockwise.
WARNING
. Fuel vapor is highly flammable.
Before refueling, always first
stop the engine and close all
vehicle doors and windows.
Make sure that there are no
lighted cigarettes, open flames
or electrical sparks in the adjacent area. Only handle fuel outdoors. Quickly wipe up any
spilled fuel.
. When opening the cap, grasp it
firmly and turn it slowly to the
left. Do not remove the cap
quickly. Fuel may be under pressure and spray out of the fuel
filler neck, especially in hot
weather. If you hear a hissing
sound while you are removing
the cap, wait for the sound to
stop and then slowly open the
cap to prevent fuel from spraying
out and creating a fire hazard.
3. Hook the cord that is attached to the

fuel filler cap onto the hook inside the fuel
filler lid.
WARNING
. When refueling, insert the fuel
nozzle securely into the fuel filler
pipe. If the nozzle is lifted or not
fully inserted, its automatic stopping mechanism may not function, causing fuel to overflow the
tank and creating a fire hazard.
. Stop refueling when the automatic stop mechanism on the
fuel nozzle activates. If you continue to add fuel, temperature
changes or other conditions
may cause fuel to overflow from
CONTINUED
Black plate (236,1)
7-4
the tank and create a fire hazard.

4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler
pump automatically stops. Do not add any
more fuel.
5. Put the cap back on, turn it clockwise
until you hear a clicking noise. Be certain
not to catch the tether under the cap while
tightening.
6. Close the fuel filler lid completely.
If you spill any fuel on the painted surface,
rinse it off immediately. Otherwise, the
painted surface could be damaged.
NOTE
. You will see the
sign in the fuel
gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler
door (lid) is located on the right side of
the vehicle.
. If the fuel filler cap is not tightened
until it clicks or if the tether is caught
under the cap, the malfunction indicator lamp may illuminate. Refer to
the Warning and indicator lights
CAUTION
. Never add any cleaning agents to
the fuel tank. The addition of a
cleaning agent may cause damage to the fuel system.
. After refueling, turn the cap to the
right until it clicks to ensure that
it is fully tightened. If the cap is
not securely tightened, fuel may
leak out while the vehicle is being
driven or fuel spillage could
occur in the event of an accident,
creating a fire hazard.
. Do not let fuel spill on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Because
fuel may damage the paint, be
sure to wipe off any spilled fuel
quickly. Paint damage caused by
spilled fuel is not covered under
the SUBARU Limited Warranty.
. We recommend that you always
use a genuine SUBARU fuel filler
cap. If you use the wrong cap, it
may not fit or have proper venting and your fuel tank and emission control system may be damaged. It could also lead to fuel
spillage and a fire.
. Immediately put fuel in the tank
whenever the low fuel warning
light illuminates. Engine misfires

as a result of an empty tank
could cause damage to the engine.
Black plate (237,1)
Preparing to drive
You should perform the following checks
and adjustments every day before you
start driving.
1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and
lights are clean and unobstructed.
2. Check the appearance and condition
of the tires. Also check tires for proper
inflation.
3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of
leaks.
4. Check that the hood and rear gate are
fully closed.
5. Check the adjustment of the seat.
6. Check the adjustment of the inside
and outside mirrors.
7. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your
passengers have fastened their seatbelts.
8. Check the operation of the warning
and indicator lights when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position.
9. Check the gauges, indicator and warning lights after starting the engine.
NOTE
Engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid,
washer fluid and other fluid levels
should be checked daily, weekly or at
fuel stops.
Starting and Stopping engine

(vehicle without push-button
start system)
& Starting engine
CAUTION
Do not operate the starter motor
continuously for more than 10 seconds. If the engine fails to start after
operating the starter for 5 to 10
seconds, wait for 10 seconds or
more before trying again.
! MT vehicles
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories.
3. Press the clutch pedal to the floor and
shift the shift lever into neutral. Hold the
clutch pedal to the floor while starting the
engine.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position and check the operation of the
warning and indicator lights. Refer to the
Warning and indicator lights section in
chapter 3.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the START
position without depressing the accelerator pedal. Release the key immediately
7-5
after the engine has started.

If the engine does not start, try the
following.
(1) Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK position and wait for at least
10 seconds. After checking that the
parking brake is firmly set, turn the
ignition switch to the START position
while depressing the accelerator pedal
slightly (approximately a quarter of the
full stroke). Release the accelerator
pedal as soon as the engine starts.
(2) If this fails to start the engine, turn
the ignition switch back to the LOCK
position and wait for at least 10
seconds. Then fully depress the accelerator pedal and turn the ignition
switch to the START position. If the
engine starts, quickly release the
accelerator pedal.
the ignition switch again to the LOCK
position. After waiting for 10 seconds
or longer, turn the ignition switch to the
START position without depressing
the accelerator pedal.
(4) If the engine still does not start, we
recommend that you contact your
nearest SUBARU dealer for assistance.
CONTINUED
Black plate (238,1)
7-6
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator

lights have gone off after the engine has
started. The fuel injection system automatically lowers the idle speed as the
engine warms up.
NOTE
The engine may be difficult to start
when the battery has been disconnected and reconnected (for maintenance or other purposes). This difficulty is caused by the electronically
controlled throttles self-diagnosis
function. To overcome it, keep the
ignition switch in the ON position
for approximately 10 seconds before
starting the engine.
! AT vehicles
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories.
3. Shift the selector lever to the P or N
position (preferably P position).
4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position and check the operation of the
warning and indicator lights. Refer to the
chapter 3.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the START
position without depressing the accelera-
tor pedal. Release the key immediately

after the engine has started.
If the engine does not start, perform the
following procedures.
(1) Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK position and wait for at least
10 seconds. After checking that the
parking brake is firmly set, turn the
ignition switch to the START position
while depressing the accelerator pedal
slightly (approximately a quarter of the
full stroke). Release the accelerator
pedal as soon as the engine starts.
the ignition switch back to the LOCK
position and wait for at least 10
seconds. Then fully depress the accelerator pedal and turn the ignition
switch to the START position. If the
engine starts, quickly release the
accelerator pedal.
the ignition switch again to the LOCK
position. After waiting for 10 seconds
or longer, turn the ignition switch to the
START position without depressing
the accelerator pedal.
(4) If the engine still does not start, we
nearest SUBARU dealer for assistance.
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator

lights have gone out after the engine has
started. The fuel injection system automatically lowers the idle speed as the
engine warms up.
While the engine is warming up, make
sure that the selector lever is at the P or
N position and that the parking brake is
applied.
CAUTION
If you restart the engine while the
vehicle is moving, shift the selector
lever into the N position. Do not
attempt to place the selector lever of
a moving vehicle into the P position.
NOTE
The engine may be difficult to start
when the battery has been disconnected and reconnected (for maintenance or other purposes). This difficulty is caused by the electronically
controlled throttles self-diagnosis
function. To overcome it, keep the
ignition switch in the ON position
for approximately 10 seconds before
Black plate (239,1)
& Stopping engine

The ignition switch should be turned off
only when the vehicle is stopped and the
engine is idling.
WARNING
Do not stop the engine when the
vehicle is moving. This will cause
loss of power to the power steering
and the brake booster, making steering and braking more difficult. It
could also result in accidental activation of the LOCK position on the
ignition switch, causing the steering
wheel to lock.
Starting and Stopping engine

(vehicle with push-button
start system)
WARNING
the vehicle.
before using the push-button start
system, refer to Radio waves used
for the push-button start system
mentioned later, and contact the
electric medical equipment manufacturer for more information. The
radio waves from the transmitting
antennas on the vehicle could adversely affect the operation of the
electric medical equipment.
7-7

function can be changed. For
the setting procedure, refer to
the Disabling keyless access
function section in chapter 2.
The setting can also be changed
by a SUBARU dealer. For more
details, we recommend that you
. For detailed information about
the operation method of starting
and stopping the engine while
the keyless access functions is
switched to the non-operational
mode, refer to the When access
key does not operate properly
Radio waves used for the pushbutton start system
. The push-button start system use
radio waves of the following
frequency* in addition to the
radio waves used for the remote
keyless entry system functions.
The radio waves are periodically
output from the antennas installed on the vehicle as shown
in the following illustrations.
*Radio frequency: 134 kHz
CONTINUED
Black plate (240,1)
7-8
CAUTION
1)
Antenna

uses weak radio waves. The
status of the access key and the
environmental conditions may
interfere with the communication
between the access key and the
vehicle under the following conditions, and it may not be possible to lock or unlock the doors or
start the engine.
When operating near a facility
When products that transmit
When carrying more than one
access key
placed near wireless communication equipment such as a
cell phone
placed near a metallic object
When metallic accessories are

When carrying the access key
When the battery of the access key is discharged
door pocket or at the corner of
the cargo area) or within 2 m (6.6
garage).
. The access key may be locked
the power may not turn on in
some cases depending on the
location of the access key.
Black plate (241,1)
access function section in chapter 2. The setting can also be

Although you can replace the
that the battery should be
replaced by a SUBARU dealer
to avoid the risk of damage at
the time of replacement.
Do not get the access key wet.
dry completely.
Do not apply strong impacts
to the access key.
Keep the access key away
Never leave the access key in
Do not wash the access key in

Do not leave the access key in
Do not leave the access key
one.
Once you enter the vehicle carrying the
access key, the power can be switched
and the engine can be started.
7-9
& Operating range for pushbutton start system
7
1)
2)
Antenna
Operating range
NOTE
. If the access key is not detected
within the operating range of the antennas inside the vehicle, the power
switch and the engine start cannot be
operated.
. Even when the access key is outside
the vehicle, if it is placed too close to
the glass, the engine may start.
following places. It may become impossible to operate the power switch
and the engine start.
CONTINUED
Black plate (242,1)
7-10
On the instrument panel

On the floor
Inside the glove box
Inside the door trim pocket
On the rear seat
At the corner of the cargo area
. If the battery of the access key is
discharged, perform the procedure
start the engine. In such a case, replace
the battery immediately. Refer to the
Replacing battery of access key
& Starting engine

WARNING
. Never start the engine from outside the vehicle. It may result in
an unexpected accident.
. If the engine is stopped during
driving, the catalyst may overheat and burn.
. Do not leave the engine running
in locations with poor ventilation,
such as a garage and indoors.
The exhaust gas may enter the
vehicle or indoors, and it may
result in carbon monoxide poi-
soning.
. If the indicator on the pushbutton ignition switch flashes in
green after the engine has
started, never drive the vehicle.
The steering is still locked, and it
may result in an unexpected
accident.
CAUTION
. When the operation indicator on
the push-button ignition switch is
flashing in orange, there may be
a malfunction with the vehicle.
We recommend that you contact
a SUBARU dealer immediately.
. If the indicator on the pushbutton ignition switch is flashing
in green after the engine has
started, it means that the steering
is still locked. While moving the
steering wheel right and left,
depress the brake pedal, and
press the push-button ignition
switch.
. When starting the engine, be sure
to sit in the drivers seat.
. Do not continue pushing the
push-button ignition switch for
more than 10 seconds. Doing so
could cause a malfunction. If the

engine does not start, stop pushing the push-button ignition
switch and turn off the engine.
Wait 10 seconds, and then push
the push-button ignition switch
to start the engine.
. After the engine starts, the engine speed will be kept high until
the engine coolant temperature
indicator is halfway between H
and L.
. If the battery is discharged, the
steering cannot be unlocked.
Charge the battery.
. After the battery is discharged
and replaced, it may require
initialization of the steering lock
system to start the engine. In
such a case, initialize the steering lock.*
*Initialization of steering lock
Switch the power to OFF. Open
and close the drivers door, and
wait for approximately 10 seconds. When the steering is
locked, the initialization is completed.
Black plate (243,1)
NOTE
. When the push-button ignition
switch is pressed while depressing
the clutch pedal (MT vehicles) or the
brake pedal (AT vehicles), the engine
starter operates for a maximum of 10
seconds and after starting the engine,
the starter stops automatically.
. Avoid rapid racing and rapid acceleration immediately after the engine
has started.
. For a short time after the engine has
started, the engine speed is kept high.
When the warm-up is completed, the
engine speed lowers automatically.
. On rare occasions, it may be difficult
to start the engine depending on the
gasoline and the usage condition (repeated driving of a distance in which
the engine coolant temperature indicator does not move). In such a case, it is
recommended to change the gasoline
to a different brand.
. On rare occasions, transient knocking may be heard from the engine when
the accelerator is operated rapidly
such as a rapid start-up and a rapid
acceleration. This is not a malfunction.
. The engine starts more easily when
the headlights, air conditioner and rear
window defogger are turned off.
. When the push-button ignition
switch is pressed while depressing

the clutch pedal (MT vehicles) or the
brake pedal (AT vehicles), the engine
can be started regardless of the power
status.
. If the immobilizer indicator light
illuminates when you attempt to start
the engine but the engine does not
start, press the push-button ignition
switch to switch the power to OFF
and then try to start the engine again.
. If the engine does not start, press
the push-button ignition switch without
depressing the clutch pedal (MT vehicles) or the brake pedal (AT vehicles) to
switch the power to OFF. Then, while
depressing the clutch pedal (MT vehicles) or the brake pedal (AT vehicles)
more forcefully, press the push-button
ignition switch.
. The usual door locking/unlocking
and engine start procedures may not
function depending on the radio wave
conditions around the vehicle. In such
a case, refer to the When access key
does not operate properly section in
chapter 2 to lock and unlock the doors,
and refer to When access key does
start the engine.
7-11
! MT vehicles
1)
2)
Operation indicator

pressed while depressing the clutch pedal, the engine will start. The starting
procedure of the engine is as follows.
drivers seat.
engaged.
neutral.
5. Depress the clutch pedal until the
indicator on the push-button ignition
switch turns green.
6. While depressing the clutch pedal,
CONTINUED
Black plate (244,1)
7-12
press the push-button ignition switch.
NOTE
In case the engine does not start by the
normal engine start procedure, move
the shift lever to the neutral position,
and switch the power to Acc. Depress the clutch pedal, and press the
push-button ignition switch for at least
15 seconds. The engine may start. Only
use this engine start procedure in case
of emergency.
! AT vehicles
dure of the engine is as follows.

drivers seat.
engaged.
the P position. The engine can also start
when the selector lever is in the N
position, however, for safety reasons, start
in the P position.
4. Depress the brake pedal until the
ignition switch turns green. When starting
with the selector lever in the N position,
the indicator does not turn green.
5. While depressing the brake pedal,
press the push-button ignition switch.
NOTE
1)
2)
Operation indicator

pressed while depressing the brake pedal,
the engine will start. The starting proce-
. In case the engine does not start by

the normal engine start procedure,
move the selector lever to the P
position, and switch the power to
Acc. Depress the brake pedal, and
press the push-button ignition switch
for at least 15 seconds. The engine may
start. Only use this engine start procedure in case of emergency.
. When the engine is not started, the
brake pedal may feel stiff. In such a
case, depress the brake pedal more
forcefully than usual. Check that the

ignition switch turns green, and press
the push-button ignition switch to start
the engine.
& Stopping engine

Stop the vehicle completely. Move the
selector lever to the P position (AT
vehicles). Press the push-button ignition
switch. The engine will stop, and the
power will be switched to OFF.
WARNING
. Do not touch the push-button
ignition switch during driving.
When the push-button ignition
switch is pressed for 3 seconds
or longer, the engine will stop.
When the engine stops, the brake
booster will not function. A greater foot pressure will be required
on the brake pedal.
The power steering system will
not operate either. A greater
force will be required to steer,
and it may result in an unexpected accident.
. If the engine stops during driving,
do not operate the push-button
ignition switch or open any of the
Black plate (245,1)
doors until the vehicle is stopped

in a safe location. It is dangerous
because the steering lock may be
activated. Stop the vehicle in a
safe place, and we recommend
that you contact a SUBARU dealer immediately.
CAUTION
For AT vehicles:
. Do not stop the engine while the
other than the P position.
. If the engine is stopped while the
other than the P position, the
power will be in Acc. If the
vehicle is left in this condition,
the battery may be discharged.
NOTE
By pressing the push-button ignition
switch for 3 seconds or longer during
driving, the engine can be stopped. Do
not stop the engine during driving
except in an emergency.
7-13

operate properly
If the engine start procedures cannot be
operated because of strong radio noise in
the surrounding area or low battery of the
access key, try the following to start the
engine. When the battery of the access
key is discharged, replace it with a new
one.
! Starting engine when access key
does not operate properly
When operating in a location with strong
radio noise, or when the battery of the
access key is low, the power can be
switched to ON and the engine can be
started by the push-button ignition switch
in the following procedures.
! MT vehicles
engaged.
neutral.
4. Depress the clutch pedal.

indicator illuminates in green, while depressing the brake pedal and the clutch
pedal, press the push-button ignition
switch.
CAUTION
Keep metallic objects, magnetic
sources and signal transmitters
away from between the access key
CONTINUED
Black plate (246,1)
7-14
and the push-button ignition switch.

They may interfere with the communication between the access key

indicator illuminates in green, while depressing the brake pedal, press the pushbutton ignition switch.
Manual transmission
! AT vehicles
engaged.
the P position.
CAUTION
Keep metallic objects, magnetic
sources and signal transmitters
away from between the access key
They may interfere with the communication between the access key
The manual transmission is a fully synchromeshed, 5-forward-speed and 1-reverse-speed transmission.
The shift pattern is shown on the shift
lever knob. When shifting from 5th gear to
reverse gear, first return the shift lever to
the neutral position then shift into reverse
gear.

To change gears, fully depress the clutch

pedal, move the shift lever, and gradually
let up on the clutch pedal.
If it is difficult to shift into gear, put the
transmission in neutral, release the clutch
pedal momentarily, and then try again.
Black plate (247,1)
WARNING
Do not drive the vehicle with the
clutch disengaged (i.e., when the
clutch pedal is depressed) or with
the shift lever in the neutral position.
Engine braking has no effect in
either of these conditions and the
risk of an accident is consequently
increased.
CAUTION
Shift into reverse ONLY when the
vehicle has completely stopped. It
may cause damage to the transmission to try shifting into reverse when
the vehicle is moving.
7-15
& Shifting speeds

! Recommended shifting speeds
The best compromise between fuel economy and vehicle performance during
normal driving is ensured by shifting up
at the speeds listed in the following table.
Shift up (dual range
HI position)
km/h (mph)
1st to 2nd
24 (15)
2nd to 3rd
40 (25)
3rd to 4th
65 (40)
4th to 5th
73 (45)
! Maximum allowable speeds

The following tables show the maximum
speeds that are possible with each different gear. The tachometers needle will
enter the red area if these speeds are
exceeded.
With the exception of cases where sudden
acceleration is required, the vehicle
should not be driven with the tachometers
needle inside the red area. Failure to
observe this precaution can lead to
excessive engine wear and poor fuel
economy.
CONTINUED
Black plate (248,1)
7-16
2.0 L models
2.5 L non-turbo models
AWD
AWD
Dual range
Dual range
Gear
km/h (mph)
2.5 L turbo
models
AWD
LO
HI
LO
HI
1st
36 (22)
52 (32)
41 (25)
49 (30)
2nd
61 (38)
88 (55)
69 (43)
83 (52)
81 (50)
3rd
87 (54)
126 (78)
99 (61)
118 (73)
116 (72)
45 (27)
4th
116 (72)
168 (104)
132 (82)
158 (98)
163 (101)
5th
145 (90)
Top speed
184 (114)
Top speed
Top speed
Never exceed posted speed limits.
WARNING
When shifting down a gear, ensure
that the vehicle is not traveling at a
speed exceeding the Maximum Allowable Speed for the gear which is
about to be selected. Failure to
observe this precaution can lead to
engine over-revving and this in turn
can result in engine damage.
In addition, sudden application of
engine brakes when the vehicle is
traveling on a slippery surface can
lead to wheel locking; as a consequence, control of the vehicle may
be lost and the risk of an accident
increased.
& Driving tips

Do not drive with your foot resting on the
clutch pedal and do not use the clutch to
hold your vehicle at a standstill on an
upgrade. Either of those actions may
cause clutch damage.
Do not drive with your hand resting on the
shift lever. This may cause wear on the
transmission components.
When it is necessary to reduce vehicle
speed due to slow traffic, turning corners,
or driving up steep hills, downshift to a
Black plate (249,1)
lower gear before the engine starts to

labor.
Dual range (if equipped)
7-17
CAUTION
. If the selector lever stops in the
neutral position between HI
and LO, release the accelerator
pedal and shift the selector lever
firmly.
. To prevent the overheating of the
engine and transmission, do not
use the LO position for continuous driving.
On steep downgrades, downshift the

transmission to 4th, 3rd or 2nd gear as
necessary; this helps to maintain a safe
speed and to extend brake pad life.
In this way, the engine provides a braking
effect. Remember, if you ride (over use)
the brakes while descending a hill, they
may overheat and not work properly.
The engine may, on rare occasions, knock
when the vehicle rapidly accelerates or
rapidly pulls away from a standstill. This
phenomenon does not indicate a fault.
7
1)
2)
HI position:
For normal driving.
LO position:
Used for driving up a steep grade or
driving on sand requiring more driving
force than that available in the HI
position.
To change from HI to LO or vice versa,

press the clutch pedal fully to the floor,
move the selector lever, and gradually let
the pedal up.
It is recommended that the LO position
should be used when starting the vehicle
on an uphill slope with a trailer attached.
Black plate (250,1)
7-18
Automatic transmission
The automatic transmission is electronically controlled and provides 4 forward
speeds and 1 reverse speed. Also, it has a
manual mode and a SPORT mode.
WARNING
Do not shift from the P or N
position into the D or R
position while depressing the
accelerator pedal. This may
cause the vehicle to jump forward or backward.
CAUTION
. Shift into the P or R position
only after the vehicle is completely stopped. Shifting while the
vehicle is moving may cause
damage to the transmission.
. Do not race the engine for more
than 5 seconds in any position
except the N or P position
when the brake is set or when
chocks are used in the wheels.
This may cause the automatic
transmission fluid to overheat.
. Avoid shifting from one of the
forward driving positions into the

R position or vice versa until
the vehicle has completely
stopped. Such shifting may
cause damage to the transmission.
. When parking the vehicle, first
securely apply the parking brake
and then place the selector lever
in the P position. Avoid parking
for a long time with the selector
lever in any other position as
doing so could result in a dead
battery.
which the on-board computer has

collected and stored in memory to
allow the transmission to shift at the
most appropriate times for the current
condition of your vehicle. Optimized
shifting will be restored as the vehicle
continues to be driven for a while.
NOTE
. When the engine coolant temperature is still low, your vehicles automatic transmission will up-shift at higher engine speeds than when the coolant temperature is sufficiently high in
order to shorten the warm-up time and
improve driveability. The gearshift timing will automatically shift to the normal timing after the engine has warmed
up.
. Immediately after ATF (automatic
transmission fluid) is replaced, you
may feel that the automatic transmission operation is somewhat unusual.
This results from invalidation of data
Black plate (251,1)
& Selector lever
The selector lever has four positions, P,

R, N, D and also has manual gate for
using SPORT mode or manual mode.
! P (Park)
This position is for parking the vehicle and
In this position, the transmission is mechanically locked to prevent the vehicle
from rolling freely.
When you park the vehicle, first set the
parking brake fully, then shift into the P
position. Do not hold the vehicle with only
the transmission.
To shift the selector lever from the P to
any other position, you should depress the
brake pedal fully then move the selector
lever. This prevents the vehicle from
lurching when it is started.
! R (Reverse)
This position is for backing the vehicle.
: Shift possible with brake pedal depressed

: Shift possible with brake pedal not
depressed
1) Left-hand drive vehicles
2) Right-hand drive vehicles
To shift from the N to R position, stop

the vehicle completely then move the
lever to the R position.
When the ignition switch has been turned
to the LOCK position, movement of the
selector lever from the N to R position
is possible for a limited time period by
depressing the brake pedal, and then it
becomes impossible. For details, refer to
7-19
Selector lever reverse inhibiting function

in this section.
! N (Neutral)
This position is for restarting a stalled
engine.
In this position the wheels and transmission are not locked. In this position, the
transmission is neutral; the vehicle will roll
freely, even on the slightest incline unless
the parking brake or foot brake is on.
Avoid coasting with the transmission in
neutral. Engine braking has no effect in
this condition.
NOTE
If the selector lever is in the N
position when you stop the engine for
parking, you may not subsequently be
able to move it to the R and P
positions. If this happens, turn the
ignition switch to the ON position.
You will then be able to move the
selector lever to the P position.
CONTINUED
Black plate (252,1)
7-20
WARNING
Do not drive the vehicle with the
selector lever in the N (neutral)
position. Engine braking has no
effect in this condition and the risk
of an accident is consequently increased.
! D (Drive)
This position is for normal driving.
The transmission automatically shifts into
a suitable gear from 1st to 4th according to
the vehicle speed and the acceleration
you require.
When more acceleration is required in this
position, press the accelerator pedal fully
to the floor and hold that position. The
transmission will automatically downshift
to 3rd, 2nd or 1st gear. When you release
the pedal, the transmission will return to
the original gear position.
To use the SPORT mode, move the lever
from this position into the manual gate. To
use the manual mode, move the lever
from this position into the manual gate
then move it toward the + and ends.
! While climbing a grade

When driving up a hill, undesired upshift to
4th gear is prevented from taking place
when the accelerator is released. This
minimizes the chance of subsequent
downshifting to a lower gear when accelerating again. This prevents repeated
upshifting and downshifting resulting in a
smoother operation of the vehicle.
NOTE
The transmission may downshift to 2nd
or 1st gear, depending on the way the
accelerator pedal is pressed to accelerate the vehicle again.
! While going down a hill
When you are descending a hill or any
other slope while braking with the
SPORT mode selected, the transmission
may downshift to 3rd or 2nd gear depending on how hard you depress the brake
pedal, causing engine braking to work.
Reacceleration for a short time will cause
the transmission to upshift normally.
NOTE
. A 4th-to-3rd automatic downshift
will not occur at speeds above 80
km/h (50 mph) and a 3rd-to-2nd automatic downshift will not occur at
speeds above 38 km/h (24 mph).
. Automatic downshifts to 3rd or 2nd

may occur even when driving on a level
road depending on conditions, such as
how hard you depress the brake pedal.
& Selector lever reverse inhibiting function

This function prevents accidental movement of the selector lever to the R
position while the vehicle is moving.
The function becomes operational when
the vehicle reaches a speed of approximately 10 km/h (6 mph). Once operational, it prevents the selector lever from
being moved from the N position to the
R position. When the vehicle speed
drops below 10 km/h (6 mph), the function
is canceled. The selector lever can then
be moved to the R and P positions.
When the ignition switch has been turned
to the LOCK position, movement of the
selector lever from the N position to the
R position is possible for a limited time
period by depressing the brake pedal and
then becomes impossible. Also, the selector lever cannot be moved to the R
position after it has been placed in the P
position and then placed again in the N
position.
When the movement of the selector lever
from the N position to the R position
Black plate (253,1)
has become impossible, turn the ignition

switch back to the ON position then
move the selector lever to the P position.
Pressing the selector lever release button
also makes it possible to move the
selector lever to the P position at this
time.
7-21
dealer.
& Selection of manual mode
! Selector lever release button
1)
2)
3)
With the vehicle either moving or stationary, move the selector lever from the D
position to the manual gate then move it to
the + end or end of the manual gate
to select manual mode.
If you inadvertently have turned the ignition switch to the LOCK position with the
selector lever in the N position, proceed
as follows. By referring to the Shift lock
release section in this chapter, remove
the shift lock release cover. Then, with the
screwdriver inserted into the hole, move
the selector lever to the P position. If the
selector lever reverse inhibiting function
fails, we recommend that you have the
vehicle inspected by the nearest SUBARU
Upshift indicator
Downshift indicator
Gear position indicator
When the manual mode is selected, the

gear position indicator and upshift indicator and/or downshift indicator on the
combination meter illuminate. The gear
position indicator shows the currently
selected gear in the 1st-to-4th-gear range.
The upshift and downshift indicators show
when a gear shift is possible. When the
upshift indicator illuminates, upshifting is possible. When the downshift
indicator illuminates, downshifting is
possible. When both indicators illuminate,
upshifting and downshifting are both possible. When the vehicle stops (for example, at traffic signals), the downshift
indicator turns off.
CONTINUED
Black plate (254,1)
7-22
Gear shifts can be performed by using the

selector lever.
Using the selector lever

Shift to the next-higher gear by briefly
pushing the selector lever toward the +
end of the manual gate.
Shift to the next-lower gear by briefly
pulling the selector lever toward the
end of the manual gate.
NOTE
Please read the following points carefully and bear them in mind when using
the manual mode.
. If you attempt to shift down when
the engine speed is too high, i.e., when
a downshift would push the tachometer
needle beyond the red zone, beeps will
be emitted to warn you that the down-
shift is not possible.

. If you attempt to shift up when the
vehicle speed is too low, the transmission will not respond.
. You can perform a skip-shift (for
example, from 4th to 2nd) by operating
the selector lever twice in rapid succession.
. The transmission automatically selects 1st gear when the vehicle stops
moving.
. If the temperature of the automatic
transmission fluid becomes too high,
the AT OIL TEMP warning light will
illuminate and upshifts to 4th gear will
not be possible. Immediately stop the
vehicle in a safe place and let the
engine idle until the warning light turns
off.
In addition, sudden application of

engine braking caused by down
shifting when the vehicle is travelling on a slippery surface can lead
to wheel locking; as a consequence,
control of the vehicle may be lost
and the risk of an accident increased.
The following tables show the maximum
speeds that are possible with each different gear.
When down shifting, it is important to
confirm that the current vehicle speed is
not in excess of the Maximum Allowable
Speed of the gear which is about to be
selected.
& Maximum speeds

WARNING
When down shifting, ensure that the
vehicle is not travelling at a speed
exceeding the Maximum Allowable
Speed for the gear which is about to
be selected. Failure to observe this
precaution can lead to engine overrevving and this in turn can result in
engine damage.
Black plate (255,1)
Position
1st
2.0 L models
km/h (mph)
2.5 L turbo models
D position
Manual mode
D position
Manual mode
48 (30)
63 (39)
48 (30)
45 (28)
58 (36)
2nd
107 (67)
119 (74)
101 (63)
105 (65)
106 (66)
3rd
169 (105)
185 (115)
160 (99)
170 (106)
172 (107)
Never exceed posted speed limits.
NOTE
In order to prevent over-revving during deceleration of the vehicle, the
transmission will remain in the current gear if the speed of the vehicle is in
excess of the Maximum Allowable Speed for the gear to which the selector lever
has been moved.
7-23
& Driving tips

. On a road surface where there is a risk
of wheelspin (for example, a snow- or
gravel-covered road), you can pull away
from a standstill (safely and easily) by first
selecting the 2nd gear of the manual
mode.
. Always apply the foot or parking brake
when the vehicle is stopped in the D or
R position.
. Always set the parking brake when
parking your vehicle. Do not hold the
vehicle with only the transmission.
. Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary
position on an uphill grade by using the
D position. Use the brake instead.
. The engine may, on rare occasions,
knock when the vehicle rapidly accelerates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill.
This phenomenon does not indicate a
fault.
CONTINUED
Black plate (256,1)
7-24
& SPORT mode
& Shift lock release

If the selector lever does not move from
the P position with the brake pedal
depressed and the ignition switch in the
ON position, perform the following steps:
To override the shift lock:
1. Set the parking brake and stop the
engine.
2. Take out the screwdriver from the tool
bag.
SPORT mode is used when power is

needed for rapid acceleration or for uphill
driving. To select this mode, move the
selector lever from the D position to the
manual gate.
When selected, the SPORT mode indicator light on the combination meter will
illuminate.
To deselect SPORT mode, move the
selector lever to the D position or select
manual mode.
To subsequently reselect SPORT mode,
move the selector lever to the D position
and from there to the manual gate.
In this mode, the transmission shifts up at
higher vehicle speeds and shifts down
more responsively than in normal mode.
3. Remove the cover by prying on the

edge with a flat-head screwdriver.
Black plate (257,1)
Power steering
& 2.0 L models
7-25
more resistance when the steering

wheel is operated. We recommend
that you drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the
vehicle inspected immediately.
NOTE
4. Insert the screwdriver into the hole.

5. Push down on the screwdriver and
move the selector lever from the P to the
N position.
6. Remove the screwdriver from the hole.
Depress the brake pedal and start the
engine.
We recommend that you take your vehicle
to the nearest SUBARU dealer immediately to have the system repaired.
Power steering warning light
2.0 L models are equipped with an electric

power steering system. When the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position, the
power steering warning light on the
combination meter illuminates to inform
the driver that the warning system is
functioning properly. Then, if the engine
started, the warning light turns off to inform
the driver that the steering power assist is
operational.
CAUTION
When the power steering warning
light is illuminated, there may be
If the steering wheel is operated frequently while the vehicle is stopped,

the power steering control system may
temporarily limit the power assist in
order to prevent the system from overheating. At this time, there will be more
resistance to steering. However this is
not a malfunction. The normal steering
force will be restored after a short time.
& 2.5 L models

2.5 L models are equipped with a hydraulic power steering system. The power
steering system operates only when the
engine is running.
If you lose power steering assist because
the engine stops or the system fails to
function, you can steer but it will take
much more effort.
NOTE
Right after the engine has been started
and before it has warmed up, you may
hear a noise coming from areas adja CONTINUED
Black plate (258,1)
7-26
cent to the power steering pump which

is located at the right-front area of the
engine compartment. This noise is
normal. It does not indicate power
steering system trouble.
CAUTION
Do not hold the steering wheel at the
fully locked position left or right for
more than 5 seconds. This may
damage the power steering pump.
Braking
& Braking tips
WARNING
Never rest your foot on the brake
pedal while driving. This can cause
dangerous overheating of the
brakes and needless wear on the
brake pads and linings.
! When the brakes get wet
When driving in rain or after washing the
vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a
result, brake stopping distance will be
longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle
at a safe speed while lightly depressing
the brake pedal to heat up the brakes.
! Use of engine braking
Remember to make use of engine braking
in addition to foot braking. When descending a grade, if only the foot brake is used,
the brakes may start working improperly
because of brake fluid overheating,
caused by overheated brake pads. To
help prevent this, shift into a lower gear to
get stronger engine braking.
! Braking when a tire is punctured
Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly
when a tire is punctured. This could cause
a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep

driving straight ahead while gradually
reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the
road to a safe place.
& Brake system

! Two separate circuits
Your vehicle has two separate circuit
brake systems. Each circuit works diagonally across the vehicle. If one circuit of
the brake system should fail, the other half
of the system still works. If one circuit fails,
the brake pedal will go down much closer
to the floor than usual and you will need to
press it down much harder. And a much
longer distance will be needed to stop the
vehicle.
! Brake booster
The brake booster uses engine manifold
vacuum to assist braking force. Do not
turn off the engine while driving because
that will turn off the brake booster, resulting in poor braking power.
The brakes will continue to work even
when the brake booster completely stops
functioning. If this happens, however, you
will have to push the pedal much harder
than normal and the braking distance will
increase.
Black plate (259,1)
! Brake assist system
WARNING
Do not be overconfident about the
brake assist. It is not a system that
brings more braking ability to the
vehicle beyond its braking capability. Always use the utmost care
when driving regarding vehicle
speed and safe distance.
cate any malfunctions, and the brake

assist system is operating properly.
. You might feel that the brake pedal
is applied by lighter force and generates a greater braking force.
. You might hear clicking (knocking)
sounds around brake pedal.
7-27
dealer.
& Disc brake pad wear warning

indicators
CAUTION
When you need to brake suddenly,

continue depressing the brake pedal
strongly to bring the effect of the
brake assist.
Brake assist is a driver assistance system.
It assists the brake power when the driver
cannot depress the brake pedal strongly
and the brake power is insufficient.
Brake assist generates the brake power
according to the speed at which the driver
depresses the brake pedal.
NOTE
When you depress the brake pedal
strongly or suddenly, the following
phenomena occur. However, even
though these occur, they do not indi-
The disc brake pad wear warning indicators on the front right and rear right disc
brakes give a warning noise when the
brake pads are worn.
If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard
from the disc brakes while braking, we
recommend that you immediately have
your vehicle checked by your SUBARU
Black plate (260,1)
7-28
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

The ABS system prevents the lock-up of
wheels which may occur during sudden
braking or braking on slippery road surfaces. This helps prevent the loss of
steering control and directional stability
caused by wheel lock-up.
When the ABS system is operating, you
may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight
vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal
when the ABS operates.
The ABS system will not operate when the
vehicle speed is below approximately 10
km/h (6 mph).
WARNING
Always use the utmost care in
driving overconfidence because
you are driving with an ABS
equipped vehicle could easily lead
to a serious accident.
CAUTION
. The ABS system does not always
decrease stopping distance. You
should always maintain a safe
following distance from other
vehicles.
. When driving on badly surfaced
roads, gravel roads, icy roads, or
over deep newly fallen snow,
stopping distances may be longer for a vehicle with the ABS
system than one without. When
driving under these conditions,
therefore, reduce your speed and
leave ample distance from other
vehicles.
. When you feel the ABS system
operating, you should maintain
constant brake pedal pressure.
Do not pump the brake pedal
since doing so may defeat the
operation of the ABS system.
& ABS system self-check

Just after the vehicle is started, you may
feel on the brake pedal a vibration similar
to when the ABS operates, and you may
also hear the sound of the ABS working
from the engine compartment. This is
caused by an automatic functional test of
the ABS system being carried out and
does not indicate any abnormal condition.
& ABS warning light
The ABS warning light illuminates when

the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position and turns off after the engine has
started.
This is an indication that the ABS system
is working properly.
When driving with an insufficient battery
voltage such as when the engine is jump
started, the ABS warning light may illuminate. This is due to the low battery voltage
When the battery becomes fully charged,
the light will turn off.
Black plate (261,1)
CAUTION
If the warning light behaves as
follows, the ABS system may not
be working properly.
When the warning light is on, the
ABS function shuts down; however,
the conventional brake system continues to operate normally.
. The warning light does not illuminate when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON position.
. The warning light illuminates
when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position, but
it does not turn off even when the
vehicle speed exceeds approximately 12 km/h (8 mph).
. The warning light illuminates during driving.
If these occur, we recommend that
you have the ABS system repaired
at the first available opportunity by
your SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
described below, the ABS system may
be considered normal.
. The warning light remains illuminated after the engine has been started,
but it turns off when the vehicle speed
reaches approximately 12 km/h (8
mph).
remains off.
7-29
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system

The EBD system maximizes the effectiveness of the brakes by allowing the rear
brakes to supply a greater proportion of
the braking force. It functions by adjusting
the distribution of braking force to the rear
wheels in accordance with the vehicles
loading condition and speed.
The EBD system is an integral part of the
ABS system and uses some of the ABS
systems components to perform its function of optimizing the distribution of braking force. If any of the ABS components
used by the EBD function fails, the EBD
system also stops working.
When the EBD system is operating, you
may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight
vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal
CONTINUED
Black plate (262,1)
7-30
& Steps to take if EBD system

fails
If a fault occurs in the EBD system, the

system stops working and the brake
system warning light and ABS warning
light illuminate simultaneously.
The EBD system may be faulty if the
brake system warning light and ABS
warning light illuminate simultaneously
during driving.
Even if the EBD system fails, the conventional braking system will still function.
However, the rear wheels will be more
prone to locking when the brakes are
applied harder than usual and the vehicles motion may therefore become somewhat harder to control.
If the brake system warning light and ABS
warning light illuminate simultaneously,

take the following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe,
flat place.
2. Shut down the engine, apply the
parking brake, and then restart it.
3. Release the parking brake. If both
warning lights turn off, the EBD system
may be faulty. We recommend that you
drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU
dealer and have the system inspected.
4. If both warning lights illuminate again
and stay illuminated after the engine has
been restarted, shut down the engine
again, apply the parking brake, and check
the brake fluid level.
5. If the brake fluid level is not below the
MIN mark, the EBD system may be
faulty. We recommend that you drive
carefully to the nearest SUBARU dealer
and have the system inspected.
6. If the brake fluid level is below the
MIN mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle.
Instead, we recommend that you have the
vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU
dealer for repair.
WARNING
. Driving with the brake system
warning light on is dangerous.
This indicates your brake system
may not be working properly. If
the light remains illuminated, we
brakes inspected by a SUBARU
dealer immediately.
. If at all in doubt about whether
the brakes are operating properly, do not drive the vehicle. We
recommend that you have your
vehicle towed to the nearest
SUBARU dealer for repair.
Black plate (263,1)
Vehicle Dynamics Control

system
WARNING
Always use the utmost care in
driving overconfidence because
you are driving with a Vehicle Dynamics Control system equipped
vehicle could easily lead to a serious accident.
CAUTION
. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with Vehicle Dynamics Control,
winter tires or snow chains
should be used when driving on
snow-covered or icy roads; in
addition, vehicle speed should
be reduced considerably. Simply
having a Vehicle Dynamics Control system does not guarantee
that the vehicle will be able to
avoid accidents in any situation.
. Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is an
indication that the road being
travelled on has a slippery surface; since having Vehicle Dynamics Control is no guarantee
that full vehicle control will be

maintained at all times and under
all conditions, its activation
should be seen as a sign that
the speed of the vehicle should
be reduced considerably.
. Whenever suspension components, steering components, or
an axle are removed from a
vehicle equipped with Vehicle
Dynamics Control, we recommend that you have an authorized SUBARU dealer perform an
inspection of that system.
. The following precautions should
be observed in order to ensure
that the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is operating properly:
All four wheels should be
fitted with tires of the same
size, type, and brand. Furthermore, the amount of wear
should be the same for all
four tires.
Keep the tire pressure at the
proper level as shown on the
label attached to the vehicles
door pillar.
In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding
on a slippery road surface and/or during
7-31
cornering and/or an evasive maneuver,

the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
adjusts the engines output and the
wheels respective braking forces to help
maintain traction and directional control.
. Traction Control Function
The traction control function is designed to
prevent spinning of the driving wheels on
slippery road surfaces, thereby helping to
maintain traction and directional control.
Activation of this function is shown by
steady illumination of the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light.
. Skid Suppression Function
The skid suppression function is designed
to help maintain directional stability by
suppressing the wheels tendency to slide
sideways during steering operations. Activation of this function is shown by flashing
of the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation
indicator light.
NOTE
. Slight twitching of the brake pedal
may be felt when the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system operates; a small degree of vehicle or steering wheel shaking may also be noticed in this situation. These are normal characteristics
of Vehicle Dynamics Control operation
and are no cause for alarm.
CONTINUED
Black plate (264,1)
7-32
. You may briefly hear an operating

sound from the engine compartment
when starting the engine and when
driving off after starting the engine.
This noise is generated as a result of a
check being performed on the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system and is normal.
. Depending on the timing of activation of the brakes, the brake pedal may
seem to jolt when you drive off after
starting the engine. This too is a
consequence of the Vehicle Dynamics
Control operational check and is normal.
. In the circumstances listed in the
following, the vehicle may be more
unstable than it feels to the driver.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control System
may therefore operate. Such operation
does not indicate a system fault.
on gravel-covered or rutted
roads
on unfinished roads
when the vehicle is towing a
trailer
when the vehicle is fitted with
snow tires or winter tires
. Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system will cause operation of
the steering wheel to feel slightly
different compared to that for normal
conditions.
. Even if the vehicle is equipped with
a Vehicle Dynamics Control system, it
is important that winter tires be used
when driving on snow-covered or icy
roads. (All four wheels should be fitted
with tires of the same size and brand).
Furthermore, if snow chains are to be
used, they should be fitted on the front
wheels. When a vehicle is fitted with
snow chains, however, the effectiveness of the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system is reduced and this should be
taken into account when driving the
vehicle in such a condition.
. It is always important to reduce
speed when approaching a corner,
even if the vehicle is equipped with
Vehicle Dynamics Control.
. All four wheels should be fitted with
tires of the same size, type, and brand;
furthermore, the amount of wear
should be the same for all four tires. If
these precautions are not observed
and non-matching tires are used, it is
quite possible that the Vehicle Dynamics Control system will be unable
to operate correctly as intended.
. Always turn off the engine before
replacing a tire as failure to do so may
render the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system unable to operate correctly.
& Vehicle Dynamics Control

system monitor
! Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light
The indicator light illuminates when the

position; it turns off after the engine has
started. This indicator light flashes during
activation of the skid suppression function
and illuminates continuously during activation of the traction control function.
The following two situations could indicate
a malfunction of the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system; if either should occur, we
recommend that you have an authorized
SUBARU dealer carry out an inspection of
that system at the first available opportunity.
Black plate (265,1)
. The indicator light does not illuminate

ON position.
. The indicator light does not turn off
approximately 2 seconds after the ignition
switch has been turned to the ON
position.
light/Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF
indicator light
This single light has the function of

indicating malfunctions in the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system and the function
of indicating that the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system is not operating. It illuminates in the event of a malfunction in the
system and illuminates whenever the
system is not operating.

light
The warning light illuminates when the
position and turns off several seconds
after engine startup. This lighting pattern
indicates that the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is operating normally.
The following situations could indicate a
malfunction of the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system; if any should occur, we
the system at the first available opportunity.
. The warning light does not illuminate
ON position.
. The warning light illuminates while the
vehicle is being driven.
. When a malfunction has occurred in
the Vehicle Dynamics Control electrical
system, only the warning light will illuminate. In such an event, the ABS will still be
operating normally.
. The warning light will also illuminate
when a problem occurs with the ABS or
Vehicle Dynamics Control electronic control systems.
Because the Vehicle Dynamics Control
7-33
system controls each brake through the

ABS, whenever the ABS stops operating
due to a malfunction in that electrical
system, the Vehicle Dynamics Control will
also become unable to control all four
brakes. Thus Vehicle Dynamics Control
system operation halts and the warning
light illuminates. Although both the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system and the ABS
will be inoperable in this situation, it will
still be possible to stop the vehicle using
normal braking. The Vehicle Dynamics
Control system and the ABS do not
adversely affect operation of the vehicle
in any way when they are inoperable;
however should such a situation occur,
drive with care and we recommend that
you have an authorized SUBARU dealer
carry out an inspection of those systems
at the first available opportunity.
NOTE
When the warning light illuminates and
turns off in the following way, it indicates that the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system is operating normally.
. Although illuminating after the engine has been started, the warning light
quickly turns off and stays off.
. The warning light illuminates when
the vehicle is being driven; it then turns
off and stays off.
CONTINUED
Black plate (266,1)
7-34
! Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light

This light illuminates to indicate that the
Vehicle Dynamics Control system is in
non-operation mode. This does not constitute failure of the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system.
the engine is started, even when several

minutes have passed to allow the engine
to heat up sufficiently.
& Vehicle Dynamics Control

OFF switch
NOTE
. The indicator light may stay on for a
while after the engine has been started,
especially in cold weather. This occurs
because the engine has not yet
warmed up and is completely normal.
The light will turn off when the engine
has reached a suitable operating temperature.
. When an engine problem occurs
and the malfunction indicator lamp
illuminates, the indicator light will also
illuminate.
The following two situations could indicate
malfunction of the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system; if either should occur, we
that system at the first available opportunity.
. The indicator light does not illuminate
ON position.
. The indicator light fails to turn off after
deactivated and the vehicle will behave

like a model not equipped with the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system. When the
switch is pressed again to reactivate the
Vehicle Dynamics Control system, the
indicator light turns off.
With the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
deactivated, traction and stability enhancement offered by Vehicle Dynamics
Control system is unavailable. Therefore
you should not deactivate the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system except under
above-mentioned situations.
NOTE
Pressing the switch to deactivate the

Vehicle Dynamics Control system can
facilitate the following operations:
. a standing start on a steeply sloping
road with a snowy, gravel-covered, or
otherwise slippery surface
. extrication of the vehicle when its
wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow
When the switch is pressed during engine
operation, the Vehicle Dynamics Control
OFF indicator light illuminates. The
Vehicle Dynamics Control system will be
. When the switch has been pressed

to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system automatically reactivates itself the next time the ignition
switch is turned to the LOCK position
and the engine is restarted.
. If the switch is held down for 10
seconds or longer, the indicator light
turns off, the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system is activated, and the system
ignores any further pressing of the
switch. To make the switch usable
again, turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK position and restart the engine.
. When the switch is pressed to
Black plate (267,1)
deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, the vehicles running performance is comparable with that of a
vehicle that does not have a Vehicle
Dynamics Control system. Do not deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system except when absolutely necessary.
Parking your vehicle

& Parking brake
To set the parking brake, press the brake
pedal firmly and hold it down while fully
pulling up the parking brake lever.
7-35
CAUTION
Never drive while the parking brake
is set because this will cause unnecessary wear on the brake linings. Before starting to drive, always
make sure that the parking brake
has been fully released.
& Parking tips
To release the parking brake, pull the lever

up slightly, press the release button, then
lower the lever while keeping the button
pressed.
When the parking brake is set while the
engine is running, the brake system
warning light illuminates. After starting
the vehicle, be sure that the warning light
has gone out before the vehicle is driven.
Refer to the Warning and indicator lights
When parking your vehicle, always set the

parking brake firmly and put the shift lever
in the 1 (1st) for an upgrade or R
(Reverse) for a downgrade for MT vehicles, or the selector lever in the P (Park)
position for AT vehicles. Always set the
parking brake firmly when parking your
vehicle. Never rely on the transmission
alone to hold the vehicle.
CONTINUED
Black plate (268,1)
7-36
WARNING
When parking on a hill, always turn the

steering wheel. When the vehicle is
headed up the hill, the front wheels should
be turned away from the curb.
. Never leave unattended children

or pets in the vehicle. They could
accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on
hot or sunny days, the temperature in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to
cause severe or possibly fatal
injuries to people.
. Do not park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry
grass, waste paper or rags, as
they may burn easily if they come
near hot engine or exhaust system parts.
. Be sure to stop the engine if you
take a nap in the vehicle. If
engine exhaust gas enters the
passenger compartment, occupants in the vehicle could die
from carbon monoxide (CO) contained in the exhaust gas.
Hill start assist system (MT

vehicles)
CAUTION
The Hill start assist system is a
device only for helping the driver
to START the vehicle on an uphill
grade. To prevent accidents when
the vehicle is parked on a slope, be
sure to firmly set the parking brake.
When setting the parking brake,
make sure that the vehicle remains
stationary when the clutch pedal is
released.
The Hill start assist system is a device to
make starting on an uphill grade easier.
When facing downhill, the front wheels

should be turned into the curb.
Black plate (269,1)
On an uphill grade, when the clutch pedal

is depressed while the brake pedal is also
depressed, braking power is maintained
temporarily (for approximately 1 second)
by the Hill start assist system when the
brake pedal is released. The driver is
therefore able to start the vehicle the
same way as on a level grade, just using
the clutch and accelerator pedal.
A slight jolt may be felt when the vehicle

begins to move forward after being reversed.
7-37
SUBARU dealer.
If the braking power of the Hill start assist

system is insufficient after the brake pedal
is released, apply more braking power by
pressing the brake pedal again.
& Hill start assist warning light
The Hill start assist system does not

operate when the vehicle is facing downhill. And the Hill start assist system may
not operate on slight grades.
When starting in reverse and using the Hill
start assist system, a braking effect may
be felt even after the brake pedal has
been released. However, this braking
effect should disappear once the clutch
pedal is released.

ON position, the Hill start assist warning
light illuminates. It will turn off after the
engine is started. While the engine is
rotating, if any malfunction is detected in
the Hill start assist system control, the
warning light will illuminate. If the warning
light illuminates, we recommend that you
have the vehicle inspected by your
Black plate (270,1)
7-38
Cruise control (if equipped)
ON position.
Cruise control enables you to maintain a

constant vehicle speed without holding
your foot on the accelerator pedal and it is
operative when the vehicle speed is 40
km/h (25 mph) or more. Make sure the
main switch is turned OFF when the
cruise control is not in use to avoid
unintentionally setting of the cruise control.
& To set cruise control
The cruise control indicator light on the

combination meter will illuminate.
2. Depress the accelerator pedal until the
vehicle reaches to the desired speed.
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control under
any of the following conditions. This
may cause loss of vehicle control:
. driving up or down a steep grade
. driving on slippery or winding
roads
. driving in heavy traffic
1. Push the CRUISE main switch button.
3. Push the SET/COAST button and

release it. Then release the accelerator
pedal.
NOTE
If you press the main switch button
while turning the ignition switch ON,
the cruise control function is deactivated and the cruise control indicator
light flashes. To reactivate the cruise
control function, turn the ignition
switch back to the Acc or LOCK
position, and then turn it again to the
Black plate (271,1)
7-39
& To temporarily cancel the

cruise control
The cruise control can be temporarily
canceled in the following ways:
At this time, the cruise control set indicator

light on the combination meter will illuminate.
The vehicle will maintain the desired
speed.
Vehicle speed can be temporarily increased while driving with the cruise
control activated. Simply depress the
accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle. When the accelerator pedal is released, the vehicle will return to and
maintain the previous cruising speed.
. Push the CANCEL button.

. Depress the brake pedal.
. Depress the clutch pedal (MT vehicles).
. Shift the selector lever into the N
position (AT vehicles).
. Shift the shift lever into the neutral
position (MT vehicles).
The cruise control set indicator light on the
combination meter turns off when the
cruise control is canceled.
To resume the cruise control after it has

been temporarily canceled and with vehicle speed of approximately 32 km/h (20
mph) or more, push the RES/ACC button
to return to the original cruising speed
automatically.
The cruise control set indicator light on the
combination meter will automatically illuminate at this time.
& To turn off the cruise control

There are two ways to turn off the cruise
control:
. Push the CRUISE main switch button
again.
. Turn the ignition switch to the Acc or
LOCK position (but only when the
vehicle is completely stopped).
CONTINUED
Black plate (272,1)
7-40
& To change the cruising speed

! To increase the speed (by button)
! To increase the speed (by accelerator pedal)
! To decrease the speed (by button)
1. Depress the accelerator pedal to

accelerate the vehicle to the desired
speed.
2. Push the SET/COAST button once.
Now the desired speed is set and the
vehicle will keep running at that speed
without depressing the accelerator pedal.
NOTE
Push the RES/ACC button and hold it

until the vehicle reaches the desired
speed. Then, release the button. The
vehicle speed at that moment will be
memorized and treated as the new set
speed.
When the difference between the actual
vehicle speed and the set speed is less
than 4.4 km/h (3 mph), the set speed can
be increased 1 km/h (0.6 mph) each time
by pressing the RES/ACC button quickly.
If the difference between the actual

vehicle speed when the button is
pushed and the speed last time you
set is less than 4.4 km/h (3 mph), the
vehicle speed will be lowered by 1 km/h
(0.6 mph). This occurs because the
cruise control system unit regards this
operation as that intended to decrease
the vehicle speed.
Push the SET/COAST button and hold it

until the vehicle reaches the desired
speed. Then, release the button. The
vehicle speed at that moment will be
memorized and treated as the new set
speed.
When the difference between the actual
vehicle speed and the set speed is less
than 4.4 km/h (3 mph), the set speed can
be lowered 1 km/h (0.6 mph) each time by
pressing the SET/COAST button quickly.
! To decrease the speed (by brake
pedal)
1. Depress the brake pedal to release
cruise control temporarily.
2. When the speed decreases to the
Black plate (273,1)
desired speed, press the SET/COAST

button once. Now the desired speed is set
and the vehicle will keep running at that
speed without depressing the accelerator
pedal.
& Cruise control indicator light
control indicator light flashes. To reactivate the cruise control function,

turn the ignition switch back to the
Acc or LOCK position, and then
turn it again to the ON position.
. If this indicator light and the malfunction indicator lamp flash
simultaneously during driving, we recommend that you have the vehicle
checked by your nearest SUBARU
dealer.
7-41
The light illuminates when vehicle speed

has been set.
& Cruise control set indicator

light
The cruise control indicator light illuminates when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position and turns off after
The light illuminates when the CRUISE
main switch is pressed.
NOTE
. If you press the CRUISE main
switch button while turning the ignition
switch ON, the cruise control function is deactivated and the cruise
The cruise control set indicator light

illuminates when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position and turns off
after approximately 3 seconds.
Black plate (15,1)
Driving tips
New vehicle break-in driving the first
1,600 km (1,000 miles) .....................................
Fuel economy hints ............................................
Engine exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)............
Catalytic converter ..............................................
Periodic inspections ...........................................
Driving in foreign countries ...............................
Driving tips for AWD vehicles ............................
Off road driving ...................................................
Winter driving ......................................................
8-2
8-2
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-7
Operation during cold weather............................. 8-7

Driving on snowy and icy roads .......................... 8-8
Corrosion protection ........................................... 8-9
Snow tires .......................................................... 8-9
Tire chains ......................................................... 8-10
Rocking the vehicle ...........................................
8-10
Loading your vehicle.........................................
8-11
Roof rail ............................................................
8-11
Trailer towing .....................................................
8-12
Maintenance ......................................................
Towing weight ...................................................
Trailer hitches....................................................
Trailer safety chains...........................................
Side mirrors ......................................................
Trailer lights ......................................................
Tires..................................................................
Hitch stabilizer...................................................
Trailer towing tips ..............................................
Additional information for Europe ......................
8-12
8-12
8-13
8-13
8-13
8-13
8-13
8-14
8-14
8-16
Black plate (276,1)
8-2
Driving tips
New vehicle break-in driving

the first 1,600 km (1,000
miles)
Fuel economy hints
The performance and long life of your

vehicle are dependent on how you handle
and care for your vehicle while it is new.
Follow these instructions during the first
1,600 km (1,000 miles):
. Do not race the engine. And do not
allow engine speed to exceed 4,000 rpm
except in an emergency.
. Do not drive at one constant engine or
vehicle speed for a long time, either fast or
slow.
. Avoid starting suddenly and rapid
acceleration, except in an emergency.
. Avoid hard braking, except in an
emergency.
. Select the proper gear position for the

speed and road conditions.
. Avoid sudden acceleration or deceleration. Always accelerate gently until you
reach the desired speed. Then try to
maintain that speed for as long as
possible.
. Do not pump the accelerator and avoid
racing the engine.
. Avoid unnecessary engine idling.
. Keep the engine properly tuned.
. Keep the tires inflated to the correct
pressure shown on the tire placard, which
is located under the door latch on the
drivers side. Low pressure will increase
tire wear and fuel consumption.
. Use the air conditioner only when
necessary.
. Keep the front and rear wheels in
proper alignment.
. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or
cargo.
The same break-in procedures should be

applied to an overhauled engine, newly
mounted engine or when brake pads or
brake linings are replaced with new ones.
The following suggestions will help to save

your fuel.
Engine exhaust gas (carbon

monoxide)
WARNING
. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.
Engine exhaust gas contains
carbon monoxide, a colorless
and odorless gas which is dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
. Always properly maintain the engine exhaust system to prevent
engine exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.
. Never run the engine in a closed
space, such as a garage, except
for the brief time needed to drive
the vehicle in or out of it.
. Avoid remaining in a parked
vehicle for a lengthy time while
the engine is running. If that is
unavoidable, then use the ventilation fan to force fresh air into
the vehicle.
. Always keep the front ventilator
inlet grille free from snow, leaves
or other obstructions to ensure
that the ventilation system always works properly.
. If at any time you suspect that
Black plate (277,1)
Driving tips
exhaust fumes are entering the

vehicle, have t he probl em
checked and corrected as soon
as possible. If you must drive
under these conditions, drive
only with all windows fully open.
. Keep the rear gate closed while
driving to prevent exhaust gas
from entering the vehicle.
8-3
Catalytic converter
NOTE
Due to the expansion and contraction
of the metals used in the manufacture
of the exhaust system, you may hear a
crackling sound coming from the exhaust system for a short time after the
engine has been shut off. This sound is
normal.
Turbo models
2.0 L models
The catalytic converter is installed in the

exhaust system. It serves as catalyst to
reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust
gases, thus providing cleaner exhaust.
To avoid damage to the catalytic converter:
. Use only unleaded fuel. Even a small
amount of leaded fuel will damage the
catalytic converter.
. Never start the engine by pushing or
pulling the vehicle.
. Avoid racing the engine.
. Never turn off the ignition switch while
the vehicle is moving.
. Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel
the engine running rough (misfiring, backfiring or incomplete combustion), we re CONTINUED
Black plate (278,1)
8-4
Driving tips
commend that you have your vehicle

checked and repaired by an authorized
SUBARU dealer.
. Do not apply undercoating or rust
prevention treatment to the heat shield of
catalytic converter and the exhaust system.
. Do not drive with an extremely low fuel
level.
Periodic inspections
Driving in foreign countries
To keep your vehicle in the best condition

at all times, always have the recommended maintenance services listed in
the maintenance schedule performed at
the specified time or mileage intervals.
When planning to use your vehicle in

another country:
. Confirm the availability of the correct
fuel. Refer to the Fuel requirements
. Comply with all regulations and requirements of each country.
WARNING
. Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive
or park the vehicle anywhere
near flammable materials (e.g.
grass, paper, rags or leaves),
because the catalytic converter
operates at very high temperatures.
. Keep everyone and flammable
materials away from the exhaust
pipe while the engine is running.
The exhaust gas is very hot.
Black plate (279,1)
Driving tips
Driving tips for AWD vehicles
All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine

power to all four wheels. In normal driving,
however, an AWD vehicle operates almost
the same as other vehicles with front
wheel drive. AWD vehicles provide better
traction when driving on slippery, wet or
snow-covered roads and when moving out
of mud, sand or dirt.
For safety purpose as well as to avoid
damaging the AWD system, you should
keep the following tips in mind:
. An AWD vehicle is better able to climb
steeper roads under snowy or slippery
conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle.
There is little difference in handling,
however, during extremely sharp turns or
sudden braking. Therefore, when driving
down a slope or turning corners, be sure

to reduce your speed and maintain an
ample distance from other vehicles.
. When replacing a tire, make sure you
use only the same size, construction,
brand, speed symbol and load index as
the original tires listed on the tire placard.
Using other sizes or construction may
result in severe mechanical damage to the
drive train of your vehicle and may affect
ride, handling, braking, speedometer/odometer calibration, and clearance between the body and tires. It also may be
dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle
control.
. Always check the cold tire pressure
before starting to drive. The recommended tire pressure is provided on the
tire placard, which is located under the
door latch on the drivers side.
. Tire chains should always be placed on
the front wheels only.
. Frequent driving of an AWD vehicle
under hard-driving conditions such as
steep hills or dusty roads will necessitate
more frequent replacement of engine oil,
brake fluid and transmission oil than that
specified in the Maintenance schedule in
chapter 11.
. There are some precautions that you
must observe when towing your vehicle.
For detail information, refer to the Towing
8-5
WARNING
. Always maintain a safe driving
speed according to the road and
weather conditions in order to
avoid having an accident on a
sharp turn, during sudden braking or under other similar conditions.
. Always use the utmost care in
driving - overconfidence because
you are driving an All-Wheel
Drive vehicle could easily lead
to a serious accident.
Black plate (280,1)
8-6
Driving tips
Off road driving

Because of the AWD feature and higher
ground clearance than other models, your
SUBARU can be driven on some limited
off-roads. But please keep in mind that an
AWD SUBARU is a passenger car and is
neither a conventional off-road vehicle nor
an all-terrain vehicle. If you do take your
SUBARU off-road, certain common sense
precautions such as the following should
be taken:
. Make certain that you and all of your
passengers are wearing seatbelts.
. Carry some emergency equipment,
such as a towing rope or chain, a shovel,
wheel blocks, first aid kit and cell phone or
citizens band radio.
. Drive carefully. Do not take unnecessary risks by driving in dangerous areas or
over rough terrain.
. Slow down and employ extra caution at
all times. When driving off-road, you will
not have the benefit of marked traffic
lanes, banked curves, traffic signs and
the like.
. Do not drive across steep slopes.
Instead, drive either straight up or straight
down the slopes. A vehicle can much
more easily tip over sideways than it can
end over end. Avoid driving straight up or
down slopes that are too steep.
. Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, especially at higher speeds.

. Do not grip the inside or spokes of the
steering wheel. A bad bump could jerk the
wheel and injure your hands. Instead drive
with your fingers and thumbs on the
outside of the rim.
. If driving through water, such as when
crossing shallow streams, first check the
depth of the water and the bottom of the
stream bed for firmness and ensure that
the bed of the stream is flat. Drive slowly
and completely through the stream. The
water should be shallow enough that it
does not reach the vehicles undercarriage. Water entering the engine air intake
or the exhaust pipe or water splashing
onto electrical parts may damage your
vehicle and may cause it to stall. Never
attempt to drive through rushing water,
regardless of their depth; it can wash
away the ground from under your tires,
resulting in possible loss of traction and
even vehicle rollover.
. Always check your brakes for effectiveness immediately after driving in sand,
mud or water. Do this by driving slowly
and stepping on the brake pedal. Repeat
that process several times to dry out the
brake discs and brake pads.
. Do not drive or park over or near
flammable materials such as dry grass or
fallen leaves, as they may burn easily. The

exhaust system is very hot while the
engine is running and right after the
engine stops. This could create a fire
hazard.
. After driving through tall grass, mud,
rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that there
is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stones,
sand, etc. adhering to or trapped on the
underbody. Clear off any such matter from
the underbody. If the vehicle is used with
these materials trapped or adhering to the
underbody, a mechanical breakdown or
fire could occur.
. Secure all cargo carried inside the
vehicle and make certain that it is not
piled higher than the seatbacks. During
sudden stops or jolts, unsecured cargo
could be thrown around in the vehicle and
cause injury. Do not pile heavy loads on
the roof. Those loads raise the vehicles
center of gravity and make it more prone
to tip over.
. If you must rock the vehicle to free it
from sand or mud, depress the accelerator
pedal slightly and move the selector lever
back and forth between D and R
repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For
the best possible traction, avoid spinning
the wheels when trying to free the vehicle.
When the road surface is extremely
slippery, you can obtain better traction by
Black plate (281,1)
Driving tips
starting the vehicle with the transmission

in 2nd than 1st (both for MT and AT).
. Never equip your vehicle with tires
larger than those specified in this manual.
. Frequent driving of an AWD vehicle
under hard-driving conditions such as
rough roads or off roads will necessitate
more frequent replacement of engine oil,
brake fluid and transmission oil than that
specified in the Maintenance schedule
. Wash the vehicles underbody after offroad driving. Suspension components are
particularly prone to dirt buildup, so they
need to be washed thoroughly.
Winter driving
& Operation during cold

weather
Carry some emergency equipment, such
as tire chains, a window scraper, a bag of
sand, flares, a small shovel, and jumper
cables.
Check the battery and cables. Cold
temperatures reduce battery capacity.
The battery must be in good condition to
provide enough power for cold winter
starts.
Use an engine oil of proper grade and
viscosity for cold weather. Heavy summer
oil will cause harder starting.
Keep the door locks from freezing by
8-7
squirting them with deicer or glycerin.

Forcing a frozen door open may damage
or separate the rubber weather strips
around the door. If the door is frozen,
use hot water to melt the ice, and afterwards thoroughly wipe the water away.
Use a windshield washer fluid that contains an antifreeze solution. Do not use
engine antifreeze or other substitutes
because they may damage the paint of
the vehicle.
SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid contains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%
surfactant, by volume. Its freezing temperature varies according to how much it
is diluted, as indicated in the following
table.
Washer Fluid Concentration
Freezing Temperature
30%
128C (10.48F)
50%
208C (48F)
100%
458C (498F)
In order to prevent freezing of washer

fluid, check the freezing temperatures in
the table above when adjusting the fluid
concentration to the outside temperature.
If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with
a different concentration from the one
used previously, purge the old fluid from
CONTINUED
Black plate (282,1)
8-8
Driving tips
the piping between the reservoir tank and

washer nozzles by operating the washer
for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if
the concentration of the fluid remaining in
the piping is too low for the outside
temperature, it may freeze and block the
nozzles.
CAUTION
Adjust the washer fluid concentration appropriately for the outside
temperature. If the concentration is
inappropriate, sprayed washer fluid
may freeze on the windshield and
obstruct your view, and the fluid
may freeze in the reservoir tank.
! Before driving your vehicle
Before entering the vehicle, remove any
snow or ice from your shoes because that
could make the pedals slippery and
dangerous.
While warming up the vehicle before
driving, check that the accelerator pedal,
brake pedal, and all other controls operate
smoothly.
Clear away ice and snow that has
accumulated under the fenders to avoid
making steering difficult. During severe
winter driving, stop when and where it is
safe to do so and check under the fenders

periodically.
! Parking in cold weather
Do not use the parking brake when
parking for long periods in cold weather
since it could freeze in that position.
Instead, observe the following.
1. Place the shift lever in 1 or R for MT
vehicles, and in P for AT vehicles.
2. Use tire stops under the tires to
prevent the vehicle from moving.
When the vehicle is parked in snow or
when it snows, raise the wiper blades off
the glass to prevent damage to them.
When the vehicle has been left parked
after use on roads heavily covered with
snow, or has been left parked during a
snowstorm, icing may develop on the
brake system, which could cause poor
braking action. Check for snow or ice
buildup on the suspension, disc brakes
and brake hoses underneath the vehicle.
If there is caked snow or ice, remove it,
being careful not to damage the disc
brakes and brake hoses and ABS harness.
WARNING
Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
gases under your vehicle. Keep
snow clear of the exhaust pipe and

from around your vehicle if you park
the vehicle in snow with the engine
running.
! Refueling in cold weather
To help prevent moisture from forming in
the fuel system and the risk of its freezing,
use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel
tank is recommended during cold weather.
Use only additives that are specifically
designed for this purpose. When an
antifreeze additive is used, its effect lasts
longer if the tank is refilled whenever the
fuel level reaches half empty.
If your SUBARU is not going to be used
for an extended period, it is best to have
the fuel tank filled to capacity.
& Driving on snowy and icy

roads
To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid
sudden braking, abrupt acceleration, highspeed driving, and sharp turning when
driving on snowy or icy roads.
Always maintain ample distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you
to avoid the need for sudden braking.
To supplement the foot brake, use the
engine brake effectively to control the
vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear
Black plate (283,1)
Driving tips
when necessary.)
Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such behavior can cause the wheels to lock, possibly
leading to loss of vehicle control.
An anti-lock brake system (ABS) enhances your vehicles braking performance on snowy and icy roads. Refer to
the ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) and
Vehicle Dynamics Control system sections in chapter 7 for information on
braking on slippery surfaces.
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control on
slippery roads such as snowy or icy
roads. This may cause loss of
vehicle control.
CAUTION
Avoid prolonged continuous driving
in snowstorms. Snow will enter the
engines intake system and may
hinder the air flow, which could
result in engine shutdown or even
breakdown.
! Wiper operation when snowing
Before driving in cold weather, make sure
the wiper blades are not frozen to the
windshield or rear window. If the wiper

blades are frozen to the windshield or rear
window, use the defroster with the airflow
control dial in the
position and the
temperature control dial set for maximum
warmth until the wiper blades are completely thawed out. If your vehicle is
equipped with a wiper deicer, it is helpful
to thaw the windshield wiper blades. To
thaw out the rear wiper blade, use the rear
window defogger.
When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts
to stick on the surface of the windshield
despite wiper operation, use the defroster
and
with the airflow control dial in
the temperature control dial set for maximum warmth. After the windshield gets
warmed enough to melt the frozen snow
on it, wash it away using the windshield
washer.
Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the
wiper from working effectively. If snow is
stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to
a safe place, then remove it. If you stop
the vehicle at road side, use the hazard
warning flasher to alert other drivers.
We recommend use of non-freezing type
wiper blades (winter blades) during the
seasons you could have snow and subzero temperatures.
Blades of this type give superior wiping
8-9
performance in snowy conditions. Be sure

to use blades that are suitable for your
vehicle.
CAUTION
During high-speed driving, nonfreezing type wiper blades may not
perform as well as standard wiper
blades. If this happens, reduce the
vehicle speed.
NOTE
When the season requiring non-freezing type wiper blades is over, replace
them with standard wiper blades.
& Corrosion protection

Refer to the Corrosion protection section
in chapter 10.
& Snow tires

WARNING
. When replacing original tires with
winter (snow) tires, make sure
you use only the same size,
construction and load range as
the tires listed on the tire placard.
Using other sizes and construc CONTINUED
Black plate (284,1)
8-10
Driving tips
tion may affect speedometer/odometer calibration and clearance

between the body and tires. It
also may be dangerous and lead
to loss of vehicle control.
. You must install four winter tires
that are of the same size, construction, brand, and load range.
Mixing other sizes or constructions may result in severe mechanical damage to the drive
train of your vehicle and may
affect ride, handling, braking and
speedometer/odometer calibration. It also may be dangerous
and lead to loss of vehicle control.
. Do not use a combination of
radial, belted bias or bias tires
since it may cause dangerous
handling characteristics and lead
to an accident.
In winter, it may be possible to enhance
performance through use of tires designed
specifically for winter driving conditions. If
you choose to install winter tires on your
vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire size
and type. All four tires must be of the same
size, construction, brand and load index
and you should never mix radial, belted
bias or bias tires since this may result in
dangerous handling characteristics. Remember to drive with care at all times

regardless of the type of tires on your
vehicle.
When the road surface is extremely

slippery, you can obtain better traction by
starting the vehicle with the transmission
in 2nd than 1st (both for MT and AT).
When using winter tires (speed symbol Q

or H) never exceed 160 km/h (99 mph) or
210 km/h (130 mph), respectively.
If your vehicle is an AT vehicle, refer to the

relevant one of the Automatic transmission sections in chapter 7 for information
on holding the transmission in the 2nd
position.
& Tire chains

Driving on snowy grades or icy roads may
require the use of tire chains, in which
case put the chains on the front wheels
only. Use only chains that are of the
correct size for your tires so as not to
damage the vehicle body or suspension.
When driving with tire chains, drive at
speeds below 30 km/h (19 mph).
Always use the utmost care when driving
with tire chains overconfidence because
you are driving with tire chains could
easily lead to a serious accident.
& Rocking the vehicle

If you must rock the vehicle to free it from
snow, sand, or mud, depress the accelerator pedal slightly and move the selector
lever back and forth between D and R
repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For
the best possible traction, avoid spinning
the wheels when trying to free the vehicle.
Black plate (285,1)
Driving tips
Loading your vehicle

WARNING
Never allow passengers to ride on a
folded rear seatback or in the cargo
area. Doing so may result in serious
injury.
ious injury.
WARNING
Never stack luggage or other cargo
higher than the top of the seatback
because it could tumble forward and
injure passengers in the event of a
sudden stop or accident. Keep luggage or cargo low, as close to the
floor as possible.
WARNING
. When you carry something inside
the vehicle, secure it whenever
you can to prevent it from being
thrown around inside the vehicle
during sudden stops, sharp turns
or in an accident.
. Do not pile heavy loads on the
roof. These loads raise the vehicles center of gravity and make it
more prone to tip over.
. Secure lengthy items properly to
prevent them from shooting forward and causing serious injury
during a sudden stop.
. Do not place anything on the
extended cargo area cover. Such
items could tumble forward in the
event of a sudden stop or a
collision. This could cause ser-
8-11
CAUTION
Do not carry spray cans, containers
with flammable or corrosive liquids
or any other dangerous items inside
the vehicle.
NOTE
For better fuel economy, do not carry
unneeded cargo.
& Roof rail
1)
Roof rack
Luggage can be carried on the roof after

securing the roof rack to the roof rail.
CONTINUED
Black plate (286,1)
8-12
Driving tips
When installing the roof rack on the roof

rail, follow the manufacturers instructions.
The roof rail is designed to carry loads
(luggage and roof rack) of no more than
80 kg (176 lbs).
CAUTION
. When using the roof rack, make
sure that the total carry load of
the roof rack and luggage does
not exceed 80 kg (176 lbs). Overloading may cause damage to
the vehicle.
. For cargo carrying purposes, the
roof rail must be used together
with the roof rack. The roof rail
must never be used alone to
carry cargo. Otherwise, damage
to the roof or paint, or a dangerous road hazard due to loss of
cargo could result.
NOTE
Remember that the vehicles center of
gravity is altered with the weight of the
load on the roof, thus affecting driving
characteristics.
Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard
cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind
effects will be increased.
Trailer towing
Your vehicle is designed and intended to
be used primarily as a passenger-carrying
vehicle. Towing a trailer puts additional
loads on your vehicles engine, drive train,
brakes, tires and suspension and has an
adverse effect on fuel economy.
In some countries, there are some regulations which you have to observe when
towing a trailer. If you do decide to tow a
trailer, your safety and satisfaction depend
upon proper use of correct equipment and
cautious operation of your vehicle. We
recommend that you seek the advice of
your SUBARU dealer to assist you in
purchasing a hitch and other necessary
towing equipment appropriate for your
vehicle. In addition, be sure to follow the
instructions on correct installation and use
provided by the trailer and other towing
equipment manufacturers.
SUBARU assumes no responsibility for
injuries or vehicle damage that result from
trailer towing equipment, or from any
errors or omissions in the instructions
accompanying such equipment or for your
failure to follow the proper instructions.
& Maintenance
If you use your vehicle to tow a trailer,
more frequent maintenance will be required due to the additional load. Refer to
the Maintenance schedule section in
chapter 11.
Under no circumstances should a trailer
be towed with a new vehicle or a vehicle
with any new powertrain component (engine, transmission, differential, wheel
bearings, etc.) for the first 1,600 km
(1,000 miles) of driving.
& Towing weight

Before towing a trailer, we recommend
that you confirm the towing capacity and
ball coupling load with your nearest
SUBARU dealer or the vehicle registration
documents and make sure your trailer is
within the towing capacity.
The total trailer weight (trailer weight with
brakes plus its cargo weight) must never
exceed maximum towing weight.
Remember that the ball coupling load will
increase the load on the vehicle. Both the
maximum permissible weight (MPW) and
maximum permissible rear axle weight
(rear MPAW) must not be exceeded.
Black plate (287,1)
Driving tips
WARNING
Never exceed the maximum towing
weight. Exceeding the maximum
towing weight could cause personal
injury and/or vehicle damage.
& Trailer hitches

The use of a genuine SUBARU trailer
hitch is recommended. Genuine SUBARU
hitches are available from your SUBARU
dealer.
chains. Pass the chains crossing each

other under the trailer tongue to prevent
the trailer from dropping onto the ground
in case the trailer tongue should disconnect from the hitch ball. Allow sufficient
slack in the chains taking tight-turn situations into account; however, be careful not
to let them drag on the ground.
For more information about the safety
chain connection, refer to the instructions
for your hitch and trailer.
& Side mirrors
Regularly check that the hitch mounting

bolts and nuts are tight.
significant blind spots occur with the

vehicles standard side mirrors, use additional outside mirrors that conform with
regulations.
& Trailer lights

Connection of trailer lights to your vehicles electrical system requires modifications to the vehicles lighting circuit to
increase its capacity and accommodate
wiring changes. To ensure the trailer lights
are connected properly, we recommend
that you consult your SUBARU dealer.
Check for proper operation of the turn
signals and the brake lights each time you
hitch up.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Do not modify the vehicle exhaust

system, brake system, or other
system when installing a hitch or
other trailer towing equipment.
Direct splicing or other improper

connection of trailer lights may
damage your vehicles electrical
system and cause a malfunction of
your vehicle lighting system.
& Trailer safety chains

In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch
ball should break or become disconnected, the trailer could get loose and
create a traffic safety hazard.
For safety, always connect the towing
vehicle and trailer with trailer safety
8-13
Many countries have regulations requiring

special outside mirrors when towing a
trailer. After hitching a trailer to your
vehicle, check that the standard side
mirrors provide a good rearward field of
view without significant blind spots. If
& Tires
Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle
are inflated to the pressure under towing
conditions as shown on the tire placard
located under the door striker on the
drivers side. Trailer tire condition, size,
CONTINUED
Black plate (288,1)
8-14
Driving tips
load rating and proper inflation pressure

should be in accordance with the trailer
manufacturers specifications.
& Hitch stabilizer

Snaking movement can also be reduced
by hitch stabilizers. The use of a hitch
stabilizer is recommended. To purchase
and install a hitch stabilizer, we recommend that you consult your SUBARU
dealer or professional hitch suppliers.
& Trailer towing tips

WARNING
. Never exceed 80 km/h (50 mph)
or legal towing speed limit,
whichever is lower. Exceeding
the speed limit could cause loss
of vehicle stability and/or could
lead to an accident.
. When towing a trailer, steering,
stability, stopping distance and
braking performance will be different from normal operation. For
safetys sake, you should employ
extra caution when towing a
trailer and you should never
speed. You should also keep the
following tips in mind:
! Before starting out on a trip

. Be sure to check regulations concerning the maximum speed or driving restrictions for vehicles towing trailers. If you are
driving across several countries, check
each countrys requirement before leaving
home, because regulations may vary.
. Check that the vehicle and vehicle-tohitch mounting are in good condition. If
any problems are apparent, do not tow the
trailer.
. Check that the vehicle sits horizontally
with the trailer attached. If the vehicle is
tipped sharply up at the front and tipped
down at the rear, check that the drawbar
weight and the weight on the rear axle do
not exceed the maximum permissible rear
axle weight.
. Check that the tire pressures are
correct.
. Check that the vehicle and trailer are
connected properly. Confirm that
the trailer tongue is connected
properly to the hitch ball.
the trailer lights connector is connected properly and trailers brake
lights illuminate when the vehicles
brake pedal is pressed, and that the
trailers turn signal lights flash when
the vehicles turn signal lever is operated.
the safety chains are connected

properly.
all cargo in the trailer is secured
safely in position.
the side mirrors provide a good
rearward field of view without a significant blind spot.
! Driving with a trailer
. You should allow for considerably more
stopping distance when towing a trailer.
Avoid sudden braking because it may
result in skidding or jackknifing and loss of
control.
. Avoid abrupt starts and sudden accelerations. If your vehicle has a manual
transmission, always start out in first gear
and release the clutch at moderate engine
revolution.
. Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns and
rapid lane changes.
. Slow down before turning. Make a
longer than normal turning radius because
the trailer wheels will be closer than the
vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. In
a tight turn, the trailer could hit your
vehicle.
. Sufficient time should be taken to learn
the feel of the vehicle/trailer combination
before starting out on a trip. In an area free
of traffic, practice turning, stopping and
backing up.
Black plate (289,1)
Driving tips
. Crosswinds will adversely affect the

handling of your vehicle and trailer, causing sway. Crosswinds can be due to
weather conditions or the passing of large
trucks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmly
grip the steering wheel and slow down
immediately but gradually.
. When passing other vehicles, considerable distance is required because of the
added weight and length caused by
attaching the trailer to your vehicle.
1)
2)
Left turn
Right turn
. Backing up with a trailer is difficult and

takes practice. When backing up with a
trailer, never accelerate or steer rapidly.
When turning back, grip the bottom of the
steering wheel with one hand and turn it to
the left for a left turn, and turn it to the right
for a right turn.

. If the ABS warning light illuminates
while the vehicle is in motion, stop towing
the trailer. We recommend that you have
repairs performed immediately by the
! Driving on grades
. On vehicles equipped with a dual
range transmission, it is advisable to
select the LO position when starting the
vehicle at an upgrade.
. Before going down a steep hill, slow
down and shift into lower gear (if necessary, use 1st gear) in order to utilize the
engine braking effect and prevent overheating of your vehicles brakes. Do not
make sudden downshifts.
. When driving uphill in hot weather, the
air conditioner may turn off automatically
to protect the engine from overheating.
. When driving uphill in hot weather, pay
attention to the coolant temperature high
warning light (for all vehicles) and AT OIL
TEMP warning light (for AT vehicles) since
the engine and transmission are relatively
prone to overheating under these conditions. If the coolant temperature high
warning light or the AT OIL TEMP warning
light illuminates, immediately switch off the
air conditioner and stop the vehicle at the
nearest safe place. Refer to the Engine
8-15
overheating section in chapter 9, and the

chapter 3.
. If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, avoid using the accelerator pedal
to stay stationary on an uphill slope
instead of using the parking brake or foot
brake. That may cause the transmission
fluid to overheat.
. If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, place the selector lever as
follows:
Uphill slopes: D position
Downhill slopes: A low-speed gear position to use engine braking
! Parking on a grade
Always block the wheels under both
vehicle and trailer when parking. Apply
the parking brake firmly. You should not
park on a hill or slope. But if parking on a
hill or slope cannot be avoided, you
should take the following steps:
1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal
down.
2. Have someone place wheel blocks
under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel blocks are in place,
release the regular brakes slowly until the
blocks absorb the load.
4. Apply the regular brakes and then
apply the parking brake; slowly release
CONTINUED
Black plate (290,1)
8-16
Driving tips
the regular brakes.

5. Shift into 1st or reverse gear (MT
vehicles) or P (AT vehicles) and shut
off the engine.
& Additional information for

Europe
The following information represents the
European statutory and regulatory requirements of 95/48/EC (92/21/EEC).
! Maximum permissible vehicle
weight (MPW) and maximum permissible rear axle weight (rear
MPAW) for trailer towing
Rear MPAW
MPW
Black plate (291,1)
Driving tips
Model
2.0 L
2.5 L turbo
MPW at towing (kg)
MPAW at towing (kg)
D/R
2,015
1,180
AT
2,015
1,180
5MT
2,030
1,180
AT
2,045
1,180
8-17
! Maximum permissible static vertical load on the coupling device

80 kg
! Mounting points of the coupling
device
The mounting points of the coupling
device are shown in the diagram.
5MT: 5-speed manual transmission

AT: Automatic transmission
D/R: Dual-range manual transmission
CONTINUED
Black plate (292,1)
8-18
1)
2)
3)
4)
Driving tips
Maximum permissible overhang of the coupling device: 1,074 mm (42 in)

Coupling
Fixing points: Two places under the rear frame and three places on the rear side of the rear
frame for each side
Rear frame
Black plate (17,1)
If you park your vehicle in case of an
emergency ........................................................
Flat tires...............................................................
9-2
9-2
Changing a flat tire..............................................
9-2
Jump starting ......................................................
9-7
Battery Precautions!............................................
Precautions when jump starting! .........................
How to jump start................................................
9-7
9-8
9-8
Engine overheating ............................................
9-10
If steam is coming from the engine

compartment....................................................
9-10
If no steam is coming from the engine

compartment ...................................................
9-10
Towing ................................................................
9-10
Towing and tie-down hooks................................

Using a flat-bed truck.........................................
Towing with all wheels on the ground.................
9-11
9-13
9-13
Rear gate if the rear gate cannot be

opened.............................................................
Sunroof if the sunroof cannot be closed......
Maintenance tools .............................................
9-14
9-15
9-15
Jack handle .......................................................

Jack and other maintenance tools ......................
9-16
9-16
Black plate (294,1)
9-2
If you park your vehicle in

case of an emergency
NOTE
When the hazard warning flasher is on,
the turn signals do not work.
Flat tires
If you have a flat tire while driving, never
brake suddenly; keep driving straight
ahead while gradually reducing speed.
Then slowly pull off the road to a safe
place.
& Changing a flat tire

WARNING
The hazard warning flasher should be

used in day or night to warn other drivers
when you have to park your vehicle under
emergency conditions.
Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to
safely pull off the road if a problem occurs.
The hazard warning flasher can be activated regardless of the ignition switch
position.
Turn on the hazard warning by pushing
the hazard warning flasher switch. Turn it
off by pushing the switch again.
. Do not jack up the vehicle on an

incline or a loose road surface.
The jack can come out of the
jacking point or sink into the
ground and this can result in a
severe accident.
. Use only the jack provided with
your vehicle. The jack supplied
with the vehicle is designed only
for changing a tire. Never get
under the vehicle while supporting the vehicle with this jack.
Black plate (295,1)
. Always turn off the engine before

raising the flat tire off the ground
using the jack. Never swing or
push the vehicle supported with
the jack. The jack can come out
of the jacking point due to a jolt
and this can result in a severe
accident.
1. Park on a hard, level surface, whenever possible, then stop the engine.
2. Set the parking brake securely and
shift the shift lever in reverse (MT vehicles) or the selector lever in the P (Park)
position (AT vehicles).
3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher
and have everyone get out of the vehicle.
9-3
To take out the jack handle:
1)
2)
3)
Jack and tool bucket

Jack handle
Spare tire
5. Take out the spare tire, jack, jack

handle and wheel nut wrench.
The spare tire and the tools are stored
under the floor of the cargo area. Take
them out according to the following procedure.
Open the floor cover of the cargo area,

and take out the jack handle.
To take out the jack and wheel nut
wrench:
4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear

of the tire diagonally opposite the flat tire.
CONTINUED
Black plate (296,1)
9-4
To take out the spare tire:
Take out the tool bucket that is stored in

the recess of the spare tire wheel.
1)
2)
Jack
Towing hook
1)
2)
3)
4)
Screwdriver
Wheel nut wrench
Tool bag
Lever (vehicles with wheel covers)
Turn the attaching bolt counterclockwise,

then take the spare tire out.
Take out the jack from the tool bucket, and

take out the wheel nut wrench from the
tool bag.
NOTE
Make sure that the jack is well lubricated before using it.
1)
2)
Notch
Valve hole
6. If your vehicle has wheel covers, insert
Black plate (297,1)
a lever into the notch part on the opposite

side of the valve hole to remove the wheel
cover.
7. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel

nut wrench but do not remove the nuts.
9-5
front or rear jack-up point closest to the flat

tire.
Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack
head engages firmly into the jack-up point.
9. Insert the jack handle into the jackscrew, and turn the handle until the tire
clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle
higher than necessary.
10. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat
tire.
11. Before putting the spare tire on, clean

the mounting surface of the wheel and hub
with a cloth.
12. Put on the spare tire. Replace the
wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand.
8. Place the jack under the side sill at the
CONTINUED
Black plate (298,1)
9-6
WARNING
Do not use oil or grease on the
wheel studs or nuts when the spare
tire is installed. This could cause the
nuts to become loose and lead to an
accident.
use your foot on the wheel nut wrench or a

pipe extension on the wrench because
you may exceed the specified torque.
Have the wheel nut torque checked at
the nearest automotive service facility.
the proper place.
13. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise

to lower the vehicle.
15. Store the flat tire in the spare tire

compartment. Put the spacer and tighten
the attaching bolt firmly.
Also store the jack, jack handle and wheel
nut wrench in their storage locations.
14. Use the wheel nut wrench to securely
tighten the wheel nuts to the specified
torque, following the tightening order in the
illustration.
The torque for tightening the nuts is 80 to
100 Nm (8.2 to 10.2 kgfm, 59 to 73.8
lbfft). This torque is equivalent to applying
approximately 40 to 50 kg (88 to 110 lbs)
at the top of the wheel nut wrench. Never
WARNING
Never place a tire or tire changing
tools in the passenger compartment
after changing wheels. In a sudden
stop or collisions, loose equipment
could strike occupants and cause
injury. Store the tire and all tools in
Black plate (299,1)
Jump starting
& Battery Precautions!
WARNING
Read these instructions carefully:
To ensure safe and correct handling
of your battery, read the following
precautions carefully before using
the battery or inspecting it.
Wear eye protection:
Always wear eye protection when
working near your vehicles battery.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid,
so it can cause blindness if
splashed into your eyes. Also, batteries emit highly flammable, explosive hydrogen gas. Eye protection is
vital for protection in the event that
this gas ignites.
acid:
Since battery fluid contains sulfuric
acid, be sure to wear eye protection
and protective gloves when inspecting your vehicles battery. Avoid

tipping the battery and subjecting it
to shocks since this could cause
fluid to spill.
Under no circumstances allow battery fluid to make contact with your
skin, eyes, or clothing since this can
cause blindness and burns. If battery fluid splashes onto your skin,
eyes or clothing, wash it away
immediately with plenty of water. If
battery fluid splashes into your
eyes, seek medical attention immediately.
If battery fluid is accidentally swallowed, immediately drink a large
amount of milk or water, and seek
medical attention immediately.
Battery fluid is corrosive. If it
splashes onto your vehicles paintwork or fabrics, wash it away immediately with plenty of water.
Keep children away:
Batteries must be handled only by
persons who are aware of the potential hazards. Take particular care
to keep children away from your
vehicles battery. Improper handling
9-7
can cause blindness and burns.

Keep flames away:
Before working on or near your
vehicles battery, extinguish all cigarettes, matches, and lighters.
Also, keep the battery away from
flammable items and electrical
sparks. Since batteries emit highly
flammable, explosive hydrogen gas,
any flames or sparks in the vicinity
could cause an explosion.
When working near your vehicles
battery, take care that metal tools do
not short-circuit the batterys (+) and
() terminals or connect the batterys (+) terminal to the vehicles
body. A short circuit could create
electrical sparks and lead to an
explosion.
To prevent electrical sparks, all
rings, wristwatches, and other metal
accessories must be taken off before work is carried out on or near
the battery.
Prevent explosions:
While being charged, batteries emit
highly flammable, explosive hydro CONTINUED
Black plate (300,1)
9-8
gen gas. To prevent an explosion,

charge your vehicles battery in a
well ventilated area and keep flames
away.
& Precautions when jump

starting!
WARNING
. Never attempt jump starting if the
discharged battery is frozen. It
could cause the battery to burst
or explode.
. Be sure the jumper cables and
clamps on them do not have
loose or missing insulation.
Do not jump start unless cables
in suitable condition are available.
. A running engine can be dangerous. Keep your fingers, hands,
clothing, hair and tools away
from the cooling fan, belts and
any other moving engine parts.
Removing rings, watches and
ties is advisable.
. Jump starting is dangerous if it
done incorrectly. If you are unsure about the proper procedure
for jump starting, consult a competent mechanic.
CAUTION
The battery used for boosting must
be 12 V. Do not jump start unless
you are sure that the booster battery
is correct.
When your vehicle does not start due to a
run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle
may be jump started by connecting your
battery to another battery (called the
booster battery) with jumper cables.
& How to jump start

1. Make sure the booster battery is 12
volts and the negative terminal is
grounded.
2. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not let the two vehicles touch.
3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and
accessories.
4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in
the sequence illustrated.
Black plate (301,1)
9-9
(1) Connect one jumper cable to the

positive (+) terminal on the discharged
battery.
(2) Connect the other end of the
jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery.
(3) Connect one end of the other
cable to the negative () terminal of
the booster battery.
(4) Connect the other end of the cable
to the strut mounting nut.
Make sure that the cables are not near
any moving parts and that the cable
clamps are not in contact with any other
metal.
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
booster battery and run it at moderate
speed. Then start the engine of the vehicle
that has the discharged battery.
6. When finished, carefully disconnect
the cables in exactly the reverse order.
A)
B)
Booster battery
Strut mounting nut
Black plate (302,1)
9-10
Engine overheating
WARNING
Never attempt to remove the radiator cap until the engine has been
shut off and has fully cooled down.
When the engine is hot, the coolant
is under pressure. Removing the
cap while the engine is still hot
could release a spray of boiling hot
coolant, which could burn you very
seriously.
If the engine overheats, safely pull off the
road and stop the vehicle in a safe place.
& If steam is coming from the

engine compartment
Turn off the engine and get everyone
away from the vehicle until it cools down.
& If no steam is coming from

the engine compartment
1. Keep the engine running at idling
speed.
2. Open the hood to ventilate the engine
compartment.
Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If
the fan is not turning, immediately turn off
the engine and contact your authorized

dealer for repair.
3. After the engine coolant temperature
has dropped, turn off the engine.
If the coolant temperature high warning
light illuminates, turn off the engine.
4. After the engine has fully cooled down,
check the coolant level in the reserve
tank.
If the coolant level is below the LOW
mark, add coolant up to the FULL mark.
5. If there is no coolant in the reserve
tank, add coolant to the reserve tank.
Then remove the radiator cap and fill the
radiator with coolant.
If you remove the radiator cap from a hot
radiator, first wrap a thick cloth around the
radiator cap, then turn the cap counterclockwise slowly without pressing down
until it stops. Release the pressure from
the radiator. After the pressure has been
fully released, remove the cap by pressing
down and turning it.
Towing
If towing is necessary, it is best done by
your SUBARU dealer or a commercial
towing service. Observe the following
procedures for safety.
WARNING
Never tow AWD vehicles (both AT
and MT) with the front wheels raised
off the ground while the rear wheels
are on the ground, or with the rear
wheels raised off the ground while
the front wheels are on the ground.
This will cause the vehicle to spin
away due to the operation or deterioration of the center differential.
Black plate (303,1)
& Towing and tie-down hooks

The towing hooks should be used only in
an emergency (e.g., to free a stuck vehicle
from mud, sand or snow).
2. Pry off the cover on the front bumper

using a screwdriver, and you will find a
threaded hole for attaching the towing
hook.
CAUTION
4. Tighten the towing hook securely

using the wheel nut wrench.
After towing, remove the towing hook from
the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket.
Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.
WARNING
Use only the specified towing hook

and tie-down hook. Never use suspension parts or other parts of the
body for towing or tie-down purposes.
Front towing hook:
1. Take the towing hook out of the tool
bucket and take the screwdriver out of the
tool bag. Take the wheel nut wrench out of
the cargo area.
9-11
. Do not use the towing hook

except when towing your vehicle.
. Be sure to remove the towing
hook after towing. Leaving the
towing hook mounted on the
vehicle could interfere with proper operation of the SRS airbag
system in a frontal collision.
3. Screw the towing hook into the thread
hole until its thread can no longer be seen.
CAUTION
To prevent deformation to the bumper and the towing hook, do not
apply excessive lateral load to the
towing hook.
CONTINUED
Black plate (304,1)
9-12
the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket.

Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.
Rear towing hook:

1. Take the towing hook out of the tool
bucket and take the screwdriver out of the
tool bag. Take the wheel nut wrench out of
the cargo area.
WARNING
. Do not use the towing hook
except when towing your vehicle.
. Be sure to remove the towing
hook after towing.
CAUTION
3. Screw the towing hook into the thread
hole until its thread can no longer be seen.
To prevent deformation to the bumper and the towing hook, do not

apply excessive lateral load to the
towing hook.
Front tie-down hooks:
2. Pry off the cover on the rear bumper

using a screwdriver, and you will find a
threaded hole for attaching the towing
hook.
4. Tighten the towing hook securely

using the wheel nut wrench.
After towing, remove the towing hook from
The front tie-down hooks are located
Black plate (305,1)
between each of the front tires and the

front bumper.
& Using a flat-bed truck
9-13
& Towing with all wheels on the

ground
Rear tie-down hooks:
The rear tie-down hooks are located near

each of the jack-up reinforcements.
WARNING
Use the rear tie-down hooks only for
downward anchoring. If they are
used to anchor the vehicle in any
other direction, cables may slip off
the hooks, possibly causing a dangerous situation.
This is the best way to transport your

vehicle. Use the following procedures to
ensure safe transportation.
1. Shift the selector lever into the P
position for AT vehicles or the shift lever
into 1st for MT vehicles.
2. Pull up the parking brake lever firmly.
3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier
properly with safety chains. Each of safety
chain should be equally tightened and
care must be taken not to pull the chains
so tightly that the suspension bottoms out.
1. Check the transmission and differential oil levels and add oil to bring it to the
upper level if necessary.
2. Release the parking brake and put the
transmission in neutral.
3. The ignition switch should be in the
Acc position while the vehicle is being
towed.
4. Take up slack in the towline slowly to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
WARNING
. Never turn the ignition switch to
the LOCK position while the
vehicle is being towed because
CONTINUED
Black plate (306,1)
9-14
the steering wheel and the direction of the wheels will be locked.
. Remember that the brake booster
and power steering do not function when the engine is not
running. Because the engine is
turned off, it will take greater
effort to operate the brake pedal
and steering wheel.
Rear gate if the rear gate

cannot be opened
In the event that you cannot open the rear
gate by operating the power door locking
switches, keyless access with push-button
start system, or remote keyless entry
system, you can open it from inside the
cargo area.
2. Locate the rear gate lock release lever

behind the rear gate trim panel.
CAUTION
Never operate the rear gate lock
release lever with fingers because
doing so may cause an injury. Always use a flat-head screwdriver or
a similar tool.
CAUTION
. If transmission failure occurs,
transport your vehicle on a flatbed truck.
. Do not run the engine while being
towed in this method. Transmission damage could result if the
vehicle is towed with engine
running.
. For vehicles with automatic
transmission, the traveling speed
must be limited to less than 30
km/h (20 mph) and the traveling
distance to less than 50 km (31
miles). For greater speeds and
distances, transport your vehicle
on a flat-bed truck.
1. Remove the access cover at the

bottom-center of the rear gate trim.
NOTE
For vehicles with the double locking
system, the rear gate lock release lever
is still shielded with an anti-theft cover.
So, remove the anti-theft cover using a
Phillips screwdriver to access the rear
gate lock release lever.
3. Unlock the rear gate by pressing the

lever inside the trim to the right.
4. Open the rear gate from outside by
raising the rear gate handle.
Black plate (307,1)
Sunroof if the sunroof cannot be closed
9-15
Maintenance tools
Your vehicle is equipped with the following
maintenance tools:
If the sunroof cannot be closed with the

sunroof switch, you can close the sunroof
manually.
Jack
Jack handle
Screwdriver
Towing hook (eye bolt)
Wheel nut wrench
1. Remove the plug on the roof trim of the

cargo area by inserting the end of a flathead screwdriver between the roof and
plug and prying it off.
2. Insert a hex-head wrench in the end of

the motor shaft.
To close the sunroof, turn the hex-head
wrench counterclockwise. Pull the hexhead wrench out and reinsert it after every
half-turn.
We recommend that you have your
vehicle checked and repaired by an
authorized SUBARU dealer.
CONTINUED
Black plate (308,1)
9-16
& Jack handle
& Jack and other maintenance

tools
1)
2)
3)
4)
The jack handle is stored under the floor

cover of the cargo area.
Screwdriver
Wheel nut wrench
Tool bag
The jack and towing hook are stored in the

tool bucket that is located in the recess of
the spare tire wheel under the floor of the
cargo area.
The screwdriver and wheel nut wrench are
stored in the tool bag.
For how to use the jack, refer to the Flat
tires section in this chapter.
1)
2)
Jack
Towing hook
Black plate (19,1)
Appearance care
Exterior care .......................................................
10-2
Cleaning the interior..........................................
10-5
Washing.............................................................
Waxing and polishing .........................................
Cleaning aluminum wheels .................................
10-2
10-3
10-3
10-5
10-5
10-5
Corrosion protection..........................................
10-4
Most common causes of corrosion .....................

To help prevent corrosion...................................
10-4
10-4
Seat fabric .........................................................

Leather seat materials........................................
Synthetic leather upholstery...............................
Climate control panel, audio panel, instrument
panel, console panel, switches, combination
meter, and other plastic surfaces .....................
Navigation monitor (if equipped) ........................
10-5
10-6
10
Black plate (312,1)
10-2
Appearance care
Exterior care
& Washing
CAUTION
. When washing the vehicle, the
brakes may get wet. As a result,
the brake stopping distance will
be longer. To dry the brakes,
drive the vehicle at a safe speed
while lightly pressing the brake
pedal to heat up the brakes.
. Do not wash the engine compartment and area adjacent to it. If
water enters the engine air intake, electrical parts or the power
steering fluid reservoir, it will
cause engine trouble or faulty
power steering respectively.
. Since your vehicle is equipped
with a rear wiper, automatic carwash brushes could become
tangled around it, damaging the
wiper arm and other components. Ask the automatic carwash operator not to let the
brushes touch the wiper arm or
to fix the wiper arm on the rear
window glass with adhesive tape
before operating the machine.
NOTE
When having your vehicle washed in
an automatic car wash, make sure
beforehand that the car wash is of
suitable type.
The best way to preserve your vehicles
beauty is frequent washing. Wash the
vehicle at least once a month to avoid
contamination by road grime.
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty
of lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash
the vehicle with hot water and in direct
sunlight.
Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, tree
sap, and bird droppings should be washed
off by using a light detergent, as required.
If you use a light detergent, make certain
that it is a neutral detergent. Do not use
strong soap or chemical detergents. All
cleaning agents should be promptly
flushed from the surface and not allowed
to dry there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly
with plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe the
remaining water off with a chamois or soft
cloth.
! Washing the underbody
Chemicals, salts and gravel used for
deicing road surfaces are extremely corrosive, accelerating the corrosion of underbody components, such as the exhaust
system, fuel and brake lines, brake

cables, floor pan and fenders, and suspension.
Thoroughly flush the underbody and inside of the fenders with lukewarm or cold
water at frequent intervals to reduce the
harmful effects of such agents.
Mud and sand adhering to the underbody
components may accelerate their corrosion.
After driving off-road or muddy or sandy
roads, wash the mud and sand off the
underbody.
Carefully flush the suspension and axle
parts, as they are particularly prone to
mud and sand buildup. Do not use a
sharp-edged tool to remove caked mud.
NOTE
Be careful not to damage brake hoses,
sensor harnesses, and other parts
when washing suspension components.
! Using a warm water washer
. Keep a good distance of 30 cm (12 in)
or more between the washer nozzle and
the vehicle.
. Do not wash the same area continuously.
. If a stain will not come out easily, wash
Black plate (313,1)
Appearance care
by hand. Some warm water washers are

of the high temperature, high pressure
type, and they can damage or deform the
resin parts such as moldings, or cause
water to leak into the vehicle.
& Waxing and polishing

Always wash and dry the vehicle before
waxing and polishing.
Use a good quality polish and wax and
apply them according to the manufacturers instructions. Wax or polish when
the painted surface is cool.
Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim,
as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of
wax on a painted surface leads to loss of
the original luster and also quickens the
deterioration of the surface. It is recommended that a coat of wax be applied at
least once a month, or whenever the
surface no longer repels water.
If the appearance of the paint has diminished to the point where the luster or tone
cannot be restored, lightly polish the
surface with a fine-grained compound.
Never polish just the affected area, but
include the surrounding area as well.
Always polish in only one direction. A
No. 2000 grain compound is recommended. Never use a coarse-grained
compound. Coarser grained compounds
have a smaller grain-size number and

could damage the paint. After polishing
with a compound, coat with wax to restore
the original luster. Frequent polishing with
a compound or an incorrect polishing
technique will result in removing the paint
layer and exposing the undercoat. When
in doubt, it is always best to contact your
SUBARU dealer or an auto paint specialist.
10-3
agents.
NOTE
Be careful not to block the windshield
washer nozzles with wax when waxing
the vehicle.
& Cleaning aluminum wheels

. Promptly wipe the aluminum wheels
clean of any kind of grime or agent. If dirt
is left on too long, it may be difficult to
clean off.
. Do not use soap containing grit to
clean the wheels. Be sure to use a neutral
cleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughly
with water. Do not clean the wheels with a
stiff brush or expose them to a high-speed
washing device.
. Clean the vehicle (including the aluminum wheels) with water as soon as
possible when it has been splashed with
sea water, exposed to sea breezes, or
driven on roads treated with salt or other
10
Black plate (314,1)
10-4
Appearance care
Corrosion protection
Your SUBARU has been designed and
built to resist corrosion. Special materials
and protective finishes have been used on
most parts of the vehicle to help maintain
fine appearance, strength, and reliable
operation.
& Most common causes of

corrosion
The most common causes of corrosion
are:
1. The accumulation of moisture retaining dirt and debris in body panel sections,
cavities, and other areas.
2. Damage to paint and other protective
coatings caused by gravel and stone
chips or minor accidents.
Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle
when:
1. It is exposed to road salt or dust
control chemicals, or used in coastal
areas where there is more salt in the air,
or in areas where there is considerable
industrial pollution.
2. It is driven in areas of high humidity,
especially when temperatures range just
above freezing.
3. Dampness in certain parts of the
vehicle remains for a long time, even
though other parts of the vehicle may be

dry.
4. High temperatures will cause corrosion to parts of the vehicle which cannot
dry quickly due to lack of proper ventilation.
& To help prevent corrosion

Wash the vehicle regularly to prevent
corrosion of the body and suspension
components. Also, wash the vehicle
promptly after driving on any of the
following surfaces:
. roads that have been salted to prevent
them from freezing in winter
. mud, sand, or gravel
. coastal roads
After the winter has ended, it is recommended that the underbody be given a
very thorough washing.
Before the beginning of winter, check the
condition of underbody components, such
as the exhaust system, fuel and brake
lines, brake cables, suspension, steering
system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of
them are found to be rusted, they should
be given an appropriate rust prevention
treatment or should be replaced. We
SUBARU dealer to perform this kind of
maintenance and treatment if you need

assistance.
Repair chips and scratches in the paint as
soon as you find them.
Check the interior of the vehicle for water
and dirt accumulation under the floor mats
because that could cause corrosion.
Occasionally check under the mats to
make sure the area is dry.
Keep your garage dry. Do not park your
vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated
garage. In such a garage, corrosion can
be caused by dampness. If you wash the
vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle
into the garage when wet or covered with
snow, that can cause dampness.
If your vehicle is operated in cold weather
and/or in areas where road salts and other
corrosive materials are used, the door
hinges and locks, and hood latch should
be inspected and lubricated periodically.
Black plate (315,1)
Appearance care
Cleaning the interior

Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate
control panel, audio equipment, instrument panel, center console, combination
meter panel, and switches. (Do not use
organic solvents.)
& Seat fabric

Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a
vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the
fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum
cleaner, use a soft brush then vacuum it.
Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly
wrung cloth and dry the seat fabric
thoroughly. If the fabric is still dirty, wipe
using a solution of mild soap and lukewarm water then dry thoroughly.
If the stain does not come out, try a
commercially-available fabric cleaner. Use
the cleaner on a hidden place and make
sure it does not affect the fabric adversely.
Use the cleaner according to its instructions.
NOTE
When cleaning the seat, do not use
benzine, paint thinner, or any similar
materials.
& Leather seat materials

The leather used by SUBARU is a high
quality natural product which will retain its
distinctive appearance and feel for many
years with proper care.
Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the
surface can cause the material to become
brittle and to wear prematurely. Regular
cleaning with a soft, moist, natural fiber
cloth should be performed monthly, taking
care not to soak the leather or allow water
to penetrate the stitched seams.
A mild detergent suitable for cleaning
woolen fabrics may be used to remove
difficult dirt spots, rubbing with a soft, dry
cloth afterwards to restore the luster. If
your SUBARU is to be parked for a long
time in bright sunlight, it is recommended
that the seats and headrests be covered,
or the windows shaded, to prevent fading
or shrinkage.
Minor surface blemishes or bald patches
may be treated with a commercial leather
spray lacquer. You will discover that each
leather seat section will develop soft folds
or wrinkles, which is characteristic of
genuine leather.
& Synthetic leather upholstery
10-5
or detergent and water, after first vacuuming or brushing away loose dirt. Allow the
soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe
off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial
foam-type cleaners suitable for synthetic
leather materials may be used when
necessary.
NOTE
Strong cleaning agents such as solvents, paint thinners, window cleaner
or gasoline must never be used on
leather or synthetic interior materials.
& Climate control panel, audio

panel, instrument panel,
console panel, switches,
combination meter, and other
plastic surfaces
Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate
control panel, audio equipment, instrument panel, center console, combination
meter panel, and switches.
NOTE
Do not use organic solvents such as
paint thinners or gasoline, or strong
cleaning agents that contain those
solvents.
The synthetic leather material used on the

SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap
CONTINUED
10
Black plate (316,1)
10-6
Appearance care
& Navigation monitor (if

equipped)
To clean the navigation monitor, wipe it
with a silicone cloth or with a soft cloth. If
the navigation monitor is extremely dirty,
clean it with a soft cloth moistened with
neutral detergent then carefully wipe off
any remaining detergent.
NOTE
. Do not spray neutral detergent directly onto the monitor. Doing so could
damage the monitors components.
. Do not wipe the monitor with a hard
cloth. Doing so could scratch the
monitor.
. Do not use cleaning fluid that contains thinner, gasoline, or any other
volatile substance. Such cleaning fluid
could erase the lettering on the
switches at the bottom of the monitor.
Black plate (21,1)

Maintenance schedule .......................................
11-3
Automatic transmission fluid..........................
11-27
For Europe.........................................................
For others ..........................................................
11-3
11-6
Checking the fluid level....................................

Recommended fluid .........................................
11-27
11-28
Maintenance precautions...................................
11-9
Front differential gear oil (AT vehicles)..........
11-28
Before checking or servicing in the engine

compartment.................................................... 11-9
When you do checking or servicing in the engine
compartment while the engine is running........ 11-10
Checking the oil level ......................................

Recommended grade and viscosity ..................
11-28
11-29
Rear differential gear oil (AWD vehicles) .......
11-29
Checking the gear oil level...............................

11-29
11-31
Power steering fluid (if equipped) ..................
11-31

Recommended fluid .........................................
11-31
11-32
Brake fluid........................................................
11-33

Recommended brake fluid ...............................
11-33
11-33
Clutch fluid (MT vehicles) ...............................
11-34

Recommended clutch fluid...............................
11-34
11-34
Brake booster ..................................................

Brake pedal ......................................................
11-35
11-35
Checking the brake pedal free play ..................

Checking the brake pedal reserve distance.......
11-35
11-36
Clutch pedal (MT vehicles)..............................
11-36
Checking the clutch function............................

Checking the clutch pedal free play..................
11-36
11-36
11-37
Engine hood .....................................................

Engine compartment overview........................
11-11
11-13
Non-turbo models ............................................

Turbo models ...................................................
11-13
11-14
Engine oil..........................................................
11-15
Checking the oil level .......................................

Changing the oil and oil filter............................
Recommended grade and viscosity under severe
driving conditions ..........................................
11-15
11-16
11-17
11-18
Cooling system ................................................
11-19
Cooling fan, hose and connections ...................

Engine coolant .................................................
11-19
11-19
Air cleaner element ..........................................
11-22
Replacing the air cleaner element .....................
11-22
Spark plugs ......................................................
11-24
Recommended spark plugs ..............................
11-24
Drive belts ........................................................

Manual transmission oil ..................................
11-25
11-26
Replacement of brake pad and lining ............
Checking the oil level .......................................

11-26
11-27
Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings .......
11-37
Parking brake stroke .......................................
11-38
11
Black plate (22,1)
Tires and wheels ..............................................
11-38
Battery ..............................................................
Types of tires ...................................................

Tire inspection .................................................
Tire pressures and wear ...................................
Wheel balance..................................................
Wear indicators ................................................
Tire rotation direction mark ..............................
Tire rotation .....................................................
Tire replacement ..............................................
Wheel replacement...........................................
Wheel covers ...................................................
11-38
11-38
11-39
11-40
11-41
11-41
11-41
11-42
11-43
11-43
Battery Precautions! ........................................
11-49
Fuses ................................................................
Main fuse..........................................................
Installation of accessories ..............................
Replacing bulbs ...............................................
11-51
11-52
11-53
11-54
Aluminum wheels (if equipped) ......................

Windshield washer fluid ..................................
Replacement of wiper blades ..........................
11-44
11-44
11-45
Windshield wiper blade assembly .....................

Windshield wiper blade rubber .........................
Rear window wiper blade assembly ..................
Rear window wiper blade rubber.......................
11-46
11-46
11-47
11-48
Headlights (vehicles with HID headlights) .........

Headlights (vehicles without HID
headlights) ....................................................
Front position light and front turn signal
light ..............................................................
Side turn signal light........................................
Rear combination lights ...................................
License plate light ...........................................
Dome light, map light, cargo area light and door
step light .......................................................
Other bulbs .....................................................
11-49
11-55
11-56
11-58
11-58
11-58
11-59
11-60
11-60
Black plate (319,1)
11-3
Maintenance schedule
To keep your vehicle in proper operating condition and to assure peak performance at all times, the recommended maintenance
service should be performed in accordance with the maintenance schedule.
NOTE
The frequency of scheduled inspection and maintenance services as set forth is minimal. However, it may be necessary that
they be performed more frequently depending on road conditions, weather, atmospheric conditions and vehicle usage. These
conditions may differ from one country to another. Therefore there may be special requirement in your country. We
recommend that you ask your authorized SUBARU dealer for the actual maintenance schedule applied to your vehicle.
& For Europe

Continue periodic maintenance beyond 120,000 km (75,000 miles) or 96 months by returning to the third column of the maintenance
schedule and adding 120,000 km (75,000 miles) or 96 months to the column headings.
Symbols used:
R: Replace
I: Inspect, and then adjust, correct or replace if necessary.
P: Perform
(I): Recommended service for safe vehicle operation
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
(Number of months or km (miles), whichever occurs first)
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
Months
6 1,000 km
6 1,000 miles
12
24
36
48
60
72
84
96
1.6
15
30
45
60
75
90
105
120
19
28
38
47
56
66
75
REMARKS
Engine oil
See NOTE 1)
Engine oil filter
See NOTE 1)
Drive belt(s) [Except camshaft]
I
CONTINUED
11
Black plate (320,1)
11-4

MAINTENANCE
ITEM
Months
6 1,000 km
6 1,000 miles
12
24
36
48
60
72
84
96
1.6
15
30
45
60
75
90
105
120
19
28
38
47
56
66
75
Camshaft drive belt (Timing belt)
Cooling system, hoses and connections
Replace engine coolant

(SUBARU super coolant or equivalent)
Fuel system, lines and connections
Fuel filter
Air cleaner element
10
Spark plugs
11
Transmission/Differential (Front & Rear) lubricants (Gear oil)
REMARKS
R
I
1st replacement: 132 months (11 years)/220,000 km

(137,500 miles)
From the 2nd replacement: 72 months (6 years)/120,000 km
(75,000 miles)
I
See NOTE 2)
See NOTE 3)
See NOTE 4)
See NOTE 4)
See NOTE 5)
See NOTE 2)
I
R
I
R
12
Automatic transmission fluid
13
Brake fluid
14
Disc brake pads and discs/Front and rear

axle boots and axle shaft joint portions
15
Brake linings and drums (including parking

brake linings and drums)
See NOTE 2)
16
Inspect brake lines and check operation of

parking and service brake system
See NOTE 2)
R
I
R
I
R
I
Black plate (321,1)
11-5
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
Months
6 1,000 km
6 1,000 miles
12
24
36
48
60
72
84
96
1.6
15
30
45
60
75
90
105
120
19
28
38
47
56
66
75
REMARKS
17
Clutch system
Adjust pedal free play at

1,600 km (1,000 miles)
18
Steering and suspension system
See NOTE 2)
19
Front and rear wheel bearing lubricant
(I)
NOTE
1) When the vehicle is used under severe driving conditions mentioned below*, the engine oil and oil filter should be
changed more frequently.
2) When the vehicle is used under severe driving conditions mentioned below*, inspection should be performed at every
15,000 km (9,000 miles) or 12 months whichever occurs first.
3) When the vehicle is used under severe driving conditions mentioned below*, the air cleaner element should be replaced
more frequently.
4) When the vehicle is frequently operated under severe driving conditions, such as towing a trailer or driving on sand,
replacement of automatic transmission fluid, differential gear oil (front and rear) and manual transmission gear oil should be
performed more frequently.
5) When the vehicle is used under following areas, change fluid every 15,000 km (9,000 miles) or 12 months whichever
occurs first.
(1) High humidity areas
(2) Mountainous areas
* Examples of severe driving conditions:
(1) Operating in extremely cold weather (Items 1, 2 and 18 only)
(2) Towing a trailer (Items 1, 2, 11, 12, 14 and 15 only)
(3) Repeated short trips (Items 1, 2, 14 and 15 only)
(4) Driving in dusty roads (Items 9, 14, 15 and 18 only)
(5) Driving in rough and/or muddy roads (Items 14, 15 and 18 only)
CONTINUED
11
Black plate (322,1)
11-6
(6)
(7)
Driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials (Items 7, 14, 15, 16 and 18 only)
Living in coastal areas (Items 7, 14, 15, 16 and 18 only)
& For others

Continue periodic maintenance beyond 100,000 km (60,000 miles) or 48 months by returning to the second column of the maintenance
schedule and adding 100,000 km (60,000 miles) or 48 months to the column headings.
Symbols used:
R: Replace
I: Inspect, and then adjust, correct or replace if necessary.
P: Perform
(I): Recommended service for safe vehicle operation
MAINTENANCE ITEM
Months
6 1,000 km
6 1,000 miles
12
24
36
48
1.6
25
50
75
100
15
30
45
60
REMARKS
Drive belt(s) (Except camshaft)
Camshaft drive belt (Timing belt)
Engine oil
Change every 12,500 km (7,500 miles) or 12

months whichever occurs first.
See NOTE 1)
Engine oil filter
Change every 12,500 km (7,500 miles) or 12

months whichever occurs first.
See NOTE 1)
Cooling system, hoses and connections
Replace engine coolant (SUBARU super coolant or equivalent)
Fuel system, lines and connections
1st replacement: 132 months (11 years)/

220,000 km (137,500 miles)
From the 2nd replacement: 72 months (6
years)/120,000 km (75,000 miles)
I
See NOTE 2)
Black plate (323,1)
11-7
MAINTENANCE ITEM
Months
6 1,000 km
6 1,000 miles
12
24
36
48
1.6
25
50
75
100
15
30
45
60
REMARKS
Fuel filter
Air cleaner element
10
Spark plugs
11
Transmission/Differential (Front & Rear) lubricants (Gear oil)
See NOTE 4)
12
See NOTE 4)
13
Brake fluid
See NOTE 5)
14
Disc brake pads and discs/Front and rear axle boots and axle
shaft joint portions
See NOTE 2)
15
Brake linings and drums (Parking brake)
See NOTE 2)
16
Inspect brake lines and check operation of parking and service

brake system
See NOTE 2)
17
Clutch system
Adjust pedal free play at

1,600 km (1,000 miles)
18
Steering and suspension system
See NOTE 2)
19
Front and rear wheel bearing lubricant
R
I
See NOTE 3)
(I)
NOTE
1) When the vehicle is used under severe driving conditions mentioned below*, the engine oil and oil filter should be
changed more frequently.
2) When the vehicle is used under severe driving conditions mentioned below*, inspection should be performed at every
12,500 km (7,500 miles) or 6 months whichever occurs first.
3) When the vehicle is used under severe driving conditions mentioned below*, the air cleaner element should be replaced
CONTINUED
11
Black plate (324,1)
11-8
more frequently.
4) When the vehicle is frequently operated under severe conditions, such as towing a trailer or driving on sand, replacement
of manual transmission gear oil and automatic transmission fluid and differential gear oil should be performed more
frequently.
5) When the vehicle is used under following areas, change fluid every 25,000 km (15,000 miles) or 12 months whichever
occurs first.
(1) High humidity areas
(2) Mountainous areas
* Examples of severe driving conditions:
(1) Operating in extremely cold weather (Items 3, 4 and 18 only)
(2) Towing a trailer (Items 3, 4, 11, 12, 14 and 15 only)
(3) Repeated short trips (Items 3, 4, 14 and 15 only)
(4) Driving in dusty roads (Items 9, 14, 15 and 18 only)
(5) Driving in rough and/or muddy roads (Items 14, 15 and 18 only)
(6) Driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials (Items 7, 14, 15, 16 and 18 only)
(7) Living in coastal areas (Items 7, 14, 15, 16 and 18 only)
Black plate (325,1)
Maintenance precautions
When maintenance and service are required, it is recommended that all work be
done by an authorized SUBARU dealer.
If you perform maintenance and service

by yourself, you should familiarize yourself
with the information provided in this
section on general maintenance and
service for your SUBARU.
Incorrect or incomplete service could

cause improper or unsafe vehicle operation. Any problems caused by improper
maintenance and service performed by
you are not eligible for warranty coverage.
WARNING
. Always select a safe area when
performing maintenance on your
vehicle.
. Always be very careful to avoid
injury when working on the vehicle. Remember that some of the
materials in the vehicle may be
hazardous if improperly used or
handled, for example, battery
acid.
. Your vehicle should only be serviced by persons fully competent
to do so. Serious personal injury
.
.
.
may result to persons not experienced in servicing vehicles.

Always use the proper tools and
make certain that they are well
maintained.
Never get under the vehicle supported only by a jack. Always use
a safety stands to support the
vehicle.
Never keep the engine running in
a poorly ventilated area, such as
a garage or other closed areas.
Do not smoke or allow open
flames around the fuel or battery.
This will cause a fire.
Because the fuel system is under
pressure, we recommend that
you have your SUBARU dealer
perform the replacement of the
fuel filter.
Wear adequate eye protection to
guard against getting oil or fluids
in your eyes. If something does
get in your eyes, thoroughly
wash them out with clean water.
Do not tamper with the wiring of
the SRS airbag system or seatbelt pretensioner system, or attempt to take its connectors
apart, as that may activate the
11-9
system or it can render it inoperative when it should be operative. The wiring and connectors
of these systems are yellow for
easy identification. NEVER use a
circuit tester for these wiring. If
your SRS airbag or seatbelt pretensioner needs service, we recommend that you consult your
& Before checking or servicing

in the engine compartment
WARNING
. Always stop the engine and set
the parking brake firmly to prevent the vehicle from moving.
. Always let the engine cool down.
Engine parts become very hot
when the engine is running and
remain hot for some time after
the engine is stopped.
. Do not spill engine oil, engine
coolant, brake fluid or any other
fluid on hot engine components.
This may cause a fire.
. Always remove the key from the
ignition switch. When the ignition
switch is in the ON position,
CONTINUED
11
Black plate (326,1)
11-10
the cooling fan may operate

suddenly even when the engine
is stopped.
! For all four wheels turning
For maintenance and inspection performed on AWD AT vehicles which requires a running engine and the front
wheels turning (for example, when they
are jacked up, driven on rollers, or tested
by a brake tester), deactivate the AWD
capability of the vehicle as follows.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
position.
& When you do checking or

servicing in the engine compartment while the engine is
running
WARNING
A running engine can be dangerous.
Keep your fingers, hands, clothing,
hair and tools away from the cooling
fan, belts and any other moving
engine parts. Removing rings,
watches and ties is advisable.
MT vehicles, be sure to jack up all

four wheels or use free rollers.
1)
Safety stand
For any maintenance and inspection

performed on AWD vehicles which requires a running engine and all four
wheels turning, jack up all four wheels or
use free rollers to prevent the vehicle from
moving. Never race the engine or brake
suddenly.
! For front wheels turning
CAUTION
The AWD MT vehicles cannot be
changed over from AWD to FWD. If
any maintenance or inspection requires a running engine and the
front wheels turning with the AWD
2. Pull any one spare fuse out of the

spare fuse holder in the engine compartment. Spare fuses are attached on the
back side of the fuse holder cover. You
may pick up any one of the fuses in the
spare fuse holder.
Black plate (327,1)
capability of the vehicle has now been

deactivated.
11-11
Engine hood
Always use reliable blocks to prevent the

vehicle from moving. Never race the
engine or brake suddenly.
NOTE
1)
2)
Spare fuse
FWD connector
After that maintenance and inspection

have been performed, remove the
spare fuse from the FWD connector in
order to reactivate All-Wheel Drive.
Make sure to restore the removed
spare fuse in the spare fuse holder
located in the engine compartment.
To open the hood:
1. If the wiper blades are lifted off the
windshield, return them to their original
positions.
2. Pull the hood release knob under the
instrument panel.
11
3. Put a spare fuse inside the FWD

connector located in the cabin and confirm
that the All-Wheel Drive warning light
illuminates. The All-Wheel-Drive
CONTINUED
Black plate (328,1)
11-12
WARNING
Always check that the hood is
properly locked before you start
driving. If it is not, it might fly open
while the vehicle is moving and
block your view, which may cause
an accident and serious bodily injury.
3. Release the secondary hood release

by moving the lever between the front
grille and the hood toward the left.
4. Lift up the hood.
To close the hood:
1. Lower the hood to a height of approximately 15 cm (5.9 in) above its closed
position and then let it drop.
2. After closing the hood, be sure the
hood is securely locked.
If this does not close the hood, release it
from a slightly higher position. Do not push
the hood forcibly to close it. It could
deform the metal.
Black plate (329,1)
Engine compartment overview
1)
& Non-turbo models
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
11-13
Power steering fluid reservoir

(if equipped) (page 11-31)
Manual transmission oil level gauge (MT)
(page 11-26) or Differential gear oil level
gauge (AT) (page 11-28)
Clutch fluid reservoir (page 11-34)
Automatic transmission fluid level gauge
(page 11-27)
Brake fluid reservoir (page 11-33)
Battery (page 11-49)
Windshield washer tank (page 11-44)
Engine oil filler cap (page 11-15)
Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-19)
Radiator cap (page 11-19)
Engine oil level gauge (page 11-15)
Air cleaner element (page 11-22)
11
CONTINUED
Black plate (330,1)
11-14
& Turbo models
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
Power steering fluid reservoir

(page 11-31)
Manual transmission oil level gauge (MT)
(page 11-26) or Differential gear oil level
gauge (AT) (page 11-28)
Clutch fluid reservoir (page 11-34)
Automatic transmission fluid level gauge
(page 11-27)
Brake fluid reservoir (page 11-33)
Battery (page 11-49)
Windshield washer tank (page 11-44)
Engine oil filler cap (page 11-15)
Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-19)
Engine oil level gauge (page 11-15)
Radiator cap (page 11-19)
Air cleaner element (page 11-22)
Black plate (331,1)
Engine oil
& Checking the oil level
NOTE
Check the engine oil level at each fuel

stop.
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
stop the engine.
The engine oil consumption rate is not

stabilized, and therefore cannot be
determined until the vehicle has traveled at least several thousand kilometers. When the vehicle is used under
severe driving conditions, such as
those mentioned earlier in this chapter,
engine oil is consumed or deteriorated
more quickly than under normal driving
conditions. Please check and replace it
more frequently than usual.
If the oil consumption rate is abnormally large after the stabilized period,
for example more than 1 liter per 2,000
kilometers, we recommend that you
1)
2)
3)
2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean,

and insert it again.
3. Be sure the level gauge is correctly
inserted until it stops with the graphic
on its top appearing as
symbol
shown in the illustration.
11-15
Notch
Upper level
Lower level
4. Pull out the level gauge again and

check the oil level on it. If it is below the
lower level, add oil to bring the level up to
the upper level.
CAUTION
. Use only engine oil with the
recommended grade and viscosity.
. Be careful not to spill engine oil
when adding it. If oil touches the
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad
smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If
engine oil gets on the exhaust
CONTINUED
11
Black plate (332,1)
11-16
pipe, be sure to wipe it off.

If you check the oil level just after stopping
the engine, wait a few minutes for the oil to
drain back into the oil pan before checking
the level.
Just after driving or while the engine is
warm, the engine oil level reading may be
in a range between the upper level and
the notch mark. This is caused by thermal
expansion of the engine oil.
To prevent overfilling the engine oil, do not
add any additional oil above the upper
level when the engine is cold.
& Changing the oil and oil filter

Change the oil and oil filter according to
the maintenance schedule.
The engine oil and oil filter must be
changed more frequently than listed in
the maintenance schedule, when short
trips are frequently made, when towing a
trailer, or when driving in extremely cold
weather.
1. Warm up the engine by letting the
engine idle for approximately 10 minutes
to ease draining the engine oil.
stop the engine.
3. Remove the oil filler cap.
4. Drain out the engine oil by removing

the drain plug while the engine is still
warm. The used oil should be drained into
an appropriate container and disposed of
properly.
WARNING
Be careful not to burn yourself with
hot engine oil.
5. Wipe the seating surface of the drain
plug with a clean cloth and tighten it
securely with a new sealing washer after
the oil has completely drained out.
6. Remove under cover.
7. Remove the oil filter with an oil filter

wrench.
8. Before installing a new oil filter, apply a
thin coat of engine oil to the seal.
9. Clean the rubber seal seating area of
the bottom of engine and install the oil
filter by hand turning. Be careful not to
twist or damage the seal.
10. Tighten the oil filter by the amount
indicated in the following table after the
seal makes contact with the bottom of
engine.
Oil filter color
Part number
Amount of
rotation
Black
15208AA100
1 rotation
Black plate (333,1)
CAUTION
. Never over tighten the oil filter
because that can result in an oil
leak.
. Thoroughly wipe off any engine
oil that has spilled over the
exhaust pipe and/or under-cover.
If left unremoved, the oil could
catch fire.
11. Reinstall the under cover.
12. Pour the specified amount of engine
oil through the filler neck.
Oil quantity (guideline):
4.0 liters (4.2 US qt, 3.5 Imp qt)
The oil quantity indicated above is only a

guideline. The necessary quantity of oil
depends on the quantity of oil that has
been drained. The quantity of drained oil
differs slightly depending on the temperature of the oil and the time the oil is left
flowing out. After pouring oil into the
engine, therefore, you must use the level
gauge to confirm that the level is correct.
13. Start the engine and make sure that no
oil leaks appear around the filters rubber
seal.
14. Run the engine until it reaches the
11-17
normal operating temperature. Then stop

the engine and wait a few minutes to allow
the oil drain back. Check the oil level
again and if necessary, add more engine
oil.
CAUTION
Be careful not to spill engine oil
when adding it. If oil touches the
smell, smoke, and/or a fire.
& Recommended grade and

viscosity
Oil grade:
API classification SM or SL with the
words ENERGY CONSERVING (if you
cannot obtain the oil with the SM or SL
grade, you may use SJ grade oil.)
or ACEA specification A1, A3 or A5
or ILSAC specification GF-3 or GF-4
API Service label

1) Indicates the oil quality by API designations
2) Indicates the SAE oil viscosity grade
3) Indicates that the oil has fuel saving
capabilities
11
ILSAC Certification Mark (Starburst Mark)

CONTINUED
Black plate (334,1)
11-18
In choosing an oil, you want the proper

quality and viscosity, as well as one that
will add to fuel economy. The following
tables list the recommended viscosities
and applicable temperatures.
When adding oil, different brands may be
used together as long as they are the
same API classification and SAE viscosity
as those recommended by SUBARU.

viscosity under severe driving conditions
2.5 L models
If the vehicle is used in desert areas, in

areas with very high temperatures, or
used for heavy-duty applications such as
towing a trailer, use of oil with the following
grade and viscosities is recommended.
2.0 L models
API classification SM or SL:

SAE viscosity No.:
30, 40, 10W-50, 20W-40, 20W-50
SAE viscosity No. and applicable temperature
*: 5W-30 is recommended.
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects fuel

economy. Oils of lower viscosity provide
better fuel economy. However, in hot
weather, oil of higher viscosity is required
to properly lubricate the engine.
*: 0W-20 is recommended.
CAUTION
Use only engine oil with the recommended grade and viscosity.
Black plate (335,1)
Cooling system
WARNING
shut off and has cooled down
completely. Since the coolant is
under pressure, you may suffer
serious burns from a spray of boiling hot coolant when the cap is
removed.
CAUTION
. The cooling system has been
filled at the factory with a high
quality, corrosion-inhibiting,
year-around coolant which provides protection against freezing
down to 368C (338F). Make
sure to always use genuine
SUBARU coolant or an equivalent (non-amine type coolant).
. If the coolant requires water dilution, be sure to use soft water (or
clear and drinkable water) and to
follow the required dilution ratio.
. Mixing with a different coolant
and/or hard water may result in
problems including, but not limited to, shortened engine component lift, cooling system clogging, coolant leaks and engine
damage from overheating. Therefore, never mix different kinds of
coolant and/or hard water even if
freezing temperatures are not
expected.
. Do not splash the engine coolant
over painted parts. The alcohol
contained in the engine coolant
may damage the paint surface.
11-19
cooling system. It is recommended that

the cooling system and connections be
checked for leaks, damage, or looseness.
& Engine coolant

! Checking the coolant level
& Cooling fan, hose and connections

Your vehicle employs an electric cooling
fan which is thermostatically controlled to
operate when the engine coolant reaches
a specific temperature.
If the radiator cooling fan does not operate
even when the engine coolant temperature gauge exceeds the normal operating
range, the cooling fan circuit may be
defective. Check the fuse and replace it
if necessary. If the fuse is not blown, we
recommend that you have the cooling
system checked by your SUBARU dealer.
If frequent addition of coolant is necessary, there may be a leak in the engine
1)
2)
FULL level mark

LOW level mark
Check the coolant level at each fuel stop.

1. Check the coolant level on the outside
of the reservoir while the engine is cool.
2. If the level is close to or lower than the
LOW level mark, add coolant up to the
FULL level mark. If the reserve tank is
empty, remove the radiator cap and refill
as required.
CONTINUED
11
Black plate (336,1)
11-20
! Changing the coolant
WARNING
shut off and has cooled down
completely. Since the coolant is
under pressure, you may suffer
serious burns from a spray of boiling hot coolant when the cap is
removed.
3. After refilling the reserve tank and the
radiator, reinstall the caps and check that
the rubber gaskets inside the radiator cap
are in the proper position.
Change the engine coolant using the

following procedures according to the
maintenance schedule.
1. Remove the under cover.
CAUTION
. Be careful not to spill engine
coolant when adding it. If coolant
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
a fire. If engine coolant gets on
the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe
it off.
drain plug and loosen the drain plug.

3. Loosen the radiator cap to drain the
coolant from the radiator. Then drain the
coolant from the reserve tank. Tighten the
drain plug securely.
4. Install the under cover.
Non-turbo models
1) Fill up to this level
1)
Drain plug
2. Place a proper container under the
Black plate (337,1)
Guideline of coolant quantity (including

coolant in reservoir tank):
2.0 L models:
MT: 6.9 liters (7.3 US qt, 6.1 Imp qt)
AT: 7.3 liters (7.7 US qt, 6.4 Imp qt)
2.5 L non-turbo models:
2.5 L turbo models:
Turbo models
1) Fill up to this level
11-21
CAUTION
. Be careful not to spill engine
coolant when adding it. If coolant
a fire. If engine coolant gets on
it off.
5. Slowly pour the coolant and fill to the

radiator filler neck. Do not pour the coolant
too quickly, as this may lead to insufficient
air bleeding and trapped air in the system.
11
1)
2)
FULL level mark

LOW level mark
6. Pour the coolant and fill to the reservoir tanks FULL level mark.
7. Put the radiator cap back on and

tighten firmly. At this time, make sure that
the rubber gasket in the radiator cap is
correctly in place.
8. Start and run the engine for more than
CONTINUED
Black plate (338,1)
11-22
5 minutes at 2,000 to 3,000 rpm.

9. Stop the engine and wait until the
coolant cools down [50 to 608C (122 to
1408F)]. If there is any loss of coolant, add
coolant to the radiators filler neck and to
the reserve tanks FULL level.
10. Put the radiator cap and reservoir cap
back on and tighten firmly.
Air cleaner element

The air cleaner element functions as a
filter screen. When the element is perforated or removed, engine wear will be
excessive and engine life shortened.
& Replacing the air cleaner

element
! Non-turbo models
It is unnecessary to clean or wash the

element.
WARNING
air cleaner element removed. The air
cleaner element not only filters
intake air but also stops flames if
the engine backfires. If the air
cleaner element is not installed
when the engine backfires, you
could be burned.
CAUTION
When replacing the air cleaner element, we recommend that you use a
genuine SUBARU air cleaner element. If it is not used, there is the
possibility of causing a negative
effect to the engine.
1)
2)
3)
4)
Connector
Clamp
Air intake boot
Clip
1. Unplug the connector that is attached

to the top of the air cleaner case.
2. Loosen the screw of the clamp and
pull the air intake boot out of the air
cleaner case.
3. Unsnap the two clips holding the air
cleaner case cover.
Black plate (339,1)
11-23
insert the three projections on the air

cleaner case cover into the slits on the
air cleaner case and then snap the two
clips on the air cleaner case cover.
! Turbo models
4. Open the air cleaner case cover and

remove the air cleaner element.
5. Clean the inside of the air cleaner
cover and case with a damp cloth and
install a new air cleaner element.
2. Unplug the connector that is attached

to the top of the air cleaner case.
1. Use a screwdriver to undo the clips on

the air intake duct, then remove the air
intake duct.
11
3. Unsnap the two clips holding the air

cleaner case cover.
6. To install the air cleaner case cover,
CONTINUED
Black plate (340,1)
11-24
& Recommended spark plugs
Spark plugs
2.0 L models:
SILFR6A11 (NGK)
2.5 L non-turbo models:
PFR5B-11 (NGK)
2.5 L turbo models:
SILFR6A (NGK)
4. Open the air cleaner case cover and

remove the air cleaner element.
5. Clean the inside of the air cleaner
cover and case with a damp cloth and
install a new air cleaner element.
Replace the spark plugs according to the

maintenance schedule.
CAUTION
. When disconnecting the spark
plug cables, always grasp the
spark plug cap, not the cables.
. Make sure the spark plug cables
are replaced in the correct order.
Black plate (341,1)
11-25
front side belt is loose, cracked, or worn,

SUBARU dealer.
Drive belts
mm (in)
Deflection
2.0
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
A)
L models
Front side belt
Alternator
Air conditioner compressor pulley
Rear side belt
Crank pulley
98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbf)
Except 2.0 L models

1) Power steering pump pulley
2) Front side belt
3) Alternator
4) Air conditioner compressor pulley
5) Rear side belt
6) Crank pulley
A) 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbf)
New belt
Used belt
7.0 9.0
(0.28 0.35)
9.0 11.0
(0.35 0.43)
The rear side belt is a stretch-type belt,

therefore the deflection and tension do not
need to be checked. If there are cracks or
wear confirmed on the belts and a
squeaking sound is heard from them, we
SUBARU dealer.
The alternator, power steering pump, and

air conditioner compressor depend on
drive belts. Satisfactory performance requires that belt tension be correct.
11
To check the tension of the front side belt,

place a straightedge (ruler) across two
adjacent pulleys (alternator and crank
pulley) and apply a force of 98 N (10 kgf,
22 lbf) midway between the pulleys by
using a spring scale. Belt deflection
should be the amount specified. If the
Black plate (342,1)
11-26
Manual transmission oil

Turbo model
Non-turbo model
1) Yellow handle
Check the oil level monthly.

stop the engine.
1)
2)
Upper level
Lower level

lower level, add oil through the level
gauge hole to bring the level up to the
upper level.
CAUTION
Be careful not to spill manual transmission oil when adding it. If oil
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a
fire. If oil gets on the exhaust pipe,
be sure to wipe it off.
Black plate (343,1)

viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own base
oils and additives. Never use different
brands together.
Oil grade:
API classification GL-5

& Checking the fluid level
The automatic transmission fluid expands
largely as its temperature rises; the fluid
level differs according to fluid temperature.
Therefore, there are two different scales
for checking the level of hot fluid and cold
fluid on the level gauge.
Though the fluid level can be checked
without warming up the fluid on the
COLD range, it is recommended to
check the fluid level when the fluid is at
the operating temperature.
11-27
! Checking the fluid level when the

fluid is hot
Check the fluid level monthly.
1. Drive the vehicle several kilometers
(miles) to raise the temperature of the
transmission fluid up to normal operating
temperature; 70 to 808C (158 to 1768F) is
normal.
set the parking brake.
3. First shift the selector lever in each
position. Then shift it in the P position,
and run the engine at idling speed.
1)
Yellow handle
11
1)
2)
3)
4)
HOT range
COLD range
Upper level
Lower level
CONTINUED
Black plate (344,1)
11-28
4. Pull out the level gauge and check the

fluid level on the gauge. If it is below the
lower level on the HOT range, add the
recommended automatic transmission
fluid up to the upper level.
! Checking the fluid level when the
fluid is cold
When the fluid level has to be checked
without time to warm up the automatic
transmission, check to see that the fluid
level is between the lower level and upper
level on the COLD range. If it is below
that range, add fluid up to the upper level.
Be careful not to overfill.
CAUTION
Be careful not to spill automatic
transmission fluid when adding it.
If automatic transmission fluid
fire. If automatic transmission fluid
gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to
wipe it off.
& Recommended fluid

Use one of the following types of automatic transmission fluid.
SUBARU ATF type HP
IDEMITSU ATF HP
Front differential gear oil (AT

vehicles)
CAUTION
You can use the Dexron III type
automatic transmission fluid only in
an emergency if the recommended
automatic transmission fluid is unavailable. However, if the Dexron III
is used continuously, there will be a
noticeable increase in the vibration
and noise from the automatic transmission. If Dexron III fluid is used
temporarily, change the fluid to the
recommended automatic transmission fluid as soon as possible.
1)
Yellow handle
Check the differential oil level monthly.

stop the engine.
Black plate (345,1)
11-29

viscosity
Rear differential gear oil

(AWD vehicles)

brands together.
& Checking the gear oil level
Oil grade:
1)
2)
Upper level
Lower level

lower level, add oil to bring the level up to
the upper level.
1)
2)
Filler plug
Drain plug
CAUTION
Be careful not to spill front differential gear oil when adding it. If oil
fire. If oil gets on the exhaust pipe,
be sure to wipe it off.
11
CONTINUED
Black plate (346,1)
11-30
2.0
1)
2)
3)
1)
2)
L AT models
Filler hole
Drain hole
Oil level
Oil temperature switch

Drain plug
Vehicle with rear differential oil temperature switch

1) Oil temperature switch
2) Drain hole
3) Oil level
1)
2)
Filler plug
Drain plug
Other models
1) Filler hole
2) Drain hole
3) Oil level
Black plate (347,1)
Remove the plug or the oil temperature

switch from the filler hole and check the oil
level. The oil level should be kept even
with the bottom of the filler hole. If the oil
level is below the bottom edge of the hole,
add oil through the filler hole to raise the
level.
CAUTION
. Be careful not to spill rear differential gear oil when adding it. If
rear differential gear oil touches
the exhaust pipe, it may cause a
bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If
rear differential gear oil gets on
it off.
. If the vehicle requires frequent
refilling, there may be an oil leak.
If you suspect a problem, we
vehicle checked at your SUBARU
dealer.
11-31

viscosity
Power steering fluid (if

equipped)

brands together.
Oil grade:
The power steering fluid expands greatly

as its temperature rises; the fluid level
differs according to fluid temperature.
Therefore, the reservoir tank has two
different checking ranges for hot and cold
fluids.
Check the power steering fluid level
monthly.
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface,
and stop the engine.
CONTINUED
11
Black plate (348,1)
11-32
WARNING
Be careful not to burn yourself
because the fluid may be hot.
CAUTION
2. Check the fluid level of the reservoir

tank.
When the fluid is hot after the vehicle has
been run: Check that the oil level is
between HOT MIN and HOT MAX on
the surface of the reservoir tank.
When the fluid is cool before the vehicle is
run: Check that the oil level is between
COLD MIN and COLD MAX on the
surface of the reservoir tank.
3. If the fluid level is lower than the
applicable MIN line, add the recommended fluid as necessary to bring the
level between the MIN and MAX line.
. When power steering fluid is

being added, use only clean fluid,
and be careful not to allow any
dirt into the tank. And never use
different brands together.
. Avoid spilling fluid when adding
it in the tank.
. Be careful not to spill power
steering fluid when adding it. If
power steering fluid touches the
smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If
power steering fluid gets on the
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it
off.
& Recommended fluid

Use one of the following types of automatic transmission fluid.
SUBARU ATF type HP
IDEMITSU ATF HP
Dexron III Type Automatic Transmission Fluid
If the fluid level is extremely low, it may

indicate possible leakage. We recommend that you consult your SUBARU
dealer for an inspection.
Black plate (349,1)
Brake fluid
clean water. For safety, when

performing this work, wearing
eye protection is advisable.
. Brake fluid absorbs moisture
from the air. Any absorbed moisture can cause a dangerous loss
of braking performance.
refilling, there may be a leak. If
you suspect a problem, we recommend that you have the
dealer.
11-33

off.
& Recommended brake fluid

FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 brake fluid
CAUTION
1)
2)
MAX level mark

MIN level mark
Check the fluid level monthly.

Check the fluid level on the outside of the
reservoir. If the level is below MIN, add
the recommended brake fluid to MAX.
Use only brake fluid from a sealed
container.
WARNING
. Never let brake fluid contact your
eyes because brake fluid can be
harmful to your eyes. If brake
fluid gets in your eyes, immediately flush them thoroughly with
. Never use different brands of

brake fluid together.
. When adding brake fluid, be careful not to allow any dirt into the
reservoir.
. Never splash the brake fluid over
painted surfaces or rubber parts.
Alcohol contained in the brake
fluid may damage them.
. Be careful not to spill brake fluid
when adding it. If brake fluid
a fire. If brake fluid gets on the
11
Black plate (350,1)
11-34
Clutch fluid (MT vehicles)

Check the fluid level on the outside of the

reservoir. If the level is below MIN level
mark, add the recommended clutch fluid
to MAX level mark.
Use only clutch fluid from a sealed
container.
WARNING
advisable.
CAUTION
. Clutch fluid absorbs moisture
from the air. Any absorbed moisture can cause improper clutch
operation.
refilling, there may be a leak. If
you suspect a problem, we recommend that you have the
dealer.
. Never use different brands of
clutch fluid together.
. When clutch fluid is added, be
careful not to allow any dirt into
the tank.
. Never splash the clutch fluid over
painted surfaces or rubber parts.
Alcohol contained in the clutch
fluid may damage them.
. Be careful not to spill clutch fluid

when adding it. If clutch fluid
a fire. If clutch fluid gets on the
off.
& Recommended clutch fluid

FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 brake fluid
Never let clutch fluid contact your

eyes because clutch fluid can be
harmful to your eyes. If clutch fluid
gets in your eyes, immediately flush
them thoroughly with clean water.
For safety, when performing this
work, wearing eye protection is
Black plate (351,1)
Brake booster
If the brake booster does not operate as
described in the following, we recommend
that you have it checked by your SUBARU
dealer.
1. With the engine off, depress the brake
pedal several times, applying the same
pedal force each time. The distance the
pedal travels should not vary.
2. With the brake pedal depressed, start
the engine. The pedal should move
slightly down to the floor.
3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop
the engine and keep the pedal depressed
for 30 seconds. The pedal height should
not change.
4. Start the engine again and run for
approximately 1 minute then turn it off.
Depress the brake pedal several times to
check the brake booster. The brake
booster operates properly if the pedal
stroke decreases with each depression.
NOTE
For vehicles equipped with the brake
assist system, when you depress the
brake pedal strongly or suddenly, the
following phenomena occur. However,
even though these occur, they do not
indicate any malfunctions, and the
brake assist system is operating properly.

. You might feel that the brake pedal
is applied by lighter force and generates a greater braking force.
. You might hear clicking (knocking)
sounds around brake pedal.
Brake assist is not a system that brings
more braking ability to the vehicle
beyond its breaking capability.
11-35
Brake pedal
Check the brake pedal free play and
reserve distance according to the maintenance schedule.
& Checking the brake pedal

free play
1)
0.5 2.0 mm (0.02 0.08 in)
Stop the engine and firmly depress the

brake pedal several times. Then, check
the amount of free play by pulling up the
brake pedal with a force of less than 10 N
(1 kgf, 2 lbf).
If the free play is not within proper
specification, we recommend that you
CONTINUED
11
Black plate (352,1)
11-36
& Checking the brake pedal

reserve distance
Clutch pedal (MT vehicles)
& Checking the clutch pedal

free play
Check the clutch pedal free play and

reserve distance according to the maintenance schedule.
& Checking the clutch function
1)
Left-hand drive vehicles:

More than 65 mm (2.56 in)
Right-hand drive vehicles:
More than 85 mm (3.35 in)
Depress the pedal with a force of approximately 294 N (30 kgf, 66 lbf) and measure
the distance between the upper surface of
the pedal pad and the floor.
When the measurement is smaller than
the specification, or when the pedal does
not operate smoothly, we recommend that
you contact with your SUBARU dealer.
Check the clutch engagement and disengagement.

1. With the engine idling, check that there
are no abnormal noises when the clutch
pedal is depressed, and that shifting into
1st or reverse feels smooth.
2. Start the vehicle by releasing the pedal
slowly to check that the engine and
transmission smoothly couple without
any sign of slippage.
1)
4.0 13.0 mm (0.16 0.51 in)
Lightly press the clutch pedal down with

your finger until you feel resistance, and
check the free play.
If the free play is not within proper
specification, we recommend that you
Black plate (353,1)
Replacement of brake pad

and lining
result in the need for costly brake

rotor repair or replacement.
& Breaking-in of new brake

pads and linings
When replacing the brake pad or lining,
we recommend that you use only genuine
SUBARU parts. After replacement, the
new parts must be broken in as follows:
The right front disc brake and the right rear

disc brake have audible wear indicators
on the brake pads. If the brake pads wear
close to their service limit, the wear
indicator makes a very audible scraping
noise when the brake pedal is applied.
If you hear this scraping noise each time
you apply the brake pedal, we recommend
that you have the brake pads serviced by
your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
CAUTION
If you continue to drive despite the
scraping noise from the audible
brake pad wear indicator, it will
! Brake pad and lining

While maintaining a speed of 50 to 65
km/h (30 to 40 mph), step on the brake
pedal lightly. Repeat this five or more
times.
! Parking brake lining
1. Drive the vehicle at a speed of
approximately 35 km/h (22 mph).
2. With the parking brake release button
pushed in, pull the parking brake lever
SLOWLY and GENTLY. [Pulling with a
force of approximately 147 N (15 kgf, 33
lbf).]
3. Drive the vehicle for approximately
200 meters (220 yards) in this condition.
4. Wait 5 to 10 minutes for the parking
brake to cool down. Repeat this procedure.
5. Check the parking brake stroke. If the
parking brake stroke is out of the specified
11-37
range, adjust it by turning the adjusting nut

located on the parking brake lever.
Parking brake stroke:
7 8 notches / 196 N (20 kgf, 44 lbf)
WARNING
A safe location and situation should
be selected for break-in driving.
CAUTION
Pulling the parking brake lever too
forcefully may cause the rear
wheels to lock. To avoid this, be
certain to pull the lever up slowly
and gently.
11
Black plate (354,1)
11-38
Parking brake stroke
Tires and wheels

& Types of tires
You should be familiar with type of tires
present on your vehicle.
Check the parking brake stroke according

to the maintenance schedule. When the
parking brake is properly adjusted, braking power is fully applied by pulling the
lever up seven to eight notches gently but
firmly (approximately 196 N, 20 kgf, 44
lbf). If the parking brake lever stroke is not
within the specified range, we recommend
that you have the brake system checked
and adjusted at your SUBARU dealer.
! All season tires

All season tires are designed to provide
an adequate measure of traction, handling
and braking performance in year-round
driving including snowy and icy road
conditions. However all season tires do
not offer as much traction performance as
winter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snow
or on icy roads.
All season tires are identified by ALL
SEASON and/or M+S (Mud & Snow) on
the tire sidewall.
! Summer tires
Summer tires are high-speed capability
tires best suited for highway driving under
dry conditions.
Summer tires are inadequate for driving
on slippery roads such as on snowcovered or icy roads.
If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered
or icy roads, we strongly recommend the
use of winter (snow) tires.
When installing winter tires, be sure to
replace all four tires.
! Winter (snow) tires

Winter tires are best suited for driving on
snow-covered and icy roads. However
winter tires do not perform as well as
summer tires and all season tires on roads
other than snow-covered and icy roads.
& Tire inspection

Check on a daily basis that the tires are
free from serious damage, nails, and
stones. At the same time, check the tires
for abnormal wear.
SUBARU dealer immediately if you find
any problem.
NOTE
. When the wheels and tires strike
curbs or are subjected to harsh treatment as when the vehicle is driven on a
rough surface, they can suffer damage
that cannot be seen with the naked eye.
This type of damage does not become
evident until time has passed. Try not
to drive over curbs, potholes or on
other rough surfaces. If doing so is
unavoidable, keep the vehicles speed
down to a walking pace or less, and
approach the curbs as squarely as
possible. Also, make sure the tires are
not pressed against the curb when you
park the vehicle.
Black plate (355,1)
. If you feel unusual vibration while

driving or find it difficult to steer the
vehicle in a straight line, one of the
tires and/or wheels may be damaged.
We recommend that you drive slowly to
the nearest authorized SUBARU dealer
and have the vehicle inspected.
& Tire pressures and wear

Maintaining the correct tire pressures
helps to maximize the tires service lives
and is essential for good running performance. Check and, if necessary, adjust
the pressure of each tire (including the
spare) at least once a month (for example,
during a fuel stop) and before any long
journey.
the tire pressures to the values shown on

the tire placard. The tire placard is located
on the door pillar on the drivers side.
Driving even a short distance warms up
the tires and increases the tire pressures.
Also, the tire pressures are affected by the
outside temperature. It is best to check tire
pressure outdoors before driving the
vehicle.
11-39
trollability and ride comfort, and they

cause the tires to wear abnormally.
. Correct tire pressure (tread worn
evenly)
When a tire becomes warm, the air inside

it expands, causing the tire pressure to
increase. Be careful not to mistakenly
release air from a warm tire to reduce its
pressure.
NOTE
. The air pressure in a tire increases
by approximately 30 kPa (0.3 kgf/cm2,
4.3 psi) when the tire becomes warm.
. The tires are considered cold when
the vehicle has been parked for at least
3 hours or has been driven less than
1.6 km (1 mile).
Roadholding is good, and steering is

responsive. Rolling resistance is low, so
fuel consumption is also lower.
11
WARNING
Do not let air out of warm tires to
adjust pressure. Doing so will result
in low tire pressure.
Check the tire pressures when the tires
are cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust
Incorrect tire pressures detract from con CONTINUED
Black plate (356,1)
11-40
. Abnormally low tire pressure (tread

worn at shoulders)
. Abnormally high tire pressure (tread

worn in center)
tread separation, and destruction of

the tires. The resulting loss of
accident.
& Wheel balance
Rolling resistance is high, so fuel consumption is also higher.
Ride comfort is poor. Also, the tire

magnifies the effects of road-surface
bumps and dips, possibly resulting in
vehicle damage.
If the tire placard shows tire pressures for
the vehicle when fully loaded and for the
vehicle when towing a trailer, adjust the
tire pressures to the values that match
current loading conditions.
WARNING
Driving at high speeds with excessively low tire pressures can cause
the tires to deform severely and to
rapidly become hot. A sharp increase in temperature could cause
Each wheel was correctly balanced when

your vehicle was new, but the wheels will
become unbalanced as the tires become
worn during use. Wheel imbalance causes
the steering wheel to vibrate slightly at
certain vehicle speeds and detracts from
the vehicles straight-line stability. It can
also cause steering and suspension system problems and abnormal tire wear. If
you suspect that the wheels are not
correctly balanced, we recommend that
you have them checked and adjusted by
your SUBARU dealer. Also have them
adjusted after tire repairs and after tire
rotation.
NOTE
Loss of correct wheel alignment*
causes the tires to wear on one side
and reduces the vehicles running
stability. We recommend that you contact your SUBARU dealer if you notice
abnormal tire wear.
*: The suspension system is designed to hold
each wheel at a certain alignment (relative to
Black plate (357,1)

the other wheels and to the road) for optimum
straight-line stability and cornering performance.
& Wear indicators
beyond the acceptable limit and

must be replaced immediately. With
a tire in this condition, driving at
high speeds in wet weather can
cause the vehicle to hydroplane.
The resulting loss of vehicle control
can lead to an accident.
11-41
specification, the tire rotation direction

mark is placed on its sidewall.
When you install a tire that has the tire
rotation direction mark, install the tire with
the direction mark facing forward.
& Tire rotation
NOTE
For safety, inspect tire tread regularly
and replace the tires before their tread
wear indicators become visible.
& Tire rotation direction mark
1)
2)
3)
New tread
Worn tread
Tread wear indicator
Vehicles equipped with 4 non-unidirectional tires

1) Front
Each tire incorporates a tread wear

indicator, which becomes visible when
the depth of the tread grooves decreases
to 1.6 mm (0.063 in). A tire must be
replaced when the tread wear indicator
appears as a solid band across the tread.
WARNING
When a tires tread wear indicator
becomes visible, the tire is worn
Example of tire rotation direction mark

1) Front
If the tire has the rotation direction

CONTINUED
11
Black plate (358,1)
11-42
& Tire replacement
Vehicles equipped with unidirectional tires

1) Front
Tire wear varies from wheel to wheel. To

maximize the life of each tire and ensure
that the tires wear uniformly, it is best to
rotate the tires every 10,000 km (6,200
miles). Move the tires to the positions
shown in the illustration each time they are
rotated.
Replace any damaged or unevenly worn
tire at the time of rotation. After tire
rotation, adjust the tire pressures and
make sure the wheel nuts are correctly
tightened.
After driving approximately 1,000 km (600
miles), check the wheel nuts again and
retighten any nut that has become loose.
The wheels and tires are important and

integral parts of your vehicles design;
they cannot be changed arbitrarily. The
tires fitted as standard equipment are
optimally matched to the characteristics
of the vehicle and were selected to give
the best possible combination of running
performance, ride comfort, and service
life. It is essential for every tire to have a
size and construction matching those
shown on the tire placard and to have a
speed symbol and load index matching
those shown on the tire placard.
Using tires of a non-specified size detracts
from controllability, ride comfort, braking
performance, speedometer accuracy and
odometer accuracy. It also creates incorrect body-to-tire clearances and inappropriately changes the vehicles ground
clearance.
WARNING
. All four tires must be the same in
terms of manufacturer, brand
(tread pattern), construction, degree of wear, speed symbol, load
index and size. Mixing tires of
different types, sizes or degrees
of wear can result in damage to
vehicles powertrain. Use of different types or sizes of tires can
also dangerously reduce controllability and braking performance and can lead to an accident.
. Use only radial tires. Do not use
radial tires together with belted
bias tires and/or bias-ply tires.
Doing so can dangerously reduce controllability, resulting in
an accident.
All four tires must be the same in terms of

manufacturer, brand (tread pattern), construction, and size. You are advised to
replace the tires with new ones that are
identical to those fitted as standard equipment.
For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU
recommends replacing all four tires at
the same time.
Black plate (359,1)
& Wheel replacement
& Wheel covers
When replacing wheels due, for example,

to damage, make sure the replacement
wheels match the specifications of the
wheels that are fitted as standard equipment. Replacement wheels are available
from SUBARU dealers.
! Removing the wheel cover
11-43
! Installing the wheel cover
WARNING
Use only those wheels that are
specified for your vehicle. Wheels
not meeting specifications could
interfere with brake caliper operation and may cause the tires to rub
against the wheel well housing during turns. The resulting loss of
accident.
NOTE
1)
2)
Notch
Valve hole
Align the valve with the valve hole in the

cover, then fit the cover on the wheel by
tapping your hand evenly around the
circumference of the cover.
Insert a lever into the notch part on the

opposite side of the valve hole to remove
the wheel cover.
When any of the wheels are removed

and replaced for tire rotation or to
change a flat tire, always check the
tightness of the wheel nuts after driving approximately 1,000 km (600 miles).
If any nut is loose, tighten it to the
specified torque.
11
Black plate (360,1)
11-44
Aluminum wheels (if

equipped)
Aluminum wheels can be scratched and
damaged easily. Handle them carefully to
maintain their appearance, performance,
and safety.
. When any of the wheels are removed
and replaced for tire rotation or to change
a flat, always check the tightness of the
wheel nuts after driving approximately
1,000 km (600 miles). If any nut is loose,
tighten it to the specified torque.
. Never apply oil to the threaded parts,
wheel nuts, or tapered surface of the
wheel.
. Never let the wheel rub against sharp
protrusions or curbs.
. Be sure to fit tire chains on uniformly
and completely around the tire, otherwise
the chains may scratch the wheel.
. When wheel nuts, balance weights, or
the center cap is replaced, we recommend
that you replace them with genuine
SUBARU parts designed for aluminum
wheels.
Windshield washer fluid
Washer fluid level gauge
If you spray washer fluid on the windshield

but the supply of washer fluid appears to
diminish, check the level of washer fluid in
the tank.
Remove the washer tank filler cap, then

check the fluid level indicated by the level
gauge (attached to the inside of the cap).
If the level is near the Low mark, add
fluid until it reaches the Hi level on the
Black plate (361,1)
level gauge or the FULL mark on the

tank.
Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield
washer fluid is unavailable use clean
water.
In areas where water freezes in winter,
use an anti-freeze type windshield washer
fluid. SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid
contains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%
surfactant, by volume. Its freezing temperature varies according to how much it
is diluted, as indicated in the following
table.
Washer Fluid
Concentration
Freezing
Temperature
30%
128C (10.48F)
50%
208C (48F)
100%
458C (498F)
In order to prevent freezing of washer

fluid, check the freezing temperatures in
the table above when adjusting the fluid
concentration to the outside temperature.
If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with
a different concentration from the one
used previously, purge the old fluid from
the piping between the reservoir tank and
washer nozzles by operating the washer
for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if
the concentration of the fluid remaining in
the piping is too low for the outside

temperature, it may freeze and block the
nozzles.
CAUTION
. Adjust the washer fluid concentration appropriately for the outside temperature. If the concentration is inappropriate, sprayed
washer fluid may freeze on the
windshield and obstruct your
view, and the fluid may freeze in
the reservoir tank.
. Never use engine coolant as
washer fluid because it could
cause paint damage.
11-45
Replacement of wiper blades

Grease, wax, insects, or other material on
the windshield or the wiper blade results in
jerky wiper operation and streaking on the
glass. If you cannot remove the streaks
after operating the windshield washer or if
the wiper operation is jerky, clean the
outer surface of the windshield (or rear
window) and the wiper blades using a
sponge or soft cloth with a neutral
detergent or mild-abrasive cleaner. After
cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper
blades with clean water. The windshield is
clean if beads do not form when you rinse
the windshield with water.
CAUTION
Do not clean the wiper blades with
gasoline or a solvent, such as paint
thinner or benzine. This will cause
deterioration of the wiper blades.
If you cannot eliminate the streaking even
after following this method, replace the
wiper blades using the following procedures.
CONTINUED
11
Black plate (362,1)
11-46
& Windshield wiper blade assembly
& Windshield wiper blade rubber
1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.
1)
1)
1)
2)
Open the cover

Pull down the wiper blade
2. Remove the wiper blade assembly by

opening the cover and pulling it down in
the direction shown in the illustration.
3. Install the wiper blade assembly to the
wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.
4. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly
lower it in position.
Support
1. Grasp the locked end of the blade

rubber assembly and pull it firmly until the
stoppers on the rubber are free of the
support.
Metal spines
2. If the new blade rubber is not provided

with two metal spines, remove the metal
spines from the old blade rubber and
install them in the new blade rubber.
3. Align the claws of the support with the
Black plate (363,1)
grooves in the rubber and slide the blade

rubber assembly into the support until it
locks.
1)
1)
& Rear window wiper blade

assembly
1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear
window.
Claw
Stopper
4. Be sure to position the claws at the

end of the support between the stoppers
on the rubber as shown. If the rubber is
not retained properly, the wiper blade may
scratch the windshield.
11-47
2. Turn the wiper blade assembly counterclockwise.
3. Pull the wiper blade assembly toward

you to remove it from the wiper arm.
4. Install the wiper blade assembly to the
wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.
5. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly
lower it in position.
11
CONTINUED
Black plate (364,1)
11-48
& Rear window wiper blade

rubber
install them in the new blade rubber.
2. Pull the blade rubber assembly out of

the plastic support.
1. Pull out the end of the blade rubber
assembly to unlock it from the plastic
support.
1)
4. Align the claws of the plastic support

with the grooves in the blade rubber
assembly, then slide the blade rubber
assembly into place.
Metal spines
3. If the new blade rubber is not provided

with two metal spines, remove the metal
spines from the old blade rubber and
Securely retain both ends of the rubber
Black plate (365,1)
with the stoppers on the plastic support

ends. If the rubber is not retained properly,
the wiper may scratch the rear window
glass.
Battery
& Battery Precautions!
WARNING
Read these instructions carefully:
To ensure safe and correct handling
of your battery, read the following
precautions carefully before using
the battery or inspecting it.
Wear eye protection:
Always wear eye protection when
working near your vehicles battery.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid,
so it can cause blindness if
splashed into your eyes. Also, batteries emit highly flammable, explosive hydrogen gas. Eye protection is
vital for protection in the event that
this gas ignites.
acid:
Since battery fluid contains sulfuric
acid, be sure to wear eye protection
11-49
and protective gloves when inspecting your vehicles battery. Avoid

tipping the battery and subjecting it
to shocks since this could cause
fluid to spill.
Under no circumstances allow battery fluid to make contact with your
skin, eyes, or clothing since this can
cause blindness and burns. If battery fluid splashes onto your skin,
eyes or clothing, wash it away
immediately with plenty of water. If
battery fluid splashes into your
eyes, seek medical attention immediately.
If battery fluid is accidentally swallowed, immediately drink a large
amount of milk or water, and seek
medical attention immediately.
Battery fluid is corrosive. If it
splashes onto your vehicles paintwork or fabrics, wash it away immediately with plenty of water.
Keep children away:
Batteries must be handled only by
persons who are aware of the potential hazards. Take particular care
to keep children away from your
vehicles battery. Improper handling
CONTINUED
11
Black plate (366,1)
11-50
can cause blindness and burns.

Keep flames away:
Before working on or near your
vehicles battery, extinguish all cigarettes, matches, and lighters.
Also, keep the battery away from
flammable items and electrical
sparks. Since batteries emit highly
flammable, explosive hydrogen gas,
any flames or sparks in the vicinity
could cause an explosion.
When working near your vehicles
battery, take care that metal tools do
not short-circuit the batterys (+) and
() terminals or connect the batterys (+) terminal to the vehicles
body. A short circuit could create
electrical sparks and lead to an
explosion.
To prevent electrical sparks, all
rings, wristwatches, and other metal
accessories must be taken off before work is carried out on or near
the battery.
gen gas. To prevent an explosion,

charge your vehicles battery in a
well ventilated area and keep flames
away.
1)
2)
3)
CAUTION
Never use more than 10 amperes
when charging the battery because
it will shorten battery life.
Cap
Upper level
Lower level
It is unnecessary to periodically check the

battery fluid level or periodically refill with
distilled water.
However, if the battery fluid level is below
the lower level, remove the cap. Fill to the
upper level with distilled water.
Prevent explosions:
While being charged, batteries emit
highly flammable, explosive hydro-
Black plate (367,1)
11-51
Fuses
CAUTION
Never replace a fuse with one having a higher rating or with material
other than a fuse because serious
damage or a fire could result.
The fuses are designed to melt during an
overload to prevent damage to the wiring
harness and electrical equipment. The
fuses are located in two fuse boxes.
The other one is housed in the engine

compartment.
The fuse puller is stored in the main fuse

box in the engine compartment.
11
One is located under the instrument panel
behind the fuse box cover on the drivers
seat side. To remove the cover, pull it out.
The spare fuses are stored in the main

fuse box cover in the engine compartment.
1)
2)
Good
Blown
If any lights, accessories or other electrical

controls do not operate, inspect the
CONTINUED
Black plate (368,1)
11-52
corresponding fuse. If a fuse has blown,

replace it.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
position and turn off all electrical accessories.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Determine which fuse may be blown.
The back side of each fuse box cover and
the Fuses and circuits section in chapter
12 in this manual show the circuit for each
fuse.
SUBARU dealer for repairs.
Main fuse
Main fuse box
4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller.

5. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown,
replace it with a spare fuse of the same
rating.
6. If the same fuse blows again, this
indicates that its system has a problem.
The main fuses are designed to melt

during an overload to prevent damage to
the wiring harness and electrical equipment. Check the main fuses if any
electrical component fails to operate (except the starter motor) and other fuses are
good. A melted main fuse must be
replaced. Use only replacements with the
same specified rating as the melted main
fuse. If a main fuse blows after it is
replaced, we recommend that you have
the electrical system checked by your
Black plate (369,1)
11-53
Installation of accessories
your SUBARU dealer before installing fog
lights or any other electrical equipment in
your vehicle. Such accessories may
cause the electronic system to malfunction if they are incorrectly installed or if
they are not suited for the vehicle.
Also, we recommend that you always
consult your SUBARU dealer before
installing a radio in your vehicle.
11
Black plate (370,1)
11-54
Replacing bulbs
A: The high mount stop light is the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type. We recommend that you consult your SUBARU dealer for
replacement.
Black plate (371,1)
Wattage
Bulb No.
1)
High beam headlight
12V-60W
HB3
2)
Position light
12V-5W
W5W
3)
Low beam headlight

Vehicles with HID light
12V-35W
D2R
Vehicles without HID light
12V-55W
H7
4)
Map light
12V-8W
5)
Dome light
12V-8W
6)
Front fog light
12V-51W
HB4
7)
Front turn signal light
12V-21W
WY21W
8)
Side turn signal light
12V-5W
9)
Door step light
10)
Cargo area light
12V-8W
12V-13W
12V-21/5W
12V-21W
W21/5W
WY21W
11)
Brake/tail light
12)
Rear turn signal light
13)
Back-up/rear fog light
12V-21W
W21W
14)
Licence plate light
12V-5W
W5W
11-55
CAUTION
Replace any bulb only with a new
bulb of the specified wattage. Using
a bulb of different wattage could
result in a fire.
& Headlights (vehicles with HID

headlights)
WARNING
High-intensity-discharge (HID) bulbs
are used for the low beams of the
headlights. These HID bulbs use an
extremely high voltage. To avoid the
risk of an electric shock and resulting serious injury, you should not
attempt to replace them. Neither
should you attempt to replace the
high-beam bulbs, remove/refit the
headlight assemblies, or remove
any headlight-assembly components. For replacement of the headlight bulbs (low-beam and highbeam), removal and installation of
the headlight assemblies, and removal of headlight-assembly components, we recommend that you
CONTINUED
11
Black plate (372,1)
11-56
& Headlights (vehicles without

HID headlights)
! Low beam light bulbs
CAUTION
Halogen headlight bulbs become
very hot while in use. If you touch
the bulb surface with bare hands or
greasy gloves, fingerprints or
grease on the bulb surface will
develop into hot spots, causing the
bulb to break. If there are finger
prints or grease on the bulb surface,
wipe them away with a soft cloth
moistened with alcohol.
NOTE
. If headlight aiming is required, we
recommend that you consult your
SUBARU dealer for proper adjustment
of the headlight aim.
. It may be difficult to replace the
bulbs. We recommend that you have
the bulbs replaced by your SUBARU
dealer if necessary.
2. Use a screwdriver to remove the

secured clip of the washer tank. To make
it easy to access the bulb, move the
washer tank to the horizontal direction.
(left-hand side)
Right-hand side

intake duct. (right-hand side)
3. Remove the bulb cover, by turning it

counterclockwise.
Left-hand side
Black plate (373,1)
11-57
8. Install the bulb cover.

9. Install the air intake duct with clips.
(right-hand side)
10. Set the washer tank to the original
place and secure it by clip. (left-hand side)
! High beam light bulbs
4. Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector

from the bulb.
Right-hand side

intake duct. (right-hand side)
5. Remove the retainer spring.

6. Replace the bulb, then set the retainer
spring securely.
7. Reconnect the electrical connector.
11
3. Remove the bulb from the headlight

assembly by turning it counterclockwise.
4. Replace the bulb with new one. At this
time, use care not to touch the bulb
CONTINUED
Black plate (374,1)
11-58
& Rear combination lights
surface.
5. Reconnect the electrical connector.
6. To install the bulb to the headlight
assembly, turn it clockwise until it clicks.
7. Install the air intake duct with clips.
(right-hand side)
& Front position light and front

turn signal light
1. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise

and pull out the socket.
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a
new bulb.
3. Install the bulb socket by turning it
clockwise.
1. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove

the upper and lower screws that secure
the rear combination light assembly.
& Side turn signal light

The bulb is an integral part of the side turn
signal light assembly. If the bulb fails, the
whole side turn signal light assembly must
be replaced. We recommend that you
have the side turn signal light assembly
replaced by your SUBARU dealer if
necessary.
2. Slide the rear combination light as-
Black plate (375,1)
& License plate light
sembly rearward and remove it from the

vehicle.
1)
2)
3)
Brake/tail light
Back-up light
11-59
6. Put the rear combination light assembly into place while aligning the clip with
the guide on the vehicle.
3. Remove the bulb socket from the rear

combination light assembly by turning it
counterclockwise.
4. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and
replace it with a new one.
5. Set the bulb socket into the rear
combination light assembly and turn it
clockwise until it locks.
1. Remove the mounting screws using a

Phillips screwdriver.
2. Remove the cover and lens.
new bulb.
4. Reinstall the lens and cover.
5. Tighten the mounting screws.
11
7. Tighten the upper and lower screws.
CONTINUED
Black plate (376,1)
11-60
& Dome light, map light, cargo

area light and door step light
CAUTION
When the door is opened, the map
light illuminates and becomes very
hot. When replacing the bulb of the
map light, close the door and be
careful not to burn yourself.
Map light
Door step light
1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of

the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.
new bulb.
3. Reinstall the lens.
& Other bulbs

Other bulbs may be difficult to replace.
We recommend that you have the bulbs
replaced by your SUBARU dealer if
necessary.
Dome light
Cargo area light
Black plate (23,1)
Specifications
Specifications .....................................................
12-2
Fuses and circuits .............................................
Dimensions........................................................
Engine ...............................................................
Electrical system................................................
Capacities ..........................................................
Tires ..................................................................
Wheel alignment ................................................
12-2
12-3
12-4
12-5
12-5
12-6
Fuse panel located in the passenger

compartment ...................................................
Fuse panel located in the engine
compartment ...................................................
Bulb chart.........................................................
Vehicle identification .......................................
12-7
12-7
12-9
12-10
12-11
12
Black plate (380,1)
12-2
Specifications
Specifications
These specifications are subject to change without notice.
& Dimensions
mm (in)
Item
2.0 L models
Drive system
Transmission type
AT
2.0X
2.0X-S
2.5X
2.5X-S
2.5XT
AWD
AWD
AWD
AWD
D/R
AT
D/R
AT
D/R
AT
D/R
AT
MT
4,560 (179.5)
Australia models
1,795 (70.7)
Other models
1,780 (70.1)
Overall height
1,700 (66.9)
Wheel base
2,615 (103.0)
Tread
2.5 L turbo models
AWD
Overall length
Overall width
Front
1,530 (60.2)
Rear
Ground clearance*1
1,530 (60.2)
215 (8.5)
220 (8.7)
225 (8.9)
*1
: Measured with vehicle empty

MT: Manual transmission
D/R: Dual-range manual transmission
AWD: All-Wheel Drive
Black plate (381,1)
Specifications
12-3
& Engine
Engine model
Engine type
EJ204
(2.0 L, DOHC, non-turbo)
EJ253
(2.5 L, SOHC, non-turbo)
EJ255
(2.5 L, DOHC, turbo)
Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder, 4-stroke gasoline engine
Displacement cc (cu-in)
1,994 (121.7)
2,457 (150)
2,457 (150)
Bore 6 Stroke mm (in)
92.0 6 75.0
(3.62 6 2.95)
99.5 6 79.0
(3.92 6 3.11)
99.5 6 79.0
(3.92 6 3.11)
10.0 : 1
8.4 : 1
Compression ratio
Firing order
10.2 : 1
1324
12
CONTINUED
Black plate (382,1)
12-4
Specifications
& Electrical system

Battery type and capacity (5HR) Australia models
12V-48AH (55D23L)
Middle East models

Other models
12V-27AH (34B19L)
2.0 L models
2.5 L models
2.0 L models
Alternator

2.5 L turbo models
Spark plugs
MT
12V-48AH (55D23L)
AT
12V-52AH (65D23L)
MT
12V-48AH (55D23L)
AT
12V-52AH (75D23L)
12V-90A
12V-110A
2.0 L models
SILFR6A11 (NGK)
PFR5B-11 (NGK)
2.5 L turbo models
SILFR6A (NGK)

Black plate (383,1)
Specifications
12-5
& Capacities
Fuel tank
60 liters (15.9 US gal, 13.2 Imp gal)
Engine oil
Transmission oil (MT)
5-speed
5-speed with Dual range
Transmission oil (AT)
2.0 L models
2.5 L turbo models

Front differential gear oil (AT vehicles)
Rear differential gear oil
0.8 liter (0.8 US qt, 0.7 Imp qt)
AWD
Power steering fluid

Engine coolant
0.7 liter (0.7 US qt, 0.6 Imp qt)

2.0 L models
2.5 L turbo models
MT
AT
MT
AT
MT
AT

AWD: All-Wheel Drive
FWD: Front wheel drive
12
& Tires
See the tire pressure label located on the door pillar on the drivers side.
CONTINUED
Black plate (384,1)
12-6
Specifications
& Wheel alignment

2.0 L models
Item
Toe
Camber
2.0X

2.0X-S
2.5X
Front
0 mm (0 in)
Rear
0 mm (0 in)
Front
0800
Rear
0800
2.5X-S
2.5 L turbo models

2.5XT
Black plate (385,1)
Specifications
Fuses and circuits

& Fuse panel located in the passenger compartment
Fuse
panel
Fuse
rating
20A
Empty
3
4
12-7
Circuit
.
.
Rear fog light

Trailer
15A
Door locking
10A
Front wiper deicer relay
10A
Combination meter
7.5A
.
.
Remote control
view mirrors
Seat heater relay
rear
15A
.
.
Combination meter
Integrated unit
20A
Stop light
15A
Front wiper deicer
10
7.5A
Power supply (battery)
11
7.5A
.
.
Turn signal unit

Clock
12
15A
unit
Engine control unit
Integrated unit
.
.
13
20A
Accessory power outlet

(center console)
14
15A
.
.
.
Position light
Tail light
Rear combination light
CONTINUED
12
Black plate (386,1)
12-8
Specifications
Fuse
panel
Fuse
rating
15
Empty
16
10A
Fuse
panel
Fuse
rating
31
7.5A
Illumination
32
Empty
33
7.5A
Circuit
(FWD connector
AWD AT vehicles)
.
for
17
15A
Seat heaters
18
10A
Back-up light
19
Empty
20
10A
Accessory power outlet

(instrument panel)
21
7.5A
Starter relay
22
15A
.
.
Air conditioner
relay coil
23
15A
.
.
Rear wiper
Rear window washer
24
15A
.
.
Audio unit
Clock
25
15A
SRS airbag system
26
7.5A
.
.
.
Power window relay

Radiator main fan relay
Tail and illumination relay
27
15A
Blower fan
28
15A
Blower fan
29
15A
Fog light
30
30A
Front wiper
Circuit
.
.
Auto air conditioner unit

Integrated unit
ABS/Vehicle dynamics
control unit
Black plate (387,1)
Specifications
& Fuse panel located in the engine compartment
A)
Fuse
panel
Fuse
rating
30A
12-9
Circuit
.
.
ABS unit
Vehicle dynamics control unit
25A
Main fan
25A
Sub fan
Empty
10A
Audio
30A
Headlight (low beam)
15A
Headlight (high beam)
20A
Back-up light
15A
Horn
10
25A
.
.

Mirror heater
11
15A
Fuel pump
12
10A
control unit
13
7.5A
Engine control unit
14
15A
Turn and hazard warning flasher
15
15A
Tail and illumination relay
16
7.5A
Alternator
Main fuse
CONTINUED
12
Black plate (388,1)
12-10
Specifications
Bulb chart
Fuse
panel
Fuse
rating
17
15A
Headlight (right side)
Description
18
15A
Headlight (left side)
Headlight
Circuit
Wattage
Bulb type*
12V-35W
D2R
Low beam
Vehicles with HID headlights
Vehicles without HID headlights 12V-55W

High beam
H7
12V-60W
HB3
Front fog light
12V-51W
HB4
Front turn signal light
12V-21W
WY21W
Front position light
12V-5W
W5W
Side turn signal light
12V-5W
12V-21W
WY21W
Rear fog light
12V-21W
W21W
Back-up light
12V-21W
W21W
Brake/tail light
12V-21/5W
W21/5W
License plate light
12V-5W
Cargo area light
12V-13W
W5W
Dome light
12V-8W
Map light
12V-8W
Door step light
12V-8W
*: ECE specification
Black plate (389,1)
Specifications
Vehicle identification
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
12-11
Vehicle identification number

ID label (Europe models)
Tire inflation pressure label
Year of manufacture label (Middle East
models)
Model number label (General models)
Built date label (Australia models)
ADR compliance plate (Australia models)
Fuel label
12
Black plate (25,1)
Supplement
Year of manufacture (Middle East models
only) .................................................................
Speed limit, maximum torque and
maximum power at rpm
(Middle East models only) ..............................
Fuel consumption and CO2-emissions
(Europe only) ...................................................
13-2
13-2
13-3
Declaration of conformity in accordance

with the radio and telecommunications
terminal equipment directive 1999/5/EC........
Transmitter for keyless entry system
(left-hand drive vehicles) ..................................
Transmitter for keyless entry system
(right-hand drive vehicles)................................
Receiver for keyless entry system......................
Integrated unit (car immobilizer) .........................
Immobilizer........................................................
LF Oscillator......................................................
13-4
13-4
13-5
13-6
13-7
13-8
13-9
13
Black plate (392,1)
13-2
Supplement
Year of manufacture (Middle

East models only)
Speed limit, maximum torque and maximum power at rpm

(Middle East models only)
Model
Speed limit
km/h
AT
184
182
Maximum torque
Nm (kgfm)
229 (23.4)/4,400
Maximum power
kW (PS)
126 (172)/6,000
.
.
The calendar year when your vehicle was

manufactured is indicated in the Year of
manufacture label attached on the left
center pillar.
2.5 L
MT
The performance data above is the numeric value evaluated according to the SSA2462 quality
norm.
The performance data above is the numeric value evaluated from petrol with an octane rating of
90. (Research octane number)
Black plate (393,1)
Supplement
13-3
Fuel consumption and CO2-emissions (Europe only)

Model and Type
Fuel consumption according to

80/1268/EEC-2004/3/EC (L/100 km)
CO2-emissions according to
80/1268/EEC-2004/3/EC (g/km)
Urban
Extra-urban
Total
Urban
Extra-urban
Total
10.9
7.0
8.4
256
165
198
4AT
11.2
6.9
8.4
263
163
199
2.5 L non-turbo models 5MT
12.8
7.3
9.3
302
173
220
4AT
12.9
7.7
9.6
304
183
227
5MT
14.4
8.2
10.5
341
195
248
4AT
14.5
8.2
10.5
344
193
248
2.0 L models
2.5 L turbo models
5MT
13
Black plate (394,1)
13-4
Supplement
Declaration of conformity in accordance with the radio and telecommunications terminal

equipment directive 1999/5/EC
& Transmitter for keyless entry system (left-hand drive vehicles)
Black plate (395,1)
Supplement
13-5
& Transmitter for keyless entry system (right-hand drive vehicles)
13
CONTINUED
Black plate (396,1)
13-6
Supplement
& Receiver for keyless entry system
Black plate (397,1)
Supplement
13-7
& Integrated unit (car immobilizer)
13
CONTINUED
Black plate (398,1)
13-8
Supplement
& Immobilizer
Hereby, Fuji heavy Industries Ltd., declares that this SSPIMB01 is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant
provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Black plate (399,1)
Supplement
13-9
& LF Oscillator
Hereby, Fuji heavy Industries Ltd., declares that this SSPLF01 is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant
provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
13
Black plate (27,1)
Index
14
Black plate (2,1)
14-2
Index
A
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ..................................... 7-28
Warning light ................................................. 3-19, 7-28
Access key ................................................................. 2-7
Warning light ......................................... 2-17, 2-19, 3-24
Accessories....................................................... 5-3, 11-53
Accessory power outlet................................................. 6-9
Active head restraint..................................................... 1-5
Additional information for Europe ................................. 8-16
Air cleaner element ................................................... 11-22
Air conditioner ..................................................... 4-8, 4-11
Air filtration system..................................................... 4-14
Air flow selection.......................................................... 4-2
All-Wheel Drive warning light ....................................... 3-23
Aluminum wheel cleaning............................................ 10-3
Aluminum wheels...................................................... 11-44
Antenna system........................................................... 5-2
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ..................................... 7-28
Armrest....................................................................... 1-7
Ashtray ..................................................................... 6-12
AT OIL TEMP warning light ......................................... 3-19
Audio control button ................................................... 5-23
Audio set .................................................................... 5-4
Automatic climate control system ................................... 4-9
Automatic headlight beam leveler
Warning light ......................................................... 3-23
Automatic transmission ............................................... 7-18
Capacities ............................................................. 12-5
Fluid.................................................................... 11-27
MANUAL mode ..................................................... 7-21
Selector lever ........................................................ 7-19
Shift lock release.................................................... 7-24

SPORT mode ........................................................ 7-24
Temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP) ................. 3-19
Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/ELR) ........... 1-12
AUX unit operation ..................................................... 5-22
B
Battery .................................................................... 11-49
Jump starting .......................................................... 9-7
Replacement
(Keyless access with push-button start system)........ 2-23
Replacement (remote keyless entry system) .............. 2-26
Booster seat .............................................................. 1-32
Bottle holder ............................................................... 6-9
Brake
Assist.................................................................... 7-27
Booster ....................................................... 7-26, 11-35
Fluid ................................................................... 11-33
Pad and lining...................................................... 11-37
Parking ....................................................... 7-35, 11-38
Pedal .................................................................. 11-35
System.................................................................. 7-26
Brake pedal
Free play............................................................. 11-35
Reserve distance.................................................. 11-36
Brake system............................................................. 7-26
Warning light.......................................................... 3-21
Braking ..................................................................... 7-26
Tips ...................................................................... 7-26
Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings................... 11-37
Black plate (3,1)
Index
Bulb
Chart .................................................................. 12-10
Replacing............................................................. 11-54
C
Capacities ................................................................. 12-5
Cargo area
Cover ................................................................... 6-14
Light....................................................................... 6-3
Tie-down hooks ..................................................... 6-16
Catalytic converter ....................................................... 8-3
Center
Console .................................................................. 6-5
Ventilators ............................................................... 4-4
Center and side ventilators............................................ 4-4
Changing
Flat tire ................................................................... 9-2
Oil and oil filter ..................................................... 11-16
Charge warning light .................................................. 3-18
Checking
Brake pedal free play ............................................ 11-35
Brake pedal reserve distance ................................. 11-36
Clutch function...................................................... 11-36
Clutch pedal free play............................................ 11-36
Engine oil level ..................................................... 11-15
Fluid level ............................... 11-27, 11-31, 11-33, 11-34
Gear oil level ........................................................ 11-29
Child restraint systems ............................................... 1-25
Installation with A/ELR seatbelt................................ 1-29
ISOFIX anchor bars ............................................... 1-33
Top tether anchorages ............................................ 1-35
14-3
Child safety ................................................................... 5

Locks.................................................................... 2-31
Chime
Key........................................................................ 3-4
Seatbelt......................................................... 1-12, 3-15
Cleaning
Aluminum wheels ................................................... 10-3
Interior .................................................................. 10-5
Ventilation grille ...................................................... 4-13
Climate control system
Automatic ............................................................... 4-9
Manual................................................................... 4-4
Clock ........................................................................ 3-31
Clutch
Fluid ................................................................... 11-34
Pedal .................................................................. 11-36
Coat hook.................................................................. 6-14
Coin tray .................................................................... 6-7
Coolant ................................................................... 11-19
Coolant temperature high warning light.......................... 3-18
Coolant temperature low indicator light .......................... 3-18
Cooling system ........................................................ 11-19
Corrosion protection............................................. 8-9, 10-4
Cruise control ............................................................ 7-38
Indicator light ................................................. 3-30, 7-41
Set indicator light............................................ 3-30, 7-41
Cup holder ................................................................. 6-7
Front passengers.................................................... 6-7
Rear passengers .................................................... 6-8
Black plate (4,1)
14-4
Index
D
Declaration of conformity in a accordance with the radio
and telecommunications terminal equipment directive
1999/5/EC.............................................................. 13-4
Differential gear oil
Front ................................................................... 11-28
Rear.................................................................... 11-29
Dimensions ............................................................... 12-2
Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ........................ 7-27
Dome light .................................................................. 6-2
Door
Locks ..................................................................... 2-4
Open warning light ................................................. 3-23
Double locking system................................................ 2-29
Drive belts................................................................ 11-25
Driving
All-Wheel Drive vehicle ............................................. 8-5
All-Wheel Drive warning light ................................... 3-23
Car phone/cell phone .................................................. 7
Drinking ..................................................................... 6
Drugs ........................................................................ 6
Foreign countries ..................................................... 8-4
Pets .......................................................................... 7
Snowy and icy roads ................................................ 8-8
Tips...................................................................... 7-16
Tired or sleepy............................................................ 7
Dual range ................................................................ 7-17
E
Electrical system ........................................................ 12-4
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
system ........................................................... 3-21, 7-29
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ............................. 1-11
Engine
Compartment overview.......................................... 11-13
Coolant ............................................................... 11-19
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ............................. 5, 8-2
Hood .................................................................. 11-11
Oil ...................................................................... 11-15
Overheating ........................................................... 9-10
Exterior care .............................................................. 10-2
F
Flat tires ..................................................................... 9-2
Floor mat................................................................... 6-13
Fluid level
Automatic transmission ......................................... 11-27
Brake.................................................................. 11-33
Clutch ................................................................. 11-34
Power steering ..................................................... 11-31
Folding mirror switch................................................... 3-47
Front
Differential gear oil................................................ 11-28
Fog light switch ...................................................... 3-38
Seatbelt pretensioners ............................................ 1-20
Seats ..................................................................... 1-2
Front fog light............................................................. 3-38
Indicator light ......................................................... 3-30
Black plate (5,1)
Index
Front seats
Forward and backward adjustment ............................. 1-3
Reclining................................................................. 1-3
Seat height adjustment (drivers seat) ......................... 1-4
Fuel ........................................................................... 7-2
Consumption and CO2-emissions (Europe only)......... 13-3
Economy hints......................................................... 8-2
Filler lid and cap ...................................................... 7-2
Gauge .................................................................. 3-13
Requirements .......................................................... 7-2
Fuses ...................................................................... 11-51
Fuses and circuits ...................................................... 12-7
G
Glove box ................................................................... 6-4
H
Hazard warning flasher ......................................... 3-10, 9-2
Head restraint adjustment ............................................. 1-5
Rear....................................................................... 1-7
Headlight
Beam leveler ......................................................... 3-36
Flasher ................................................................. 3-34
Indicator light......................................................... 3-30
Washer................................................................. 3-46
Headlights........................................................ 3-33, 11-55
Heater operation .......................................................... 4-6
High beam indicator light ............................................ 3-30
High/low beam change (dimmer).................................. 3-34
Hill start assist (MT vehicles) ....................................... 7-36
Hill start assist warning light ................................ 3-22, 7-37
14-5
Hitch stabilizer ........................................................... 8-14

Horn ......................................................................... 3-49
Hose and connections............................................... 11-19
I
Ignition switch ............................................................. 3-3
Light ...................................................................... 3-4
Illumination brightness control ...................................... 3-35
Immobilizer ................................................................. 2-3
Indicator light .................................................. 2-4, 3-29
Indicator light
Coolant temperature low.......................................... 3-18
Cruise control ................................................ 3-30, 7-41
Cruise control set ........................................... 3-30, 7-41
Front fog light......................................................... 3-30
Headlight............................................................... 3-30
High beam............................................................. 3-30
Immobilizer ..................................................... 2-4, 3-29
LO position (dual range MT vehicles) ........................ 3-29
Rear fog................................................................ 3-30
Selector lever/Gear position ..................................... 3-29
SPORT mode ........................................................ 3-29
Turn signal ............................................................ 3-30
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF......................... 3-21, 7-33
Vehicle Dynamics Control operation.................. 3-29, 7-32
Information display...................................................... 3-31
Inside mirror .............................................................. 3-46
Interior lights ............................................................... 6-2
ISOFIX anchor bars .................................................... 1-33
Black plate (6,1)
14-6
Index
J
Jack handle............................................................... 9-16
Jump starting............................................................... 9-7
K
Key
Number .................................................................. 2-2
Reminder chime....................................................... 3-4
Replacement ........................................................... 2-4
Keyless access entry function...................................... 2-10
Keyless access with push-button start system ................. 2-7
Disabling keyless access functions........................... 2-22
Locking and unlocking doors ........................... 2-10, 2-14
Unlocking rear gate ................................................ 2-16
Warning chimes and warning light ............................ 2-16
When access key does not operate
properly ................................................ 2-22, 3-9, 7-13
Keyless entry system
(vehicle with push-button start system) .............. 2-14, 2-16
Keyless entry system
(vehicle without push-button start system) .................. 2-24
Keys .......................................................................... 2-2
L
Lap pretensioner........................................................ 1-22
Leather seat materials ................................................ 10-5
License plate light ..................................................... 11-59
Light
Cargo area.............................................................. 6-3
Control switch........................................................ 3-33
Dome ..................................................................... 6-2
License plate ........................................................ 11-59
Map ....................................................................... 6-3

LO position indicator light (dual range MT vehicles) ........ 3-29
Loading your vehicle ................................................... 8-11
Low fuel warning light ......................................... 3-13, 3-22
M
Main fuse ................................................................ 11-52
Maintenance
Precautions ........................................................... 11-9
Schedule ............................................................... 11-3
Seatbelt................................................................. 1-20
Tools..................................................................... 9-15
Malfunction indicator lamp (Check Engine light).............. 3-17
Manual
Climate control system ............................................. 4-4
Seat....................................................................... 1-3
Transmission ......................................................... 7-14
Transmission oil ................................................... 11-26
Map light .................................................................... 6-3
Meters and gauges..................................................... 3-11
Mirrors ...................................................................... 3-46
N
New vehicle break-in driving ......................................... 8-2
O
Odometer/Trip meter ................................................... 3-12
Off road driving ........................................................... 8-6
Oil filter ................................................................... 11-16
Oil level
Engine ................................................................ 11-15
Black plate (7,1)
Index
Front differential gear ............................................ 11-28

Manual transmission.............................................. 11-26
Rear differential .................................................... 11-29
Oil pressure warning light............................................ 3-18
Outside mirrors .......................................................... 3-47
Outside temperature indicator ...................................... 3-32
Overhead console ........................................................ 6-6
Overheating engine .................................................... 9-10
P
Parking
Brake ................................................................... 7-35
Brake stroke......................................................... 11-38
Tips...................................................................... 7-35
Parking your vehicle ................................................... 7-35
Periodic inspections ..................................................... 8-4
Petrol fuel ................................................................... 7-2
Power
Door locking switch .................................................. 2-6
Outside mirrors ....................................................... 3-47
Seat ....................................................................... 1-4
Steering ................................................................ 7-25
Steering fluid ........................................................ 11-31
Windows............................................................... 2-32
Power steering warning light........................................ 3-23
Precautions against vehicle modification ............... 1-24, 1-56
Preparing to drive ........................................................ 7-5
Push-button
Ignition switch.......................................................... 3-5
Starting and stopping engine ..................................... 7-5
14-7
R
Rear
Combination lights ................................................ 11-58
Fog light switch ...................................................... 3-38
Gate ............................................................. 2-34, 9-14
Seats ..................................................................... 1-7
Rear differential
Gear oil ............................................................... 11-29
Oil temperature warning light ................................... 3-19
Rear fog light ............................................................. 3-38
Indicator light ......................................................... 3-30
Rear seat
Center table............................................................ 6-6
Folding down .......................................................... 1-9
Reclining ................................................................ 1-9
Rear window
Defogger button ..................................................... 3-43
Wiper and washer switch......................................... 3-42
Wiper blades........................................................ 11-47
Recommended
Automatic transmission fluid................................... 11-28
Brake fluid ........................................................... 11-33
Clutch fluid .......................................................... 11-34
OIL grade and
viscosity ..................... 11-17, 11-18, 11-27, 11-29, 11-31
Power steering fluid .............................................. 11-32
Spark plugs ......................................................... 11-24
Refueling.................................................................... 7-2
(vehicle with push-button start system) ............... 2-14, 2-16
Black plate (8,1)
14-8
Index

(vehicle without push-button start system) .................. 2-24
Replacement
Brake pad and lining ............................................. 11-37
Wiper blades ........................................................ 11-45
Replacing
Air cleaner element ............................................... 11-22
Battery
(Keyless access with push-button start system) ....... 2-23
Battery (remote keyless entry system) ...................... 2-26
Replacing bulbs ........................................................ 11-54
Cargo area light .................................................... 11-60
Dome light ........................................................... 11-60
Door step light ...................................................... 11-60
Front position light................................................. 11-58
Front turn signal light............................................. 11-58
Headlight ............................................................. 11-55
License plate light ................................................. 11-59
Map light.............................................................. 11-60
Rear combination light ........................................... 11-58
Side turn signal light.............................................. 11-58
Rocking the vehicle .................................................... 8-10
Roof rail.................................................................... 8-11
S
Safety
Precautions when driving ............................................. 4
Symbol ...................................................................... 2
Warnings ................................................................... 2
Seat
Fabric................................................................... 10-5
Heater.................................................................... 1-6
Seat height adjustment................................................. 1-4
Seatbelt......................................................................... 4
Maintenance .......................................................... 1-20
Pretensioners......................................................... 1-20
Safety tips ............................................................. 1-10
Warning light and chime .................................. 1-12, 3-15
Seatbelts ................................................................... 1-10
Security ID plate.......................................................... 2-3
Selector lever............................................................. 7-19
Position indicator .................................................... 3-29
Shift lock release........................................................ 7-24
Shopping bag hook..................................................... 6-13
Shoulder pretensioners ............................................... 1-20
Snow tires ......................................................... 8-9, 11-38
Snowy and icy roads ................................................... 8-8
Spark plugs ............................................................. 11-24
Specifications............................................................. 12-2
Speed limit, maximum torque and maximum
power at rpm (Middle East models only)..................... 13-2
Speedometer ............................................................. 3-12
SPORT mode indicator light......................................... 3-29
SRS
Curtain airbag ........................................................ 1-48
Frontal airbag......................................................... 1-42
Side airbag ............................................................ 1-48
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)... 4, 1-37
SRS airbag system
Monitors ................................................................ 1-54
Servicing ............................................................... 1-55
Warning light.......................................................... 3-16
Black plate (9,1)
Index
Steering wheel
Power................................................................... 7-25
Tilt/telescopic......................................................... 3-49
Storage compartment ................................................... 6-4
Sun shade ................................................................ 2-36
Sun visors................................................................... 6-4
Sunroof............................................................. 2-35, 9-15
Supplemental Restraint System airbag (SRS) ................ 1-37
Synthetic leather upholstery ........................................ 10-5
T
Tachometer ............................................................... 3-13
Temperature warning light
AT OIL TEMP ........................................................ 3-19
Rear differential oil ................................................. 3-19
Tie-down hooks ......................................................... 9-11
Tire
Chains.................................................................. 8-10
Inspection ............................................................ 11-38
Pressures and wear .............................................. 11-39
Replacement ........................................................ 11-42
Rotation ............................................................... 11-41
Types .................................................................. 11-38
Tires......................................................................... 12-5
Tires and wheels....................................................... 11-38
Top tether anchorages ................................................ 1-35
Towing...................................................................... 9-10
All wheels on the ground ........................................ 9-13
Flat-bed truck ........................................................ 9-13
Tie-down hooks ..................................................... 9-11
Weight.................................................................. 8-12
14-9
Trailer
Hitches.................................................................. 8-13
Towing .................................................................. 8-12
Towing tips ............................................................ 8-14
Turn signal
Indicator lights........................................................ 3-30
Lever .................................................................... 3-34
U
Under-floor storage compartment.................................. 6-16
V
Vanity mirror ............................................................... 6-4
Vehicle
Identification ........................................................ 12-11
Symbols .................................................................... 2
Vehicle Dynamics Control
OFF indicator light .......................................... 3-20, 7-33
OFF switch ............................................................ 7-34
Operation indicator light................................... 3-29, 7-33
System.................................................................. 7-31
Warning light.................................................. 3-20, 7-33
Ventilator .................................................................... 4-2
W
Warning and indicator lights ......................................... 3-14
Warning light
ABS.............................................................. 3-19, 7-28
Access key ........................................... 2-17, 2-19, 3-24
All-Wheel Drive ...................................................... 3-23
Anti-lock Brake System ........................................... 3-19
Black plate (10,1)
14-10
Index
AT OIL TEMP ........................................................ 3-19

Automatic headlight beam leveler............................. 3-23
Brake system ........................................................ 3-21
Charge ................................................................. 3-18
Coolant temperature high ........................................ 3-18
Door open............................................................. 3-23
Hill start assist ............................................... 3-22, 7-36
Low fuel........................................................ 3-13, 3-22
Oil pressure .......................................................... 3-18
Power steering ...................................................... 3-23
Rear differential oil temperature ............................... 3-19
Seatbelt ................................................................ 3-15
SRS airbag system ................................................ 3-16
Vehicle Dynamics Control ............................... 3-20, 7-33
Warranties ..................................................................... 1
Washing ................................................................... 10-2
Waxing and polishing ................................................. 10-3
Wear indicators......................................................... 11-41
Wheel
Alignment.............................................................. 12-6
Aluminum............................................................. 11-44
Balance ............................................................... 11-40
Covers................................................................. 11-43
Replacement ........................................................ 11-43
Windows................................................................... 2-32
Windshield
Washer fluid ......................................................... 11-44
Wiper and washer switches..................................... 3-41
Wiper blades ........................................................ 11-46
Wiper deicer.......................................................... 3-44
Winter
Driving ................................................................... 8-7
Tires ............................................................. 8-9, 11-38
Wiper and washer ...................................................... 3-39
Y
Year of manufacture (Middle East models only) .............. 13-2
Black plate (2,1)
GAS STATION REFERENCE

& Fuel:
! Non-turbo models
Use only unleaded petrol. The use of unleaded petrol with 95
Octane or higher is recommended. If unleaded petrol with 95
Octane or higher is not available, unleaded petrol with 90
Octane or higher may be used. (Research octane number)
! Australia models
Use only unleaded petrol with 90 Octane or higher. (Research
octane number)
For optimum engine performance and driveability, it is
recommended that you use premium grade unleaded petrol.
! Turbo models
Use only unleaded petrol with 95 Octane or higher. (Research
octane number)
& Fuel capacity:

60 liters (15.9 US gal, 13.2 Imp gal)
& Engine oil:

Use only API classification SM or SL with the words ENERGY
CONSERVING
or ACEA specification A1, A3 or A5
or ILSAC specification GF-3 or GF-4 (Refer to the Engine oil
section for complete viscosity requirements.)
& Engine oil capacity:

& Cold tire pressure:

See the label located under the drivers door latch.

Owners Manual - Subaru Forester MY09

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Owners Manual - Subaru Forester MY09

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Owners Manual - Subaru Forester MY09

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Black plate (1,1)

This manual uses recycled paper.

Model "A8140GE-A" EDITED: 2007/ 12/ 13

Black plate (2,1)

This manual describes the following vehicle types.*

* The illustrated vehicle is one of the FORESTER series.

Model "A8140GE-A" EDITED: 2007/ 12/ 13

Black plate (3,1)

& Vehicles with HID headlights

How to use this Owners

Chapter 4: Climate control

Model "A8140GE-A" EDITED: 2007/ 12/ 13

Black plate (4,1)

& Safety warnings

& Safety symbol

Keep flames away

You will find a circle with a slash through it

Power door lock

Model "A8140GE-A" EDITED: 2007/ 12/ 13

Black plate (5,1)

Passengers windows lock

Windshield wiper and washer

Windshield wiper mist (for

Instrument panel outlets

Front fog lights

Rear window wiper

Instrument panel outlets and

Rear fog lights

Rear window washer

Hazard warning flasher

Windshield defroster and foot

Headlight beam leveler

Tail lights, license plate lights

Rear window defogger/Outside mirror defogger/Windshield wiper deicer

ISOFIX anchor bars

Child restraint top tether anchorages

Model "A8140GE-A" EDITED: 2007/ 12/ 13

Black plate (6,1)

Door unlock (transmitter)

Safety precautions when

considerable speed and force.

Model "A8140GE-A" EDITED: 2007/ 12/ 13

Black plate (7,1)

with considerable speed and

. Never leave unattended children

& Engine exhaust gas (carbon

Model "A8140GE-A" EDITED: 2007/ 12/ 13

Black plate (8,1)

& Drinking and driving

& Drugs and driving

Model "A8140GE-A" EDITED: 2007/ 12/ 13

Black plate (9,1)

& Modification of your vehicle

& Driving vehicles equipped

& Car phone/cell phone and

& Driving with pets

Model "A8140GE-A" EDITED: 2007/ 12/ 13

Black plate (10,1)

& Tire pressures

Model "A8140GE-A" EDITED: 2007/ 12/ 13